Home

PMT User Manual - Dewetron America

1. EE 381 Wizards M 382 praeerat 383 New connection AWIZ AN E E n 388 New tape WWI al 6 EE 388 Newguery 389 OUS V 390 Query consi ctor 393 Complicated query 395 Report viewing printing and nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 397 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Contents Vil COMMON IK c 399 hace eet nas 400 FREDO MU PININ be 400 FEX LSEM TEDO pue 403 REpOrCE x 9 me EE 404 EXDOIT IO PDF 404 Expono Open DOOUTIeliEous osos tacite ihr a a 406 407 EXO LOVE X COs M Emm 408 TO FORMAT S 409 Expo FON NERI
2. Measurements 0 cos phi RMS Graph P 0 D RMS Graph f AMS Graph I fe 0 863 7 22 01 2009 22 40 00 0 959 7 22 01 2009 22 40 00 099 7 22 01 2009 22 40 00 24 Measurements v 4 1 83556 Administrator By clicking Edit Color Graph you can change the current scaling of this presentation Edit Color Chart Colori i aroo Auto Colormax cBlack 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 89 Auto chooses an automatic scaling among the chosen colors Otherwise the adequate values are taken for scaling In the graph you can zoom in and out by using the right mouse button Clicking on the the graph the reticle jumps to this X Y intersection point In the title of the graph the current position is shown in the data field In the graph on the right you see the spectrum of the currently chosen moment In the graph below you see the harmonics and frequency respectively over a time period The caption 1 identical with that in the usual FFT diagram Both all chosen channels and the positions in the data are shown here Commands in the Full FFT Spectrum Print Report prints the report this report must be defined in the first print in the properties chart Print average graph Print Col
3. 244 CPIE DANOS D 246 SPAI 248 Report with two data levels 22 249 253 M lipage 255 RowCount and PageCount 256 257 257 Oher group 259 Reset PAGE MUMDEIS DU RE 262 DiI COW GhOUDSaarecqashaasaiacarent apteedswoecien ITI 262 263 ATS LUNGCUOMS 264 Page and report 267 INSEM
4. s 356 EDEN OC WS POLIS 357 358 World 359 Entering parameters and transferring them into 360 TST ACTION OF COM m TR EE SEU ITI TIME 361 Severaldialodiue tO haben edu Due deep 362 Dialogue TOris matiaglhiisse carcasses vances FERA tate I 363 Data access COMPONGING doss ot onset ac 365 C mp nenis EET TTE ELO DES 366 TitxDBEookupCOmbOBQOX a te aed en Mere ed dosis qud disque eee 367 ETE m 368 e 370 2 372 a A Du e ds 372 oimMple repon olihe LIST a 373 Repor withparameters quei eiia a beds Cove 375 SCTE ER E 377 Report a 377 378 I 380
5. The main setup of our example was a graph including 11 data lines Therefore all 11 data 45 lines will be displayed The symbol X is a checkbox object of the button on the left side 6 3 3 Sub Reports In order to add sub reports use the button on the left side The sub report will be indicated on this page after being placed in the report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 149 Titel nae E m Paget of Total 50160 Diagrams ar r Lo cation Le gend MOCULECAF TION 4 Start Sraphinto StartTim S iie E EP raphinfo End Time aus ROT generated Date Time Se TED HOURS ose screens E Power Quality Division 3 i Picture object The page selector will then include the sub report i Code Page Page Subreporti pa Each sub report can be generated as any other one and is part of the whole report Page changes will be generated automatically In our example a sub report of the full EN50160 report was generated 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Generating Reports EN50160 Diagrams Localan zit gererakd Chanel uU mir Li U mir mir L3 THD UJ LI THD JU L THD JU Alle ALLS uz d Frequency 6 4 Summary Reports A sumreport shows all values of the RMS and FFT data that exceeded the maximum pe
6. 61 67 PON oO MENG soe E 68 unt S aiu M 68 70 Setup Of aft FET 70 Step 2 a 2 em tese ous ete ne ere 71 Subs Graph DENION ds 6 eo or eir cm Ace ee ee iade ie 73 Step S SuD Graph Charnels sus eroe 73 Starting an FFT Spectrum Setup Ea KANEEN KENN 75 spectra e 75 76 THeNavigaton t oaa ea 77 1 lt 77 DOS Cie WIEN LOMA P M 78 SDFRT a 78 SPECION 83 F ll FFT Spectrum Setlinigs ciii enis 83 OS UIT OS 83 snaseuoneeactecesnananeaaeameateasnasee 83 SEMINGS Sup Hr c
7. 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 20 64946 20 623 80 20 547 70 20 598 45 20 649 16 20 699 90 20 750 53 20 801 35 20 852 09 TT 46 oO c 30 99283 1 1 en 20 902 52 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EM M ERE E e 1 oc 1 1 e 1 1 MD __ ERE MONT ME tll o8 TTE D 1 oO 207 1 al ee UK pies A i A 20 953 56 21 004 29 21 055 02 Printing and exporting functions are available in the menu and the navigation bar 5 2 Guided Setup In general an assistant will help you to define the diagram 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 56 5 2 7 1 Step 1 General Settings Setup Step 1 General Settings Default Module Switcher Events Alarms Caption Description Show chart legend Data P
8. E r 1 Code Data Fagel i ES a i 100 200 pes 40 _ 1 Report ia EB Use the Text object and Draw cat hjects to draw a di Tz fis ADOT able SEC ME Ext ODJECT an raw Category ODJeCTS a ladgrarm UT 0 53 ADOT able abo Pagel mu The Customers Eable This table contains all information about t ADOTablel the customer such as company name contact phone Fax ADOTable Lr a x Properties Events B 2 02 Orders CloseDatasou True Database ACOConnection 1 Description FieldAliases T5trings Filter The Orders table 3 This table contains all orders made customers Table is linked to the IndexMame ADOTablez Customers table by master detail Master Not assigned relationship MasterFields Name 4D0Tablel 9 1 11 1 Components description Components description Top Let us examine usage of components for data access via ADO They are available by ADO ad
9. 9 1 7 1 This report is constructed using the same data as we used in the previous one The columns highlighted with gray in the picture are calculated automatically and are not included in the initial data set Construct a cross report Construct a cross report Top Now let us turn from theory to practice We will construct a simple cross report which will di employees salary during four years To do this we need the crosstest table which is available 1 FastReport DEMOSMAIN folder The table contains data of the following kind Name Year salary Ann 1999 3300 2002 2000 Create a new project in Delphi put T Table TfrxDBDataSet and TfrxReport components form and set them Tablel DatabaseName c NProgram Files FastReport 4NDemosMMain TableName crosstest db the DatabaseName property value of course must correspond with the path to your FastReport install folder frxDBDataSet1 DataSet Table UserName SimpleCross mt For cross reports designing one should use the TfrxCrossObject component 8 from the FastR component palette Just put it on the Delphi form it is not required to set anything At the same time IrxCross unit which contains all necessary functionality will be added to the uses list Enter the report design mode First of all connect our data source using the ReportlData menu S the DB cross tab object z from the list Click on the
10. aes 85 UID Graph Ceti 86 Staino Full FFT Specialties 88 FEET a LIN DEVE 88 Grouped VIEW A 90 Alarmi 6 c 91 Setup Alarm oen LL 91 OS bo epee bac CAPT E BD OS ED ODE NE SP PPP 94 NAVIGATION 94 The Ghamel sem 95 T List Transients 96 SETUP ot Transient M 96 The Transient Liste ccoir 99 100 PEEV ON vH EE PE 100 PUTING EE 103 Changing the chart axis of a e eos Rasen ede Que dis debui cca 103 X M 106 CE 107 TOpological il rec 109 Setup up of topological VIEWS mE 110 Ecdihing tbe A E EARTE E 111 topol
11. hub Redes an we Apr 4 4 ds gt ce oco A 2 25 55 5 RUN EOS EN QURE LR D alla a on a a ie be ee n a Device Device printing the relevant graph printing the report which has to be defined in the first print in the properties exporting the relevant graph as BMP WMF or the raw data o 3D 5 Print Graph Print Report X Axis Y Axis Test Plot UW Webling IKEA 20kv UW Webling IKEA 20kV Save Graph k 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh iagram f the di ion o izat Isua 3D v you receive a 000000000000000000000000000000001111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 If you choose 3D Visualization of Measured Data 70 X Axis P Device 01 UV Webling UW Webling IKEA 20k Mode Y Axis 0 Device 601 UV Webling UW Webling IKEA 20k Mode In the 3D diagram you can zoom in out and turn the diagram using the scroll bar 5 4 FFT The setup of an FFT view is very similar to that
12. wel feof fe capi Link Voltage L1 v nu Voltage L2 V eaa Current Le A Voltage L3 v Current L3 A 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 32 2 4 2 3 Advanced Setup Switch to DEWESoft full control For further information use the DEWESoft manual Advanced Setup alE xl bh wanian Hil B Dewesaft Central cori i Dare Simb ag i Ck Er Dra Be 4 1 ii Fe e el Haar 5a zip i Dra Erm opt i MEDIE alus o pns EID EOR AE EUER FK i NE CRUCE E nakin ital Math Prane Irae 1 rick fal DADP rH f O40 PF He 174 THE Is Meaauectenis he Erni facta Switch back to the basic setup Basic Setup 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 33 3 1 Starting Starting PMT the first time When you start
13. 400 PageDown Ctrl PageUp Next previous page scrolling PageDown Home Document beginning 9 1 14 2 Mouse control Mouse control Top Left button Click on selected object in interactive report report scrolling in hand mode move mouse with pressed button zoom in is performed in magnifier mode Right button Context menu in magnifier mode zoom out is performed Double click It full screen mode it performs returning to normal conditions Mouse scroll Report list scrolling 9 1 14 3 Report printing Report printing Top To print a report click amp button or Ctrl P hotkey The window appears it is printing dialogue 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 401 Printer Mame c3 Microsoft Office Document Image Writer Where Pages AI Current page Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Okher Print All pages Order Direct 1 9 Duplex Default Print to File Copies m Collate Prink mode B gt Default w Frink on sheet Default Let s look at options available in this dialogue The Printer group you can select a printer via which you want to print a report set Printer printer properties for example printing quality and choose print to file Mame 9 Microsoft Office Document Image Writer bul Where P
14. 169 2 170 Mow Borrar 170 3 Security 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh IV PMT Users and US r GrOUDS acca a 173 c 173 dieci E 175 hiblanrsdcA uricge 176 Part VIII Other 178 1 COMMANGINE FUNCHOMS a N Rs 178 Stardng without a Sus To os vox toad 178 Printing Reports from the Command Line 179 B Mall Es 180 PECIA 180 OVEIVIEW ELM OE UM 180 Operatlon IEEE IR 182 SOUS a E 184 Alarms occ 185 8 ape n o e HEU 186 l str ment Channels 187 188 Kolo erore ualle ENTE 189 DeviceSwitcher 60870 2222 4 10 190 Oulllhes cue C Ei MA 192 3 IMPON ci m H 193 Import Export of SOLUS iion
15. 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 109 m Mathema mcs COME Li A COLOR GRAPH CAPTION UNITSTR MATHFORMULA Y 255 128 0 D0 100 Left Fight HH dk PA mee Oe Store the settings by clicking the button v After closing CLOSE the formula editor the MATH channel will be displayed in the graph Supporttrakt 18 09 2007 21 08 29 E Supporttrakt PNA710Supporttrakt Supporttrakt Voltage FAST 18 09 2007 21 08 29 Supporttrakt 1 i Supporttrakt Supporttrakt Supporttrakt Supporttrakt Supporttrakt Supporttrakt lt lt lt 42 lt VE bE EEE _ 1 Supporttrakt FFT U_L3per 0 156 25 390625 625 859 375 1171 875 1484375 1796875 2109375 2421875 2734375 3046 875 3359 375 3671 875 3984 375 4296875 4609375 4921875 Hz 5 8 Topological Views Topological views are used to give a nice geographic overview of the system But not only the overview can be shown Also the following functions are included e Icons indicate the position of the measurement systems 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 110 e Start of different view setups from icons e Indication of alarms e Indication of disturbances e List of alarms disturbances with time data 5 8 1 Setup up of topological views Caption Description Administrator root Owner Group Others Module List MODULE SETUP
16. M 215 Hello World rebort example 215 e UH PEE 216 PERM tags in the Text T 218 Displaying expressions with the help of the Text 219 Bands ii mmauenrcameanvanccncauassesaasquuardunqatauecaissaicvenaicambentananuseuayuays 221 Dieta DANG HH 222 betta 223 MISC HE Moo na 224 Displaying DB fields with the help of the Text 227 228 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Contents V p C n 229 Hz cius T T a 232 RODOR WII DIGIUEOS cep Si o ete t ide E oxi p 233 Mu ltiHined GISDIAV ING M o 235 eee EE RES 237 WEAD Of TT T LT T UTI 240 Displaying data i The orm or a Table iios seri reno CERES conte 241 6
17. 420 extension lines as far as possible for objects to have the same horizontal coordinate Memo 1 Memo 2 Bad Good Objects are overlapping In such a case on export to table diagram format additional useless lines and columns and also 3 additional cells in crossing zone are created It is recommended to get acquainted with demo reports included with the FastReport installation for mastering basic methods of optimum report development 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh
18. 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 360 Caption Hello World TfrxButtonControl Caption Default True ModalResult mrOk Set the BorderStyle bsDialog property in the form As we can see both the controls and the form have the same set of properties as those of the corresponding Delphi controls As soon as design of the dialogue form is finished return to the report design page and place a Text object with some text in it there Preview the report and you will see the dialogue form Hallo When clicking on the OK button a report will be constructed and displayed If closing a form via the O button the report will not be constructed This is the mechanism of FastReport working if there are dialogue forms a report it is constructed only when each form is closed with the IE button i e it returns ModalResult mrOk That is why the ModalResult property of the button is set equal to mrOk 9 1 10 3 Entering parameters and transferring them into a report Entering parameters transferring them into report Let us make this example more complicated in order to show how to transfer the values entered in the dialogue form into a report To perform this modify the dialogue form in the following way 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 361 Place a Text object containing the following text a page You e
19. Jo a n Alarm all modules gt Supporttrakt 18 09 2007 21 08 29 5000 27 08 2007 11 54 11 all modules gt Supporttrakt 18 09 2007 13 53 25 all modules Supporttrakt 18 09 2007 13 53 25 all modules Start Page emo neports n I Oo 9 B Standards a 5 Harmonics Di OG EN50160Star 50160 G EN50160Delta 160 Cj training Werner D 50160 EN50160 Diagram 50160 DISDIP EN50160 E vents D 50160 FFT Powerkstatus Powerkstatus PowerkstatusB PowerkstatusC Functions Click on the modules and a list of setups comes up to be started directly from here The icons will automatically change in case of alarms or transient faults On the bottom is an automatically updated list with all actual faults and errors including time data 5 9 Event Lists Events are typically losses of the supply voltage according IEC 61000 4 30 Those events can be generated by the measurement instruments by using triggers with the name DISDIP These events are later automatically evaluated by the program Eventfinder which runs on the SQL server Further information can
20. 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 337 10800 3100 1700 3300 mmm 3500 mm 2100 1900 900 sms 100 mss 3200 9300 mam 2201 85100 m 12033 13300 11999 11200 3500 39999 Red bar is displayed 1f cell value is less than 100 yellow less than 3000 green more that 3000 Let s start with our report Put the DB Cross tab object a report page and setup it s properties Crass Eab structure Year I0 4 2 Salary Sur Cna ann an ee RM Turn off the Auto Size property and setup the column widths as shown below Now we add the shape object into our table To do this select the Rectangle object and put it inside the cell 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 338 E Line object Diagonal line u Diagonal line Diagonal line a Diagonal line Rectangle J Rounded rectangle Ellipse Triangle In the same way put another 2 rectangles Now create a script that will display the needed number of colored shapes depending on cell value To do this select the cell and create OnBeforePrint event handler OnAFterPrink OnBeforePrint OnPreviewr lic i Write the following code in the event handler pay attention to the shape names our inserted shapes have exactly these names procedure DBCrossiCel
21. E Configuration General Upload Module Dictionary Dewesoft Upload Programme COMMON 2_2u_3_Fotos Adobe Ahead Apple Software Update ARCHIVE ATI Technologies aucotec C3 Autodesk WHIP BMY SECURITY 2004 O Bonjour Cewe Ch Editor CheckPoint Cisco Systems ComPlus Applications Corel Dewetron 5 DEWESoft65 5 DEWESoft66 5 PMTxxx DIFX O DivXCodec DVDFab HD Decrypter 4 Fluke Gemeinsame Dateien Google Hardcopy HartlauerFotoService3 uy Select the program directory to upload and click Start Upload After finishing this all other users will get the new software Choose the directory including the DEWESoft zip This file is transferred to the server if you click start DEWESoft upload In the file DEWESoft zip you normally find the file DEWESoft exe However it is also possible to transfer other files to the zip archive The zip archive has to be created by the user himself The DEWESoft zip file can be obtained from DEWETRON 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 159 Update General Auf den Server laden Module w rterbuch 31 A X Lokaler Datentr ger C dewesoft Dewetron IE WE Sorte Addons 1c Backgrounds Data DEWEsoft 5_b2 Manual MultiLang Script
22. 2 AHD DO 0 03 0 02 0 02 E P Ww Cag 2 AHO DO 0 17 0 03 0 21 EN P oo W gt 2 4 440 00 50 00 0 02 50 03 Tuum lt gt PMT v 4 0 80 619 Administrator Markers and Zoom By clicking into the diagram window up to two markers can be set as shown in the picture below The values as well as their difference can be shown in the legend window In order to zoom in you have to draw a virtual window by clicking the right mouse button and moving from left to right in the diagram To zoom out you click the right mouse button and draw from right to left If the calculations for statistics and quantile values are active these recalculations are started automatically 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 52 DEWETRON Process Monitoring Tool x General Visualisation P Print e 22 12 2008 11 54 45 29 12 2008 11 54 45 c in Chart Reset Marker 4 Mads PM Export Graph EZ chart axes active Trigger 1 Points Reporting Back RAW flagged Forward Load Copy to Clipboard File SG auto refresh T Active Trigger 2 X Edit Data Navigation A ENS0160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20kV ax Visualisations 50160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20k Start Page H Root C3 Demo Reports HC Standards 5 Harmonics Cj Events hi 50160 EN50160 Cj Berichte 5 Leittechnik 1 2 9520 955 30 274 05 T 20 785 53 278
23. 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 363 Set ModalResult properties of and Cancel buttons mrOk and mrCancel accordingly Now run the report First of all we will be offered to answer questions from the first dialogue name are there any children then on clicking IE from the second one children s names After clicking IE in the second dialogue the report will be built In such a way works FastReport kernel involving several dialogue boxes they appear in the order of their creation moreover every further dialogue will be displayed after clicking OK in the previous one with ModalResult property mrOk If any dialogue were denied via Cancel or cross on window heading report building would stop 9 1 10 6 Dialogue forms managing Dialogue forms managing Top In the previous example both dialogue forms are displayed irrespective of the fact whether we ticked Have children or not Let us show how to hide the second dialogue in case when this flag is disabled To perform this create OnClick handler of IE button on the first dialogue form double click on the button to create handler PascalScript procedure ButtonlOnClick Sender TfrxComponent begin DialogPage2 Visible CheckBoxl Checkeqg end C4 Script void ButtonlOnClick TfrxComponent Sender DialogPage2 Visible CheckBoxl Checkeg This code hides second dialogue form DialogPage2 if flag 1s not marked Preview th
24. Specie Category Category Child hildi Length cm Bio Length Link the Masterdata band to the Child band by setting it s Child property in the object inspector Now each time the Masterdata band prints the Child band will be printed immediately afterward 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 248 Number 90020 ategary Triggerish ame Clown Tnggertish cm e c 0030 ategory Snapp er Number Red Emperor r zl e r zl zn 3 e ength cm As you can see now the title 1 typed exactly where it 1s supposed to be In order to avoid child band s transferring to the next page which basically means it will be widowed from the parent band enable the Keepchild property for the parent band KeepChild in the object inspector 9 1 2 21 Shifting objects Shifting objects Top You have already seen how the Shift property works Let us look at the next mode of shifting Shift on overlapping In the object inspector the ShiftMode smWhenOverlapped property value corresponds to this mode Thus object shifting will be performed in case when the object from above overlaps the given object during stretching Three cases are shown in the illustration below As you see the bottom object with the enabled Shift when overlapped option shifts only in the latter case 1 e when there is much text in the top
25. Standards Cj Berichte Leittechnik By selecting a branch and clicking edit folder the properties can be changed delete folder deletes the folder and its contents 4 3 The Visualization List In this window the different pre defined visualizations appear depending on the selected branch in the tree control of the folder window Double click on the selected report to open it Ej EN50160 Diagram ENS0160 DISDIP ENS0160 Events EN50160 FFT By default nothing is available Visualizations can be added or edited by using the menu functions which are described later or by clicking into the element using the right mouse button Add visualization In order to add a visualization select this menu item The following list appears where you can select the visualization type you would like to add 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 41 m Select Visualisation i FFT lt AMS Diagram FFT Diagram Alarms Topology Trigger 4 Loogbook Sum Measurements disdip Frequency valuation VEO Report Curve Depending on the type of visualization different guided setup steps will follow For further details read the setup section of the selected element The list of elements can vary depending on the installed and licensed element libraries For details see software config in the chapter menu bar Edit visualization the propert
26. W View Eleme SECURITY iagramm vent List IP DIS Statisti b gt leaving the maintenance area moving from the submenu to the main menu moving one step back exporting the data to MS Excel 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration 168 copying the data to the clipboard jumping from line to line adding a new alarm code deleting an alarm code confirming all changes cancelling all changes SETTYPID number of the setup DICT CAPTION name of the setup the name must be defined in the dictionary before and selected from the pulldown list like all other values entered here DICT DESCRIPTION additional information CAPTION caption as used in the dialogs later VERSION version of the library 7 1 9 3 Language Support The multilingual support is also integrated and can individually be selected for each user see user setup The library screen allows the user to add or change titles or to translate something into another language Select the page DICTIONARY of the tools software config menu in order to make any changes 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 169 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Configuration Drag 4 column header here to group by that column COMMON ae Alarm List View Element Report Element 7 12 2 07 9 U I 18 16 18 3
27. element The LevelRoot method shifts the current element to the root of the tree For example the script Outline AddItem Iteml Outline AddItem Item2 Outline AddItem Item3 Outline LevelRoot Outline AddItem Item4 constructs a tree like the one below Item 2 Item3 Item4 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 309 Thanks to these explanations 1 becomes clear how our report works Every time when outputting a group title the root of the tree becomes the current element where a company s name is added After that the list of orders 1s output and each order is added as a child element of the company To make the number of orders located on one level not display as a ladder the transition to the upper level via the Outline LevelUp method is performed in the script 9 1 6 17 OnManualBuild page s event OnManualBuild page s event Top The FastReport core is usually responsible for report construction It displays a report s bands in a definite order as many times as there are data thus forming a finished report Sometimes it is necessary to display a report in a non standard form which the FastReport core is unable to create In this case one can use the ability to construct a report manually via OnManualBuild event of the report s design page If the handler of this event were defined then when forming an output page the FastReport core would trans
28. 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration 166 onfigu General Upload Module Dictionary Dewesoft Upload Load PMT at startup COMMON Activate Dewesoft Control ARCHIVE Dewesott directory CsPragramme sD ewetronsD Ew E Soft65 Enable App Server Functionality Only one instance of PMT allowed at a time Xb SECURITY Use OPEN GL for 3D graphics Enable maintenance gt bu 7 1 9 2 Elements Libraries in Select the page MODULES of the tools software config menu Now you get a list of all installed and registered libraries or so called view elements To install a library just copy it into the PMT program directory normally c dewetron PMT They are typically named e g pmt5 module bpl This is the library with the index 5 and from now on this number is the so called SETTYPID in the dialogue box 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 167 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Configuration SETTYPID Dict_Caption Dict Descriptior Caption Version 3 Triansients List View Element T gge ee 4 paan Dagan COMMON i 6 am 2 8 Wed 9 TransentList Transient List rigger 2 BEMA ITIC CBEMA ITIC ogbook ogbook ogbook easurements Measurements Measurements Plot ull FFT W View Elem
29. 378 first then the inherited one 9 1 12 1 Creating a report Creating a report Top Let s create a simple report that uses inheritance Our report should look like this Our company our email email email cam Logo Customer Phone Action Club 915 970 0239 Action Diver Supply 2 4g 44 5002 11 Adventure Undersea 011 54 09054 American SCUBA Supply 213 654 0092 At first you have to create a base report Which elements must it contain It s a logo bitmap Our company title and email Let s create a new report and place necessary objects into it company Logo pany r i our email emailiceermail c om L d d Save our report with base fr3 name Into which folder It depends on how you setup the TfrxDesigner component By default FastReport will search base reports in the folder that contains your application s exe file You can setup a folder name for templates in the TfrxDesigner TemplateDir property Now create inherited report To do this go File menu and choose New In the dialogue select the Templates tab search for our base report base fr3 and click Inherit the report checkbox 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 379 Hew Items Templates Inherit the repart FastReport will create a report that contains all objects from a base report They are marked by lock s
30. Je DEWETRON Process Monitoring Tool Visualisation General Ti Reset Marker T2 Marker2 T FFT Width 32767 FFT Weig Math channels Export FFT FFT log Maintenancel Edit Chart Axis Points Legend at bottom PM Export Legend left i Print Print Report nx Navigation DEWETRON lt all gt Start Page ud 2 s 402 gt EE rarae e DEVVE 820 Graz DEVVE Graz 230 Spannungsband FAST 23 01 2009 07 02 51 Vi mm PR 07 02 51 360 DATETIME WAL ISACTIVE SUBGRASE INSTRUMENTCAPTION INS_INSID MARKERDI MARKERDATEDIFF CHANNELCAPTION MODULE 2 812 DEWES20 000 2 5 a D o d a 2 2 o m zo D nm D P Q cos phi AMS Graph P 0 D RAMS Graph f AMS Graph U I RMS Graph Ustar Transient List Voltage and Current Voltage Harmonics Voltage Harmonics Delta Voltage Star and Delta wind 76 Measurements v 4 1 83556 Administrator Activating Abs time in X axis shows the timeline below the graph as abstract data X Export FFT FFT log 1 024 Legend left Legend at bottom Supporttrakt 18 09 2007 21 08 29 c ow N Ve a N 21 08 31 056 21 08 31 488 21 08 31 920 21 08 32
31. Proportional Smooth starting the print preview and printing the report 46 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 47 D ew Page 1 of 1 Forma as Metafile 5 5 i Q BL dd dde 4 i 2 Close 50160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20kV erstellt von Administrator am 29 12 2008 um 11 27 54 Start 22 12 2008 11 25 43 Ende 29 12 2008 11 25 43 Unterschrift Renee Options Colors Defaut Monochrome Filters bic Seite 1 von 1 Wi Export Graph exporting to MS Excel data xml html text excel picture bmp metafile 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 48 moving backwards in time for the selected interval Forward moving forwards in time for the selected interval e Load Reconstruction of data This starts the dialog in which you are asked to select the interval and time base Time Selection Favorites Shar 22 12 2008 11 25 45 Last 24 h End 29 12 2008 112543 Last week Last Month Data View Raw Data Time based Time based rounded 1 Day Stark 1 Week From Start 1 Month fram Start Set end to now Points switching on and off of the data point indicators af Marks switching on and off of the data points values Edit you can change the diagram when being online Edi Setup Th
32. begin end begin end begin main procedure end C Script s structure language N Script optional the include chapter should be placed before any other chapter fine lude unitl cpp int i j 0 the variables chapter can be placed anywhere DEFINE pi 3 14159 constants chapter void pl Loner ions no nested procedures main procedure JScript s structure language JScript optionally the import chapter should be before any other chapter import unibz s var i j 0 the variables chapter can be located anywhere function pl functions ie main procedure pl for i1 0 1 lt 10 Jtt BasicScript s structure language BasicScript optionally the imports chapter should be located before Any other chapter mports unrtlvb Dim i J Q the variables chapter can be placed anywhere 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 283 Function olt XSunctions Y main procedure For i D To 10 pit Next More detailed description of the FastScript script engine can be found in its documentation The author did not duplicate the following in this manual syntactic charts of all the supported languages supported data types operations with classes properties methods and events nested functions enumerations and sets Later
33. 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 373 Formi Setup the database connection To do this doubleclick TADOConnection choose Build connection string then choose the provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider and choose our database demo mdb Close connection dialog with OK button and set the components properties ADOConnectionl LoginPrompt False frxADOComponentsl DefaultDatabase ADOConnectionl Define the following handler for the Design button procedure TForml ButtonlClick Sender TObject begin frxReportl DesignReport end After that compile and run the project This 1s all you need for creation of the end user runtime reports designer On clicking on the Design button the designer which contains a blank report opens Let us examine designing of simple reports in this environment 9 1 11 3 Simple report of the List type Simple report of the List type This report will contain data from one DB table To construct a report perform the following steps Click on the New report button 1 in the designer toolbar FastReport will create an empty report containing Code Data and Pagel pages Switch to the Data page and 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 374 put ADO Table component page Code Data Report Data 3 ADOT ables AD In cC Master atal B
34. Company Address Action Club PO Box 5451 F Action Diver Supply Blue Spar 5 Adventure Undersea 44 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 404 To continue search click F3 The following element will be highlighted 9 1 14 5 Report Export Report Export Top FastReport allows exporting a built output report to different formats for further editing archiving sending via e mail etc To export you must add the desired FR export components to the Delphi form Export to 13 formats is supported They are PDF Open Document Spreadsheet Open Document Text Excel XML RTF HTML text CSV BMP Jpeg Tiff and Gif There 15 the ability to send report via e mail in any above listed formats with FastReport means cb US d LJ dada 100 9 PDF File HTML file File Excel table OLE Excel table XML BMP image JPE3 image TIFF image E mail CS file Gif image Text File Open Document Spreadsheet Open Document Text Exports in FastReport use one of the following three methods Layer by layer object transferring to resulting file 1s performed alternately Expert accuracy is approximated to original Table on object transferring transitional matrix of object allocation is used There is high accuracy to original based on the assumption that rules of creating correct report sample were followed Report Design References chapte
35. Let us place the following text in the URL property of the Text object which belongs to the data band Customers Company and set the font s properties to blue color and underlining to simulate a hyperlink s appearance The second design page 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 305 ReportTitle ReportTitlez Customers PageHeader PageHeader 1 Company Address Customers Company Customers Addr customers Contact Customers To add an anchor let us create the MasterData2 OnBeforePrint event handler in the band s script PascalScript procedure MasterData20nBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin Engine AddAnchor lt Customers Company gt end C Script void MasterData20nBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender Engine AddAnchor lt Customers Company gt That is all we needed Preview the report to make sure that our hyperlinks work The last thing to be mentioned is the Engine GetAnchorPage function This function returns the number of the page where the corresponding anchor was added This function is useful when creating the Contents chapter as well A report must be a two pass one otherwise this function cannot be used 9 1 6 16 Using the Outline object Using the Outline object Top The Outline object as previously stated represents a report s tree which can be displayed in a preview window C
36. used either for previewing title pages or in more complicated reports those which contain data from many sources A simple example of title page creation Let us use our previous report with one data level Add a new page to it this will be the second page To move it to the front of the report grab the page tab using the mouse and then drag it to the place near the first page At that the pages order will be changed Switch to the new page and place a Text object with the Our report text inside in the middle of the page That is all we need to do The report with a title page 1s finished 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 256 Our report It 1 necessary to pay attention to one feature of multipage reports If the Print to previous page option is enabled in the second page use the PrintToPreviousPage property in the object inspector then the second page objects will start printing not on a new output page but on the white space of the previous one This allows to print the pages contents line to line 9 1 2 25 RowCount and PageCount properties RowCount PageCount properties Sometimes arises the need to show static data several times As an example we can look at printing Clean business cards or post cards For this data bands have the property RowCount and Report page has got PageCount These properties set the needed quantity of bands pages
37. Clown Triggertish Red Emperor Giant Maori Wrasse Also known as the big spotted triqgerfish Inhabits outer reef areas and feeds upon crustaceans and mollusks by crushing them with powerful teeth They are voracious eaters and divers report seeing the clown triggerish devour beds of pearl oysters Called seaperch in Australia Inhabits the areas around lagoon coral reefs and sandy bottoms The red emperor is valuable food fish and considered a great sporting fish that fights with fury lera Tha flach nt old fia h niet This ts the largest of all the wrasse It is found in 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 236 FastReport performed just what it was instructed to do The Notes field contains multi lined whose size may vary At the same time the Text object which displays the information from this field a fixed size That is why some lines appear to be cut off What to do in this situation Of course either size of the object could be increased or font size can be reduced However this lead to wasted space on the output page due to the fact that some fishes have long descriptions while ot have short ones In FastReport there are properties which allow us to resolve this problem This concerns both the band s and object s ability to automatically adjust their height in order to cr the necessary space of a given record row To perform this we just need to ena
38. Exit Home Prior Next Insert Delete Apply Cancel List List modules modules without group Home Configuration Description USEACC_USEA USEGROU 1 EDIT RIGHTS Module GO1 UW Webling UW Webling 134 14 110kV G01 UW Webling UW Webling 134 1B 110kV COMMON 7 1 7 01 UW Webling UW Webling IKEA 20 z x ede ARCHIVE SECURITY UW Weiz Administrator UW Weiz UW Zwaring Administrator Uw Zwaring UW Deutschlandsberg Administrator UW UW Leibnitz amp UW Bruck UW Mitterdorf Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator UW Murzzuschlag Administrator UW Leibnitz U w Bruck Uw Mitterdorf Me Uw Murzzuschla UW Breitenfeld Administrator UW Breitenfeld Status of Instruments With this function you can get the actual status of all installed instruments and carry out updates on the measurement instruments Status The status of the server and all installed instruments are displayed in the list 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration 162 4 DEWETRON Process Monitoring Tool aA X General visualisation va 65 Back Excel Refresh L5 Config Reset Restart Restart Upload Upload export Export List State Instr all Setup Extras Setup All Config2 Navigation
39. cn UR RUN RE 321 Soning VAISS RE 322 Table Witir eomposite NCAGESMS ics enu Ua qu qo AE AARE 322 Adi sting cel me Q 324 IRI REI Oo UTE 326 Managirig cross table from the Ra eer u DR AE HEURES 328 AdiustingTowWws eol rris SIZE sas esos aa E bd NIU RO RU EE 333 334 Add xternalobjects to the Pm 336 Some usel settling RE PR 339 CANIS i ics aE 342 Limitation of number of chart Values cane mi testa rere 346 347 Chart wittiSpeciiied Values urs 347 Ghan COMPICUOM 5 diuidi cca 348 Printing olacha puilt im 349 Dot Matrix en cc cen n EAE E A LAN LA EE 349 Gross tab in dOE TEILE DG un 353 Bot Matrix e 355 MG ONMINIAING OD OCU
40. while DataSet Eof Engine ShowBand MasterDatal DataSet Next Preview the report to make sure that the result of the script s work does not differ from a standard report Note how we got a link to the Dataset our example we connected a 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 314 band to the data source and used the script code DataSet MasterDatal DataSet line to return a link to the data source If a band is not connected to the source the link to the required source can be achieved in the following way Dataset Report GetDataset Customers Of course the source we are interested in must be added to the report in the menu ReportlData dialogue 9 1 6 18 Creation of objects in the script Creation of objects in the script Top One can add new objects into a report by using the script Let us demonstrate with a simple example how it 15 performed Create a blank report and then write in the main script s procedure PascalScript var Band TfrxReportTitle Memo TfrxMemoView begin Band TfrxReportTitle Create Pagel Band Height 20 Memo TfrxMemoView Create Band Memo SecrBounds 10 0 100 20 Memo Text This memo is created in code end C Script TfrxReportTitle TfrxMemoView Memo Band TfrxReportTitle Create Pagel Band Height 20 Memo TfrxMemoView Create Band Memo SetBounds 10 0 100 20 Memo Text
41. Bio Length JL Length cm When previewing this report we would see the following output Number 90020 Category Tnggerish Nama Clown Trig gerfish Length em 50 Number 90030 Category Snapper Mame Red Emperor Length cm 60 Notice you can see there is a lot of whitespace in the right part of the page To fill the whole columns where the data will be displayed can be set in report page settings To perform this you shoul on the area of white space on the page or use the menu s File PagelOptions menu item 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 245 Page Options Paper Other options Columns Number Width cm Positions 0 9 50 In this pagetab one can set such column parameters as number of columns its width and position be enough to specify a number 2 since FastReport adjusts all the other parameters automatically displayed in the designer as a thin vertical line Bio Specie Bio Category Bio Comman Name Bio Length L L Length cm E d Printing will now be performed in the following way FastReport will display the First level data ba white space the page After that a new column in the same page will be formed in contrast to simp new page is created and band would continue to be displayed on the top However now all the objects ai according to column s width It will
42. Caption IBS POM System UW Breitenfeld STARTTIME ENDTIME DESCRIPTION INSTRUMENT 29 12 2008 10 00 00 29 12 2008 10 30 00 Inbetriebnahme 05 UW Breitenfeld COMMENT Alarme eingestellt und Datenbank speichem aktiviert Administrator 5 Edit Now you can edit the entry by using the symbol or delete the entry by using the Delete following symbol Entry 6 Generating Reports Reports can be generated in two different ways e reports for one element e reports for more than two elements 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 139 6 1 The first report is stored in the same setup as 1 the view element The reports can be Reporting printed by clicking the button in the navigation menu The second kind of reports separates the elements in the visualization list and the report elements The report generator itself is the subprogram Fast Report Detailed information can be found in the manual Fast Report 3 www fast report com You find additional information to the Fast Report Generator in the annex part A Generating a Report For a Visualization Element After defining the setup of a view element reports can be generated by clicking the button print report in the step 1 dialog uou z Va mu ul Gem las EI Du MIS E mtl RB EA i oum z HZ D p A Code
43. Engine NewColumn method breaks a column in multi columned reports As soon as there is no column left this method creates a new page 9 1 6 15 Anchors Anchors Anchor is one of the elements of the hyperlink system which allows one to jump to any element connected to the finished report s object by clicking on it in the preview window Anchor is a special tip which is set via the Engine AddAnchor method Anchor has a name which corresponds with the page number position of the page To jump to an anchor with a specified name put the following line into the URL property of any report s object 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 304 AnchorName or AnchorName In the latter case FastReport will substitute a value for the expression Clicking on this object executes a jump to the part of the report where the anchor was added Use anchors when constructing the Contents chapter for example with links to corresponding chapters Let us illustrate this by the following example To perform this we need the familiar Customer table Our report will be a multipage one with two design pages We will place the Contents chapter on the first page and the list of clients on the second one Clicking on the content line executes jumping to a corresponding report s element The first design page ReportTitle1 _ Table of contents Customers Company
44. Variant RowValues Variant ColumnValues Variant Value 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 332 if VarToStr ColumnValues 0 1999 amp amp VarToStr ColumnValues 1 11 Memo Color clRed Values which are transferred in the RowValues and the ColumnValues parameters are arrays of the Variant type with a zero base The zero element is a value of the highest level of the table s title the first one 15 a value of the next level etc In our case the Column Values 0 contains years and the Column Values 1 contains months Why is VarToStr function necessary This guarantees absence of errors during type conversion When operating with the Variant type FastReport attempts to automatically cast the strings to number format which in its turn can lead to an error when attempting to cast the Total and Grand Total columns values The OnPrintColumnHeader event handler is called during output of column title cells The set of parameters is similar to the parameters of the OnPrintCell handler although in this case the cell s address the HeaderIndexes and HeaderValues parameters is transferred in a different way The HeaderValues parameter returns the same values as the ColumnValues and RowValues parameters in the OnPrintCell handler The HeaderIndexes parameter is also an array of values of the
45. Visualization of Measured Data 100 5 7 3 5 7 3 1 Reload loading data please select start and end time 42 auto refresh automatic refreshing of transient list Setup of a Transient Diagram Each transient has a name for the trigger text This text is derived from the measurement instrument and is meant to be different to the fault type For each of these types you can now generate individual templates and print them By default all data are shown on the screen in one graph UW Mitterdorf SSB 20k SST Mitterdorf 23 12 2008 02 41 07 nx UW Mitterdorf SSB 20k SST Mitterdorf 23 12 2008 02 41 07 lt gt lt gt Start Page UW Miterdorf 20 Uv Mitterdorf SSA 20 UM Mitterdorf A20 UM Mitterdorf 58 20 UWY Mitterdorf 558 20 558 20 UW Mitterdorf 558 20 UW Mitterdorf 58 20 K UW hftterdorf B 20 TP Liper UM Mitterdorf SSB 20 P_Liper UW Mitterdorf 558 20 gt UW Mitterdorf 558 20 Q_Liper uw Mitterdorf SSB 20 5 quw Miterdorf 558 20 0 13 UW Mfterdorf SSB 20 M 5 Liper Mitterdorf SSB 20 L2per UM Mitterdorf 558 20 L3per UW Mitterdorf 558 20 Frequency UM SSB 20 LLiper UM Mitterdorf 558 20 Lut Mitterdorf 558 20 _L2per UV Mitterdorf SSB 20 Lu UW Mitterdorf 58 20 _L3per UV Mitterdorf
46. You can tie a report to one of the printers installed in the system This means that report printing will be performed by the selected printer by default This might be useful in case when there are several different printers in the system e g text documents can be tied with monochrome printer while documents with graphics to the color one There is the Default printer item in the list of printers When this item is selected the report will not be tied with any printer and therefore printing will be performed by a printer which 1 set as the default one You can also set number of report copies to be printed and specify whether it is necessary to perform collation The values which a user sets in this dialogue would be displayed in the Print window If the Double pass flag is selected report s formation will be performed in two steps During the first pass a report is formed and is divided into pages but the result 1 not saved anywhere In the second pass a standard report formation with saving a result in the stream is performed Why two passes are necessary Most often this option 1 used in cases when in a report there is a need for the total number of pages in it 1 the information of the Page 1 of 15 type The total number of pages is calculated during the first pass and is available via the TOTALPAGES system variable The most frequent mistake is an attempt to use this variable in a single pass report
47. emtplogin smtp option if an smtp username is necessary username smtppass smtp option if an smtp password is necessary password deletes the pdf file after sending it Example pmt exe user admin pass admin host testav1pmtz10demo autologin print vis myfirst report dur 7 pdf c temp auto mail to pqd dewetron com from administrator dewetron com smtphost mail dewetron com 8 2 Software Design 8 2 1 Overview The total database design is shown in the following table 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 181 a E 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Other 182 8 2 2 Operation System The operation system is similar to the Linux system That means each object has a user and a group Each user can be member in more than one group The field ACCRIGHTS defines the user s the group s and the others rights This field is bit coded whereas always three bits are reserved for user group and other Bit 0 execute not used in PMT Bit 1 write Bit 2 read Bit 3 not defined 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 183 For there are two objects that have a user operation system These are TSETUPFOLDER and TVISSETUP user is also administrator TUSERACCOUNT ISROOT he can also change the root data TUSEALC USEGRO_NM LISEACC LISEACCID USESRO LISEGROID VISSETID CAPTION DESCRIPTION SETFOL SETFOLID ACCRIGHTS USEGRO_U
48. irxDBDatasSetl DataSet Tablel UserName Country Let us enter the report designer and connect the data source in the ReportlData window Add the Chart object to the report design page Set the object size 18x8 cm To customize the object call its editor by double clicking on it 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 343 LA Chart Editor AxisBehind AxisVisible BackImageTransp H Border BorderRound H BatFamAxis BattomWw all Chart3DPercent Customaxes Depth xis DepkhTapAxis Gradient Left axis Legend MarginUnits Monochrome True True _ False TChartBackWwall TChartHiddenPer 0 TCharkAxis TCharkBakbomWa 15 TCharkCusbomax CharkDepthAxis TChartDepthaxis TTeearadient TCharkAxis TCharkLeFEw all TChartLegend muPercent _ False _ ITChartPaae Select the chart series or add new The areas of the chart editor in the illustration 1 chart structure A chart can contain either one or several series 2 object inspector which displays the properties of the element selected in the window Teak the chart s properties here 3 toolbar for connection the series to data it 15 activated once the series in the window 1 1s selected On the first activation the editor window will appear as in the image shown above The first thing to be done is to add one or several series one
49. 5 lists shown in the illustration above After that close the edit clicking the IE button We can see that the object displays its structure now Salaty Nam of 0 n a Grand Total 11999 1 1200 9 1 7 2 Changing appearance Changing appearance Top Let s modify the object s appearance The first thing we want to do 1 to modify the titles colors and to display Total instead of Grand total It is very easy to do To change the title color into gray click on the Year and Grand Total elements one after another and then select the desired color using the SA button in the toolbar Name 0 Grand Total 0 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh the Select style and choose one you like 320 You also can use a set of predefined styles It is available in the cross tab editor click Showy til white Show cr Column d Total Orange Row Green 1 Column Green and Orange I Row gri Blue Blue and White Auto siz Gray and Orange Border 2 and Grange Print do Orange and White Reprint Side b le Save current style d Join To change the Grand Total text double click on the cell and then you will see the familiar text editor where one can type Total 0 To set the format of the currency values select the first cell on cr
50. Automotive Energy amp Power Analysis Aerospace amp Defense Transportation General Test amp Measurement PMT User Manual DEWETRON 9 power dewetron com The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice DEWETRON Elektronische Messgeraete Ges m b H DEWETRON shall not be liable for errors contained in this document DEWETRON MAKES NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH REGARDS TO THIS DOCUMENT WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED DEWETRON SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILTIY AND FITNESS FOR A PRACTICULAR PURPOSE DEWETON shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory in connection with the furnishing of this document or the use of the information in this document Restricted Rigths Legend Use Austrian law for duplication or disclosure DEWETRON elektronische Messgeraete GesmbH Parkring 4 A 8074 Graz Grambach Austria http www dewetron com Copyright DEWETRON elektronische Messgeraete Ges m b H This document contains information which is protected by copyright All rights are resreved Reproduction adaption or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws All trademarks and registered trademarks are acknowledged to be the property of their owners Contents table of con
51. Continuous generate continuous document without page breaks and page headers footers Page header footer header footer export mode Variants are Text h f exported as usual text Header Footer h f inserted in the document and None h f are not exported Open after export output file will be opened right after export via RTF files viewing program which must be installed in OS for example Microsoft WordPad Export peculiarities RichText objects are fully integrated into RTF format File appearance and size depend on report sample accuracy Report Design References chapter 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 408 9 1 14 5 4 Export to Excel Export to Excel Top Excel application for working with electronic worksheets It is included into Microsoft Office System Export method is a table diagram one On exporting to Excel format the dialogue box for output file parameter settings appears Export to Excel Page range All Current Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas example 1 3 5 12 Export settings Styles Merge cells Pictures Waly STAYS As text Backgraund Fast export Page breaks Open Excel after export Export parameters Styles transferring of text objects design styles into the table Disabling increases exporting speed but worsens document appearance Pictures includes graphic images export i
52. Giant Maori Wrasse Also known as the big spotted triqgertish Inhabits outer reef areas and feeds upon crustaceans and mollusks by crushing them with powerful teeth They are voracious eaters and divers report seeing the clown triggerish devour beds of pearl oysters Do not eat this fish According to an 1979 account the poisonous flesh acts primarily upon the nervous tissue of the stomach occasioning violent spasms ofthat organ and shortly afterwards all the muscles ofthe body The frame becomes rocked with spasms the tongue thickened the eye fixed the breathing laborious and the patient expires paroxysm of extreme suffering Mat edible Range 15 Indo Pacific and East Africa to Called seaperch in Australia Inhabits the areas around lagoon coral reefs and sandy bottoms The red emperor is valuable food fish and considered great sporting fish that fights with fury when hooked The flesh of an old fish is just as tender to eat as that of the very young Range Is from the Indo Pacific ta East Africa This is the largest of all the wrasse It is found in ey As you can see when constructing a report FastReport fills objects with data stretches them with Stretch option enabled and then computes the band s height in order to find room for all the objects band Stretch option is disabled the height setting 1s not performed and the band is displayed accordin height specif
53. has How does band splitting work There are some objects in FastReport which support this feature They are the Text Line and RichEdit objects They can be split while other objects cannot When FastReport comes across the need to split a band it performs it in the following way displays the non splittable objects which find room on white space partially displays splittable objects text objects are displayed in a way that all lines find room in the object forms a new page and continues object displaying if a non splittable object does not find room on whitespace it 1s transferred to the next 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 239 page at the same time all the objects located underneath are shifted according to need the process continues until all the band objects are fully displayed The splitting algorithm will become clearer if to look at the illustration Before split After split B Un CO R3 It should be noted that the splitting algorithm 1s not perfect and quality of the output report may not be as expected You should use this option very carefully in cases when objects on the split band are grouped in a complicated way and or their font sizes differ Here is the example of what could be received E bo 2 3 4 5 1 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 240 9 1 2 17 Text wrap of objects T
54. instead of the Total text In the cross object editor select the required object in the bottom part of the editor and then enter the following text to it Total for Value During construction the Value expression will be replaced by the actual value of the column header value located above Den 12222 9 1 7 6 Adjusting cell width Adjusting cell width Top When looking at the previous illustration it should becomes obvious that FastReport automatically adjusts cells width in a way which allows the longer lines to fit the cells It is not desirable in some cases however since values with very long text lines become ugly What can be done in such case Let s look at 3 ways of changing the width The simplest way is to break lines in the text of object with intermediate totals i e to insert a line into it Total for Value You see that the table appears more compact now 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 325 1999 O O for 1999 Am Bm Camerina den 9 Grand Total 1000 5100 6400 1200 13700 However this method cannot be used if the lines columns values are rather long they cannot be corrected by breaking the line manually This is why the cross object has the MinWidth and MaxWidth propertie
55. 67 RMS Setup Step 2 List of Subgraphs Ed sub graph Frequency Hz 8 88 Delete sub graph Add as many sub graphs as you want or click Finish to close the setup procedure In the visualization list in the main window you will now see your new view element In our example itis called test EN50160 CBEMA EN50160 615 ENS0160 Events EN50160 FFT 5 3 XY Plot 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 68 5 3 1 XY Plot Settings Please choose XY plot in the visualisation options in order to create an XY diagram In the XY plot editor the averaging can be indicated via the time domain this is either raw data time based grouping or time based grouping rounded to fixed time intervals e g 10 00 o clock 10 10 10 20 with a time basis of 600 s 4 XY Plot Editor Default Module switcher Caption Test XY Plot Descriptions Rights Owner Administrator Group Dewetron Owner Group Others Channel Fixed to device Minimum Auto Auto Print Template m Execute aes Chart Color clBlack O Raw Data Time Time based Time based rounded Y Channel F C Fined to device Auto Auto Finally you have to define the channels that are the basis for the diagram The X channel is always taken
56. Average 224 338 233 40 234 Jh 2 07 2 00 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 20 50 00 Select DataSet nok assigned Graphinfo Legend Wax J3 237 237 41 2 28 4 28 par 0 50 0 61 0 50 0 26 50 04 Humber of records 3uantil 95 95 00 95 00 95 00 95 00 95 00 95 00 95 00 95 00 95 00 95 00 95 00 For this it is necessary to generate data set Use the button and select master data Add one for the header line and another one for the data The following window appears p Cancel in x X W W X E onthe left side For the header line select not assigned with the number of records 1 For the data select Legend and leave 0 for the number of records In the header the text can be written directly in the lower table the variables can be added via drag amp drop 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Generating Reports 148 2 ot B B 3 T7 13 T4 1 Id 18 22 1 22 Data Variables Functions B Legend Recld CHAINFID Sh TABLENAME GL STORAGETYFE S COLUPNINAIME Zh DATETIME Sb UNIT SHORT Bh QURVAL Bh COLOR Zh OURVALZ IMDEXLEVEL INDEX Zh INDEX Eh INDEX3 Zh INDEX SL INDEKS Eh TSACTIVE Zh CAPTION EL MODLULECAPTIOM INSTRUPENTCAPT Zh DATETIMEZ BORDERACTIME STATISTICSMAX Eb STATISTICSMIN
57. Dot matrix report Wizards of type Standard report and Dot matrix report will create the empty standard or do report you can read more about dot matrix reports in the next chapter The report will contain one empty Wizards of type Standard report wizard and Dot matrix report wizard allow you to choose fie want to show in the report create optional groups and select the data layout Let s look at report creation using Standard report wizard Choose the FilelNew menu item then choose Standard report wizard item We will see th wizard dialog 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 384 Report Wizard Fields Groups Layout Style Step 1 Select the dataset Customers Mew Eable Mew Query As you can see there are several tabs in this window On the first tab we need to choose the data so our report All data sources available in your application are listed here TfrxDBDataSet components 7 also create a new data source either table or a query using the New table or New query buttons In t the New table query wizard will be displayed it 1s described later in this chapter Let s choose the Cu table and press the Next gt gt button On the next tab we need to choose the fields we want to display in our report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 385 Report Wizard Data Fields
58. Groups Layout Style Step 2 Select the Fields to display Available Fields Selected Fields C uskMa Add gt LasFInoaiceD abe lt Remove zz Remove all i Add all gt gt In the left side we can see a list of available fields in the right side list of selected fields it displayed in the report Use Add Add all Remove Remove all buttons to move necessary fiel one list to another You can also use 1 buttons to move the selected field up or down Let s add Cor Contact Phone FAX fields to the selected fields list and press the Next gt gt button On the next tab we can create one or several groups In this case FastReport will add the Group Group footer bands in our report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 386 Report Wizard Step 3 Create groups foptional Available Fields Groups lt Remove This step is optional We will skip it by pressing the Next gt gt button On the next tab we can set the page orientation and choose between two data layouts tabular and col Report Wizard Step 4 Define Ehe page orientation and data layout Orientation gt Portrait Company Address Action Club FO 5 Action Diver Supply Blue Spar Adventure Undersea Box American sCUBA 1 33 Aquatic Drama 921 Everg Blue Glass Happiness 6345 Wit Layout Tabular Colurnnar
59. MasterDataz MasterDatal MasterDataz MasterDlata MasterDataz MasterDataz Masterlatal MasterDataz MasterDatal MasterData MasterDatal MasterDlata MasterDatal MasterDataz MasterDatal MasterData MasterDatal MasterData As you can see in these examples we controlled output of data bands only All the rest bands for example in our case it was Report title were printed automatically Finally we will demonstrate how to construct a report of the List of clients type we have constructed it several times in this manual using the OnManualBuild event In our example connect the data band to the data source 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 313 ReportTitle Bandi PageHeader Band Company Contact Phone Customers Company Customers Contact Customers Ph PageFooter Band3 O OO onnnonommn g L Event s script is the following PascalScript procedure PagelOnManualBuild Sender TfrxComponent var DataSet TfrxDataSet begin DataSet MasterDatal DataSet DataSet First while not DataSet Eof do begin Engine ShowBand MasterDatal DataSet Next end end C Script void PagelOnManualBuild TfrxComponent Sender IfrxDataSet DataSet DataSet MasterDatal DataSet DataSsSet First
60. Now you are asked which BMP you want to use Just quit with the green hook Select report data in the menu and select all values that are available especially Graphinfo and Legend Fill out the values on the left side Important are Data Set and Data Field 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 141 Eh uu Hades BIS al Bs Sec 11 ee gt i PASS iT DE T5 1 0m 13 71 E 121 18 1 19 rne Lus NT B Legend E OBS add first Report CHARI i AUI E Power Quality Division E LI c lore mis CL Properties Events DATETIME An cef n RE rida chia L Oh SHORT Hin ea _ sabe Gh uS Center OL ror Boa I Debs wc 2 Eh me NE e Frane TEF 12 50 Eh ries kreoaspex A Thus OC aure ud is he H TE Siren Enlre a raim Ti b Oh PUL brands Y me L 7 Gly DETETIFEZ Shafter maky Eh BORDESG 7 sf Ts TH 1 Dh STATISTICA E STATISTICS B TATISTICST B B OR ED DER FE STATISTI
61. PNA710Supporttrakt No device 03 09 2007 14 24 13 Supporttrakt 03 09 2007 14 24 13 01 10 2007 11 40 00 01 10 2007 11 40 00 27 09 2007 10 50 00 27 09 2007 10 50 00 25 09 2007 13 20 00 25 09 2007 13 20 00 NNNNN PMT Warning 21 Are you sure to delete this measurement E 4294967296 1 4688183296 4688183296 4294967296 4294967296 4688183296 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 200 9 9 1 Part Report Generator This chapter was kindly placed at our disposal by the producer of the Fast Report Generator 9 1 1 Designer Designer Top The report component is supplied with an embedded designer which can be called in design tir designer provides the user with all the tools for designing a report s appearance along with the ability of date requirements It contains several toolbars which can be docked wherever you want The information is stored in a ini file if one 1 assigned or in the registry and 1 restored each time you launch the designe To give the end user of your project the ability to design reports you should either add the TfrxDes or add the frxDesgn unit into the uses list Using the designer in run time allows a user to set the report Note you should also add any other additional Tfrx components you will use to the Delphi form as well 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 201 FastReport 93 fr3 File Edit Re
62. SGUGA 0H gt Qala 9014 1 lt A E Action Club lt 1of30 On the picture with figures the following 1 displayed ready report pages 2 toolbar 3 status line 4 outline area Either the outline tree as shown on a picture or thumbnails can be displayed here The following buttons are on the toolbar g u d L Je d d 28 084 41 ET c Print report 0000 Prints report Hotkey analogue Ctrl P 00 Opens file with ready report fp3 Exports report to one of the supported formats Export to PDF Exports report to Adobe Acrobat file pdf This 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 399 button is displayed corresponding export filter is installed Exports report to one of the supported formats and sends it via e mail as enclosure This button is displayed if corresponding export filter is installed Text search in report Hotkey analogue Ctrl F normal conditions perform double click on report 1 Page number Transfer to report page with pointed number Enter number and click Enter I Nextpage 000 Transfer to next report page M Toed Transfer to the last report page Close window Close preview window 9 1 14 1 Control keys Control keys Top Save report to fp3 file Smooth document scrolling PageUp Up down scrolling 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh
63. Test Create multifile Save rnultifile opt setup File directory Stop storing after D Data E 2 DYNAMIC ACQUISITION RATE STATICYREDUCED RATE STORING OPTIONS 5000 Auto always fast EM Adjusted ta Start storing automatically Analog Counter Math Power Plugins Order tracking lt mmm Module 0 Power system configuration Line frequency Output units Frequency source 3 phase star 50 Ww Voltage T Current channels Number of cycles Nominal voltage 230 y Line to earth Channels Vector scope Background harmonics Harmonics THO 40 Impedance nterharmonics Calculate line voltages symmetrical components Pernod Overlap Period values a lox waveforms Pst time Plt time Calculate for Flicker 10 120 min Star Calculation overlap 1 ral x 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 Setup of the PLUGIN The plugin mainly consists of 4 parts whereas these can be opened via the menu in the window 1 home defines the general setup 2 devices defines the channel groups such as power module 3 channel storing defines the storing of separate measuring channels 4 alarm events additionally alarms and fault records can be defined Home The menu has 4 subitems 1 system settings such as server etc 2 time synchronisation configuration concerning time synchroni
64. Variant type which contains an address of the title s cell in a different form the zero element 15 the serial number of the highest level of the table s title the first one is the number of the next level etc To make the principle of cells numbering clear refer to the picture below s al sse an acl sso 1 mama 9 0 sme 7 4 roo 1200 13704 5299 380 3200 12299 000 560011600 11200 In our case it is easier to analyze the HeaderValues value but one can write the following handler as well Pascal script procedure CrossiOnPrintColumnHeader Memo TfrxMemoView HeaderlIndexes HeaderValues Value Variant begin if HeaderIndexes 0 0 and HeaderIndexes 1 2 then Memo Color clRed end 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 333 C Script void CrosslOnPrintColumnHeader TIfrxMemoView Memo Variant HeaderIndexes Variant HeaderValues Variant Value if HeaderIndexes 0 0 amp amp HeaderIndexes 1 2 Memo Color clRed 9 1 7 9 Adjusting rows columns size Adjusting rows columns size The user can adjust width and height of the table s rows and columns using the OnCalcWidth and OnCalcHeight events handlers Let us show how to increase width of the column which corresponds to the 11th month of 1999 by the foll
65. Visible Legend Columns In this section certain values can be defined which shall be shown later on in the diagram view in the legend Module Switcher The module switcher is a function to select and visualise the power module 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 58 Setup Step 1 General Settings Default Module Switcher Events Alarms Module Switcher Active Setup is valid Far the groups below Caption Description Print Template Active If this checkbox is highlighted you will be asked for which power module you would like to run the evaluation If it is not highlighted the diagram channels will already be selected in the setup together with the source power module Add Group to add a power module or group Remove Group to delete a power module or group Print Template to generate a report On the page events alarms additional visualizations in the diagram can be defined 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 59 Setup Step 1 General Settings Default Module Switcher Events Alarms 4 Trigger enabled Setup for viewing triggers Events enabled Setup for viewing events 4 Alarms enabled Setup far viewing alarms Print Template Events of the selected modules on the right side click add and select the power modules you want
66. data 7 window 440 360 Stop Conditions ID Type Mode Level 1 Level 2 0 Setup data f window 248 4 211 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n The resolution is 10 of the nominal voltage 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 23 2 2 5 5 2 3 Example One Power Module Several Triggers In this case three different trigger criteria and one power module were defined ows tL 10 00 File Edit Data Displays System Help Keine 4 D Wandlerkarte dli 2 Measure Analyse Setup Overview Scope Recorder Store Stop DATA FILE OPTIONS File details Test Create multifile Save multifile opt in setup directory Stop storing after DYNAMIC ACQUISITION RATE STATIC REDUCED RATE STORING OPTIONS 5000 Auto Y always fast na Adjusted to m Start storing automatically Analog Counter Math Power Plugins Ordnungsanalyse DB Plugin dg opc Devices Channel Storing ug Alarm Events Identity and Functionality Channel Storage Act Dewesoft Event Module Alarm Code CRC FL Type of channel storage Setup Voltage band Leistungsmodul 0 J NONE FAST ms SLOW s Setup Earth fault Leistungsmodul 0 NONE FAST ms SLOW s Setup Voltage change Leistungsmodul 0 NONE FAST ms SLOW s lela lt n re e 1 1 1 en e
67. display all grou or collapse display only header and footer if ShowFooterlItDrillDown is True Here is an example of such group with one expanded header 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 263 Address Contact Phone Contact Fax A B Catamaran Dive Club 264 Pleasure Point Nicole Dupont 213 223 0941 213 22 Cayman Divers World Unlimited PO 541 Joe Bailey 011 5 697044 011 5 Central Underwater supplies FO Box fa Maria Evento sh 24 11 4422458 27 11 4 D You can control whether to display all groups collapsed or expanded when you run a report first default all groups are collapsed You can set ExpandDrillDown property to True if you want it expanded also use the preview window s context menu to expand or collapse all groups 9 1 3 5 Lines numbering Lines numbering Let us use our example in order to show how to number lines in the group To perform this w add a Text object with a system variable Line to both of our bands it is easier to perform this using the drag amp drop method from the Variables page tab of the Data tool window GroupHeader GroupHeader1 Line Group OrderNo Graup SaleDate When previewing the report we can see that both the data levels now have their line numbers 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 264 1023 01 07 06 2 1076 16 12 94 3 1123 24 08 93 4 1169 06
68. for convenience The Stretch option is enabled by default This option stretches the picture inside the 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 233 object Modify the object s size using the mouse and you will see that the picture size always corresponds to the object s size If this option is disabled the picture will be displayed in its original size This behaviour differs from the AutoSize option because the object dimensions are not adjusted according to the picture size which means that the object can be larger or smaller than the picture it contains The Center option allows aligning a picture inside the object The KeepAspectRatio option is enabled by default it stops the picture from distorting when the object s sizes are modified This option works only together with the Stretch option Therefore when applying any object dimensions a drawn circle will remain a circle without turning into an oval The stretched picture then occupies only the part of the internal space of the object needed to display it using correct ratios If the option is disabled a picture will be stretched to fill the object size and if object s size does not correspond to the initial dimensions of the picture it will be distorted Another useful property available in the Object inspector only FileLink You can put a filename c picture bmp or variable containing a filename picture_file to this
69. in addition to the desired field Using the mouse select the Phone field and then drag it to the band The fourth way Requires the designer option ViewlOptions Show drop down list of fields flag be set and the band connected to dataset Place a blank Text object on the band and then move the cursor to the object In the right part of the object you will see the image of a button with the down arrow as in opening lists This is the DB fields opening list Click the button and select the FAX field in the list O 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh d Customers F v Cust No Company Y P w c con m LL LL mq X mi a ri 21 cI I Customer list frDBDataSet Pho frDBDataSetl 226 Click on the Preview button to see the result 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 227 Customer list 1221 Dive Shoppe 9806 555 0269 808 555 0278 1231 Unisca 809 555 3915 609 555 4958 1351 Sight Diver 357 6 876708 357 6 870943 1354 Cayman Divers World Unlimited 011 5 697044 011 5 697064 1356 Tom Sawyer Diving Centre 504 799 3022 504 798 7772 1380 Blue Jack Aqua Center 401 609 7623 401 609 9403 1384 VIP Divers Club 809 453 5976 808 453 5932 1510 Ocean Paradise 808 555 8231 808 555 8450 1513 Fantastique Aquatica O57 1 7 73434 057 1 773421 1551 Marmot Divers Club 415 598 0388 426 695 0399 1560 The Depth Charge 800 555 3
70. now in the startup dialogue where you are asked to enter your username and password The settings can be found in the file C documents and seittings lt current user gt local settings application data pmt2 PMTHOSTS BIN The General Screen After the starting the software the welcome page looks like this 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh The General Screen 36 start Page Manuals n E Mail a nd Cum o gr FX Ur ust US al The screen is subdivided into three parts and the menu bar 1 main window 2 folder tree 3 visualization list 4 menu bar 4 1 The Main Window In this window the start up page all the diagrams and other reports will appear The start up page is a simple html file and can be changed or linked according to the user s needs It is called index html and is in the program root directory 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 37 Start 457 Power Monitoring Tool More about the handling of the Program you can learn in the Manuals you want to learn more about our products visit our DEWETRON Homepage For wishes ldeas bug reports etc please follow this link DEWETRON QS System Or just send us an E Mail Whenever diagrams or other visualization elements are loaded they appear in the same window as shown in the next example DEWETRON Process Monitoring Tool PR General Vi
71. 1 Level 2 data to display gt data to display gt Mode Level 1 Level 2 data to display Index number of the alarm in ascending order Alarm Code code number which is later on used for sorting filtering or action definition e g E Mail Module the device or module to which the alarm is assigned pull down menu please see devices Caption name of the alarm Opcode at event start possible start of an application Windows effective at the start of the event Opcode at event end possible start of an application Windows effective at the end of the event Nominal Voltage nominal voltage of the module power from the power module Pretime pre trigger time in case of data recording 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 17 Posttime post trigger time in case of data recording Holdoff Time indicates the duration of time after a disturbance in which triggering is not allowed Max Storage Time maximal recording duration Activate Alarm event indicates whether the alarm should be activated at all Flagging if this alarm has been triggered the measured data of this module are highlighted this especially refers to the long term interval recorded data from the channel storing menu During the analysis the user can decide whether the data should be used for statistics or other purposes Crosstrigger If this field is activated a signal is sent to all other disturbance r
72. 2 VALIC MODULEINDEX CAPTION LOGCHANNELCODE Channel Group STOR CROSSTRIG PMTLOCAL No devi Al 0 DEFAULT v v LeistungsmodulO U_L1_H1 mV U L1 H1 DEFAULT Leistungsmodul 0 LU rms L1 mv mms L1 DEFALILT LeistungsmodulO L1 H1 m L1 H1 DEFAULT Leistungsmodul 0 rms L1 m rms L1 DEFAULT Leistungsmodul0 P L1 DEFAULT J Leistungsmodul 0 Q L1 Q L1 DEFAULT J 62 Leistungsmodul0 5 11 5 L1 DEFALILT v Leistungsmodul 0 PF L1 PF L1 DEFALILT LeistungsmodulO D_L1 Var D L1 DEFAULT LeistungsmodulO L1 V r L1 DEFAULT Leistungsmodul0 L1 DH L1 DEFAULT 7 Leistungsmodul 0 P_L1_H1 W P L1 H1 DEFALILT Valid shows whether the channel The measuring channel is correctly and explicitly defined The measuring channel has not been correctly defined yet T The measuring channel has been defined twice Every channel code logchannelcide can only be defined once in a module Moduleindex the module device to which the channel is addressed pull down menu Caption name of the channel as it is used in DEWESoft Logchannelcode name of the channel as it will then be listed in PMT please also see chapter home logical channels ChannelGroup channel group to which the measuring channel is addressed it moreover defines the storage interval please also see chapt
73. 2002 1 2000 5 j Crossl AddValue Den 2001 1 4000 Crossl AddValue Den 2001 2 4100 In the handler it is necessary to add required data into the table via the TfrxCrossView AddV method This method has three parameters each of them is an array of values of the Variant type The parameter is the row s value the second one is the column s value and the third one contains the cells ve Note that the number of values in each array should correspond to the object s setting In our case the o has one level in the rows title two levels in the columns title and one level of cells Therefore we tra one value for rows two values for columns and one value for cells into the Add Value When running the report we would see the following 18160 31001700 1700 4800 Be 02020 200 De suo o One can use the AddValue method for the DB cross table object as well This allows adding the which are not in the data source attached to the object into the cross table Otherwise if there are such they are summarized with the data 1n the table 9 1 7 11 Add external objects to the table Add external objects to the table You can put external objects such as lines shapes pictures into the cross table What for For example you may need to show some values in a graphic form Let s look at an example that uses shapes to display a little progress bar
74. 27 12 2008 16 30 24 8 880 00 27 12 2008 16 30 24 8 880 00 MED in the left bottom corner and selecting STDDEV MOD 0 95 0 21 1 32 0 93 0 22 1 33 0 96 0 24 1 24 0 04 0 08 0 02 0 05 0 08 0 02 0 05 0 08 0 02 0 17 0 03 0 23 50 00 0 02 50 04 By clicking with the right mouse button into the legend dome more functions are available 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 54 CO STORAGETYPE COLUMNAME DATETIME OF MARKERI UNIT SHORT CURVAL CURVAL2 ISACTIVE CAPTION MODULECAPTION INSTRUMENTCAPTION STATISTICGRAPH QUA1 MAX DATETIME2 OF MARKER2 BORDERACTIVE STATISTICSMAX STATISTICSMIN STATISTICSTYPE FLAGGING MAXBORDER BORDERABSOLUTE MINBORDER STATISTICS BORDERQUANTIL BORDERREFVALUE DISPLAYFORMAT MIN MAX AVG MED STDDEV VAR MOD color indicates the column from where the values are generated name of the column where the data come from date and time at the position of the marker one unit of the value name of the value value at marker one value at marker two indicates whether the data type is used or is deactivated title of the value name of the power module name of the measurement instrument date and time at the position of the marker two indicates that the border quantil calculation is active maximum value for the statistics calculation minimum value for the statistics calculation type of statistics calculation indicates flagging is on o
75. 50 A A AM 20 507 03 278 50 af Foo 902 61 277 20 7 po aid PF 0 525 41 277 20 h 1 1 0 93 0 34 0 59 0 34 a I EN50160 CBEMA 50160 Diagram 50160 DISDIP EN50160 Events EN50160 FFT e 40 97 0 00 Frequency HzUnbalance 96 Flicker Pit 23 12 2008 24 12 2008 25 12 2008 26 12 2008 27 12 2008 28 12 2008 29 12 2008 STORAGET DATETIME OF MARK CURVAL DATETIME DISPLAY FORMAT STDDEV MOD 2 23 12 2008 20 48 28 0 90 27 12 2008 16 30 24 4 0 00 0 21 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 0 96 27 12 2008 16 30 24 0 00 0 93 0 22 133 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 0 93 27 12 2008 16 30 24 480 00 0 96 0 24 124 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 0 22 27 12 2008 16 30 24 0 00 0 04 008 002 f 2 13 12 2008 20 46 28 0 22 27 12 2008 16 30 24 0 00 002 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 0 22 27 12 2008 16 30 24 0 00 0 05 0 08 0 02 2 23 12 2008 20 48 28 0 20 27 12 2008 16 30 24 90 00 0 17 0 03 0 23 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 49 97 27 12 2008 16 30 24 440 00 50 00 002 5004 v v 4 0 80 619 Administrator 5 2 4 The Diagram The diagram shows the data lines It can show several data lines as well as several sub graphs at the same time EN50160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20kV nx 50160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20kVv Sta
76. 66 PageFaaterl Memol T ADOTablel iaaaauaauaaaaaagadagdaaauaadadaaaauaadadaaauauaddddaaa ApoTablel1 v Properties Events 4 CloseDataSou True v Database ADOConnectiani Ms enm Li m Pay attention to the Database property it is already connected to our database It happens because we have connected our database to the TfrxADOComponents DefaultDatabase property We have to choose the table name now TableName Customer Go to the page with the report form To connect the Master data band to the table double click on it and then select the required table in the opened window Drag the required fields from the Data tree window to the report page After that the report will look roughly like this ReportTitle ReportTitle1 1 ADO Table1 Phane ADOTable1 FAX PageFooter PageFooter1 To preview the report click on the Preview button L in the toolbar 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 375 9 1 11 4 Report with parameters query Report with parameters query Let us design a more complicated report in which parameters would be requested in the dialogue window before the report begins to be output To do this using the same project in the report design window click the new report button to clear the old one Switch to the Data page and put the ADO Query component on a page Doublecl
77. 70 413 555 1895 401 609 940 2 610 772 6090 Blue Sports 9 1 5 Nested reports subreports Nested reports subreports 9 1 5 1 Nested reports subreports Nested reports subreports Top Sometimes it is required to display in a particular place on a design page additional data which may represent a separate report with a complicated structure One may construct such report by using a set of FastReport bands but it is not always possible In such cases the Subreport object is used After inserting such an object to a report we can see that FastReport automatically adds a new page connected to this object A nested report resembles a multipage one in terms of structure The only difference is that the nested report is displayed in a specified location on the basic design page and not after it When outputting a report as soon as the Subreport object 1s encountered the report engine outputs the associated design page until it 1s complete After that basic design page output will continue One can also place Subreport object in a Subreport design page increasing the nesting level An example of such a report can be found in the demo program the Subreports report It should be noted that FastReport s ability to construct subreports enables it to increase nesting levels of data Remember that number of data levels in FastReport is limited to six when you do not use the Subreport object 2
78. 77 24 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Other 192 IEC 60870 Event ewitchstate exe Pmiswitcher exe D outlines lt schaltvorgange t xb Switchstatereadar exe PMT3 TDeviceSwitch 8 2 10 Outlines Our data structure for the outlines We need e a list of all outlines with the corresponding ID s of the control system table TOutline is set up in the beginning 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 193 e list of all measured data points with the ID s the control system TModulelnfo e list of all addresses of the control system for the notifications that represent a switch status incoming or outgoing between TModulelnfo and TOutline This switch status is stored in the table TDeviceSwitch TOUTLINE OUTLINID CAPTION TDEVICESWITCH 9 TSOURCEDEVICEID TDESTDEVICEID 9 STARTDATE ENDDATE ID INSTRUMENT STARTTIME T ENDTIME T TMODULEINFO INSIMF IMSIMFID INDES 1 INDEXZ CAPTION MODCONFISURATION STARTLOWPERCENT STOPLOWPERCENT STAR THIGHPERCENT AGE STOPHIGHPERCENT NUMOFUSERS NOTDELIVEREDENER GY NOMINALVOLT AGE MODIMFID SLOPETRIGGER SLOPETIME DEFALILTVISSETLIP VTSSETLIPID USEGROU_USEGROID LSEACC LISEACCID ACCRIGHTS TINSTRUMENTINFO INSINFID 5 IPADDRESS INSTSTATUS INSTCONFIGURATION 8 3 Import Export TMEASUREMENTROW MEASROWID MEASUREMENTID MODINFID MTIME TMEAS
79. Excel With this button an alarm can be confirmed The value confirmtime will be set and if the checkbox unconfirmed alarms is selected in the setup the alarm will disappear from the list copies the data into the clipboard scrolls the data field into the past for half of the screen width and reloads the data scrolls the data field into the future for half of the screen width and reloads the data reopens pop up window to select the time and reloads data activates deactivates the automatic refreshing 5 6 2 2 The Channel List If the value for ChannelCount was more than O the alarm was stored with additional information to a channel By double clicking on the alarm line the following window will come up 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 96 Drag column header here to group by that column STRUNIT GMT MINVAL MINTIME MAXTIME Caption name of the channel STRUNIT unit of the channel GMT offset to GMT MINVAL minimum value during the time of the alarm MINTIME time of the minimal value MAXVAL maximum value during the time of the alarm MAXTIME time of the maximum value 5 7 List of Transients Transients are typical fault records which can be started by certain trigger events The trigger setup requires two steps e definition of the list e definition of the graph For the procedure of how to set up transients and triggers
80. Fit Fields to page width When choosing the layout we can see the report sample at right side of the window 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 387 Finally the last tab displays the available color schemes for your report Report Wizard Groups Layout Step 5 Choose the report style Company Address Action Club Action Club PO Box 5451 F Action supply Glue Spar Adventure Undersea PO Box 244 Count 3 When we press the Finish button the wizard creates the following report ReportTitle1 Report PageHeader PageHeader 1 Company Contact Phone FAX Custamers Company Customers Contact Customers Phon Customers FA PageFooter PageFooter We can run the preview immediately 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 388 9 1 13 2 New connection wizard New connection wizard This wizard allows you to add a new database connection into existing report It may be necessary to have two or more connections if you want to display a data from two or more databases The wizard will add the database component like TfrxADODatabase to your report Connection Wizard Connection Choose Ehe connection type ADO Database Choose the database ed Prompt login CO Use lagin passward Login Password You need to construct the connection string use the button you will see the standard Win
81. General Inheritance Description Description Hame Author Description This report demonstrates the ability to draw diagrams the Data bab Picture Browse Version Major Minor Release Build Created 20 09 2006 22 13 43 Modified 21 09 2006 18 27 19 All fields in this dialog are for information purposes only 9 1 1 6 Page options Page options Top Page s parameters are available via either the FilelPage settings menu or by double clicking on page blank space The dialogue has two pages 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 213 Page Options Paper other options Size 4 width cm Height 29 70 cm Orientation Portrait Landscape Margins Left cm Right cm Top cm Bottom cm Paper Source First page Default Other pages Default On the first dialogue page you can select size and alignment of paper as well as set margins In Paper source drop down lists you can select a printer tray for the first page and the rest of the report pages 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 214 Page Options Paper Other options Columns Mumber width cm Positions Other L Print to previous L Mirror margins Endless page width Endless page height Large height in design mode Duplex Default gt the second page you can set the number of columns for
82. Gmbh 208 Designer Options rid Type Size gt Centimeters cm Show grid CO Inches Align to Grid CO Pixels Dialog Form Fonts Code window gt Use object s Font te Colors worispace 0 LCD arid color Other Show editor after insert Show band captions Show drop down Fields list Free bands placement Gap between bands pit Restore defaults Here you can set the desired units centimeters inches pixels and specify grid step for each unit Tip You can also switch units in the designer by double clicking on the left part of the status line where the current units are displayed You can also specify whether grid should be displayed and align to grid This can be done by buttons in the Standard toolbar of the designer as well You can set a font for the code editor window and for the Text object editor If the Use object s font settings option is enabled the font in the text editor window would correspond with the font of the object being edited The default white background of the designer and service windows can be modified by the Workspace and the Tool windows buttons 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 209 The LCD grid color option increases contrast of the grid lines little and it improves their visibility on LCD monitors The Show editor after insert option
83. Inheritance settings This report is nat inherited Select the option Don t change Detach the base report CO Inherit From base report 100 Fr3 101 Fr3 Templates path 5 m We have to choose the Inherit from base report option and select the base report from a list You can do the same to set the link to the report template change it carefully because the template which uses a different link can not load After pressing the button OK FastReport combines two reports You may get the following error message Inherit error Base and inherited reports have duplicate objects What should we do gt Delete duplicates Rename duplicates This may happen if two reports have objects with the same name You can delete duplicate objects from a report or rename them 9 1 13 Wizards Wizards 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 383 FastReport contains several wizards that simplify the report creation process Wizards can be found the FilelNew menu item Mew Item Templates 3233 Standard Standard Dot Matrix Report Wizard Report Report Wizard J Dot Matrix New New Table Report Connecti Wizard Mew Query Wizard 9 1 13 1 New report wizard New report wizard There are four wizards intended for creation of new report Standard report wizard Dot matrix report wizard Standard report
84. Join small pages Pus Join small pages This mode is useful you want to print A4 report on sheet Two or more preview pages are printed on one sheet If you choose this mode you have to choose the sheet size Print on sheet as well 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 403 gt Scale Scale mode Report 15 printed on specified sheet All report output is scaled One preview page is printed on one sheet If you choose this mode you have to choose the sheet size Print on sheet as well After clicking on IE report printing begins If the Print to file flag is selected file name is called And report is saved to this file file with prn extension It contains a copy of information sent to printer 9 1 14 4 Text search in report Text search in report Top FastReport allows to search a set text line a text in preview window To perform that there is 4 button on toolbar or its hotkey analogue Ctrl F After that search dialogue appears Find Text Text to Find Search options _ Search fram beginning C ase sensitive Here you can set search line and options as well Search from beginning to search text from the beginning of document Otherwise search will be performed from current page Case sensitive to distinguish letter cases lower case and capital types on searching On clicking IE text search is performed and the first found element is highlighted
85. PMT the very first time you have to create a database linkage first of all HostsEditForm CONNECTIONS TRING PMT SDEMO Provider SQLNCLI 1 Paseword sasalll Persist Secunty Infaz T rue User ID 2sa nitial Catal PAS 70 Provider SQLOLEDE 1 Password dewetrorn Persist Security InfazTr WINDTEST Provider SGQLNCLI 1 Password dewetron Fersist Security Infaz T Datenbank WIENSTROM Provider SGILNCLI 1 Password sasa l Persist Security Info Tr INGREN Provider SQILOLEDE 1 Password dewetron Persist Security Infos A Catalog DEWE OENB Provider SQLOLEDEB 1 Password dewetron Persist Security Info T ruet sTritial Catalog DEWETRON Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Password dewetrorn Persist Security InfosT rue User ID 2za Initial Catalog DG Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Password sasal Persist Secunty Info True User D sa4 nitial Catalag F BE WAL Provider SQLOLEDE 1 Password dewetrorn Persist Security InfosT rue User ID Catalog Verbindung hinzuf gen Click on the symbol in order to create a database connection Then you assign a name for your connection column CONNECTIONNAME Then you directly enter the command for connection or click on the three points on the right border of the line The database wizzard will start 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Starting wizzard appears with which you can create the connection As a provider you either H Data Link Properties P
86. Papei i 1 os o8 1 amp 3 a ET 1 nme diser Legend lt B D 4 o OR aA cy i A See Tre Tfrz bua ort H T Properties Eves GAT OTe P e s pg e r Ln a ob av oj _ L Ok SHORT Fme Ok Rin cele Wu 6 CCLOR 2 Wot adgredi Dh EYE WEL f B VL JEF LTR ons B B 142252 4 Fy uae n 1 Piratai 245 I T m nim dni y Te 00 tar m in Gk NOTE CAT uns Dh 71 0 2 Ch 271 Erin Enpi sms Dh zTATISTICSR alee OBS 1 Bh STATISTICST 7 2 3 FLASIN Tene ore e vi z 22 1 gt ARO 5 STATISTICS COR DCS arkPucbure a Le he fark sued para p rra E STATU a Crea ca ction 7 25 70 Pagel ab The symbols on the left side be used to insert a text or a bitmap a
87. ShipTozip widestring ShipToCountry wide Sort Function Group F biolife T country crosstest currency quoting customer Lg customer query employee items MMSysaccessObjects 5 5 5 MSysIMEs Columns MSysIMEXSpecs MSysObjecks MSysQueries MSysRelationships nexbeust T nexkibem Lg nextord ES orders parts unicode vendors Now it 1s necessary to mark the fields which are to be included and group it according to CustNo field To perform this tick off fields in both tables and also CustNo field in Customer table In the field parameters area selected fields appear After that we need to select sorting for CustNo field Callumn Visible Where Sort Function Group That is all Query is ready Its code looks like the following 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 397 SOL SELECT c c CustNo FROM customer c IHHER orders o c cCustHo o CustNa ORDER CustHo Siu 9 1 14 Report viewing printing and export Report viewing printing and export The built report can be displayed printed or exported into one of the supported formats Everything c be performed in preview window 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 398 Preview
88. TPieOther5lice POH Vo TPieMarks TCharkPen TChart alueList Pie Color roptianal Other options Sort order Toph caption Click OK to close the editor and then preview the report 2777 515 Argentina i 098 575 Bolivia 22 5 511 196 Brazil 5 976 147 Canada 1756 843 Chile Eg 1 138 907 Colombia ES 114 524 Cuba 455 502 Ecuador 20 855 El Salvador 214 969 Guyana EE 11 424 Jamaica 1 367 180 Mexico 133 000 Nicaragua 406 576 Paraguay 3 1 285 215 Peru 3 363 130 United States of America 176 140 Uruguay 2012 047 Venezuela What can be improved in this report First of all 1 would be nice to sort values in 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 346 descending order Again we enter the chart editor and select the series in the upper part of the window Now we select the required sorting mode Other options Sort order Descending Toph values o If we previewed the report now we would see that the data in the legend table 1 sorted 9 1 8 1 Limitation of number of chart values Limitation of number of chart values Our chart looks rather crowded since there are too many small values in the chart which are invisible anyway FastReport allows limiting of the number of values displayed in a chart by a predefined value Thus all the values which do not belong to the limit set would be displ
89. This memo is created in code Preview the report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 315 THIS 15 created in code Note that we never destroy the created FastReport objects in these examples It is not required since FastReport objects are automatically destroyed after the report is completed 9 1 7 Cross tab reports Cross tab reports Top This kind of report has a table structure which means that it consists of rows and columns At the same time it is not known beforehand how many lines and columns a table would possess That is why a report grows not only downwards as the report types examined above but sideways as well A typical example of a report of such type 1 shown below Let us examine the elements of the table In the illustration we see a table with two lines rows and four columns where and b are line titles 1 2 3 and 4 are column titles and 1 4 b1 b4 are cells To construct a report like this we need just one set of data a query or a table which has three fields and contains the following data al a2 a3 a4 bl b2 b3 b4 5 gt As you can see the first field contains line number the second has a column number and the third one contains the cell contents at intersection of the table with the selected number When outputting a report Fast
90. Value variable Event OnAfterData excellently fits for calculating the height and width of such objects like Text that is If in report s script you need to get exact value of the height stretched object but in the Text object you use an expression you can use this script in the event OnAfterData PascalScript var MemoWidth Extendeg begin MemoWidth TfrxMemoView Sender CalcWidth end 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 297 C Script float MemoWidth MemoWidth TfrxMemoView Sender CalcWidth If the given code 15 put in the event OnBeforePrint the result will be the height of the object in which the expression is written and not its value 9 1 6 13 Service objects Service objects Top In addition to the objects included in the report pages bands Text and other objects some service objects are available in the script which may be of some use when managing report s construction The Engine object which we used in the previous chapter refers to this kind of objects The list of service objects 15 given below Report the Report object Engine the link to the report s slider Outline the link to the Report tree control element in a preview window Let us examine each of these objects 9 1 6 13 1 Report object Report object Top It represents a link to the current report The property of this object can be seen when selecting t
91. Vom Benutzer einzugeben Un Nennspannung START Beginn der Messkampagne ENDE Ende der Messkampagne Kurzschlussleistung am Messpunkt Vom SK3POL Benutzer einzugeben Verwendung der Daten Vom Benutzer VERWENDUNG einzugeben Messwerte UMIN Kleinster gemessener Spannungswert UMAX GroBter gemessener Spannungswert Harmonische gr ter Wert H3Q95 3te Harmonische 9596 Wert H5MAX 5te Harmonische gr ter Wert H5Q95 5te Harmonische 95 Wert H7MAX Harmonische gr ter Wert H7Q95 7te Harmonische 95 Wert H11MAX 11te Harmonische gr ter Wert H11Q95 11te Harmonische 95 Wert H13MAX 13te Harmonische gr ter Wert H13Q95 13te Harmonische 95 Wert THDUMAX Gesamtoberschwingungsgehalt Maximalwert THDUQ95 Gesamtoberschwingungsgehalt 95 THDUDATUM Max Gesamtoberschwingungsgehalt Datum THDUTAG Max Gesamtoberschwingungsgehalt Wochentag 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 130 THDUH PSTMAX PSTQ95 PLTMAX PLTQ95 Anzahl der Spannungseinbr che DIPO 20 10 15 DIPO 20 15 30 DIPO 20 30 60 DIPO 20 60 99 DIPO 20 DIP20 100 10 15 DIP20 100 15 30 DIP20 100 30 60 DIP20 100 60 99 DIP20 100 DIP100 500 10 15 DIP100 500 15 30 DIP100 500 30 60 DIP100 500 60 99 DIP100 500 DIP500 1000 10 15 DIP500 1000 15 30 DIP500 1000 30 60 DIP500 1000 60 99 DIP500 1000 DIP1000 3000 10 15 DIP1000 3000 15 30 DIP1000 3000 30 60 DIP1000 3000 60 99 DIP1000 3000 DIP3000 20000 10 15 DIP3000 20000
92. When placing an object in a band such as Page Header we tell the report engine that the given object must be displayed at the top of each page of a finished report Similarly the Page Footer band is displayed at the bottom of each page together with all the objects it contains Let us demonstrate it with an example We ll create a report which contains the Hello text at the top of the page a current date to the right of it and a page number at the foot of the page to the right Open the FastReport designer and click the New report button in the toolbar You will see a report template which already contains three bands Report title Master data and Page footer Let us remove the Master data band for a while to do that click either on any free space inside the band or on its header and then remove it by pressing the delete key or using the corresponding section in the context menu Now let us add a new band Page header To perform this click the band button and select Page header from the drop down list We see that a new band 1s added to the page At the same time the existing bands were moved down FastReport designer automatically positions bands on the page and as a result header bands are positioned on the top data bands are in the middle and footer bands are at the bottom Now let s add some objects Add a System text object in the Page header band and select System varia
93. a name of the already existing handler to the event one can either enter it manually in the objects inspector or select it in the pulldown BGG CECE RRR RR RRR RRR RR RRR RRR RR RRR RRR eee Memol TFrxIemaoVview Properties Events On fterData OnAFterPrink OnBeforePrinE v OnPriMasterDatal OnBeforePrint The link to the handler can be easily deleted To do that select a required property and click the Delete key 9 1 6 11 Printing the group s sum total in the group s header Printing the group s sum total in the eroup s header This quite often used method requires use of scripts because total value in an ordinary report becomes available only after all group s records are handled To display a sum in the group s header before the group is handled the following algorithm is used the two pass option of the report 1s turned on ReportlOptions menu item in the first pass the sum of each group is calculated and saved in an array in the second pass the values are extracted from the array and typed in the group s header Let us show two ways of how this task may be accomplished First of all let us create a new project in Delphi put the TQuery TtrxReport and TtrxDBDataSet components to the form Set them the following way Queryl DatabaseName DBDEMOS 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 292 SOL select from customer ord
94. actual data relationships are dependant on the table query relationships to which the frxdbdatasets are connected Each databand level requires an TfrxDbDataset or equivalent association 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 232 9 1 2 13 Picture object Picture object Top The next object to examine is the Picture object It 1s also frequently used in reports With the aid of this object you can insert a logo a photo of an employee or any other graphical information The object is able to display graphics in BMP JPEG ICO WMF and formats Let s examine the capabilities of the object Create a blank report and place a Picture object on the report page in the object editor if it does not open automatically then doubleclick on the object Load any desired picture and click You can load a picture from a file or clear an existing picture Picture EJ 9 xv 160 x 160 There are some options available in the object s context menu which correspond to names of the properties in the object inspector AutoSize Stretch enabled by default Center KeepAspectRatio enabled by default If the AutoSize option is enabled the object will be resized according to the size of the picture it contains Sometimes such feature can be useful if pictures of different sizes are to be displayed This option is disabled by default
95. and fax fields of the dataset on the band Let us do it in several different ways in order to demonstrate the features of the FastReport designer Put the first Text object on the band and enter frxDBDataSet1 CustNo into it This is the most inconvenient way since the link has to be entered manually and there is a possibility of entering the text incorrectly To insert the field links into the text object easier we can use the expression designer its button 1 located in the toolbar of the Text object s editor window click it and the data dialog window will appear To insert our field double click on the required field in dialogue Then click the button toe close the dialogue and see the field inserted into the text The second way of adding the DB field into the text object 1s by setting properties with the object inspector Put a second Text object to the band without writing anything the editor We ll set it s properties using the inspector DataSet frxDBDataSet1 DataField Company Since both of the properties are presented as a list we only need to select the desired value using the mouse The third way 1 to drag and drop the required field from the Data service window into the report It is the simplest and easiest way Before doing this we should disable the Create header flag at the bottom of the Data window otherwise we will create a second Text object containing the field title
96. as reference and the Y channel is interpolated according to the time points of the data series of the X channel if the storage intervals of the two channels are different Additionally you can set the X and Y axis respectively automatic or manual borders 5 3 2 XY Plot View If you open an XY diagram and loading the data you get a chart showing you all points of intersection of the X and Y axis as small crosses 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 69 rT _ 1 T _ 1 1 T _ 1 1 r Poqo amp b oeio ecdanbeesisedundeekucobuwlusdendewianibe 1 M 1 1 01775775 6 14 ers 4 VE te patag is c ule c d al eadecboaobadaadaaisebachoadaadaa i j ra Avo AVG 0 1774 o o i usu ET RE 22 Leo z dim eu N ONE E DEN T aoe x dele ae Led r L a 5 i i x ae 1
97. axes n active Trigger 1 Points SPENDEN Copy to Clipboard Back RAW flagged G auto refresh 72 Active Trigger 2 Edit File Data Navigation n 50160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20 nx Visualisations EN50160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20 Start Page Root 5 Demo Reports H Standards Harmonics Cj Events 50160 EN50160 Cj Berichte Leittechnik 50160 CBEMA C EN50160 Diagram 50160 FFT Frequency Hz Unbalance Flicker Pit 23 12 2008 24 12 2008 27 12 2008 28 12 2008 29 12 2008 STORAGET DATETIME OF CURVAL DATETIME OF DISPLAYFORMAT MED STDDEv MOD Measurements PMT 4 0 80 619 Administrator The Menu Bar The menu bar depends on the view which is active For diagrams it looks as follows 24 print P e Prin 22 12 2008 11 25 43 29 12 2008 11 25 43 5 pork Grap lil Export Graph Reporting Legend in Chart T Reset Marker a Marks chart axes Ti active Trigger 1 3 Points Back s Forward Load v RAW Tagged e auto refresh Active Trigger 2 Edit Copy to Clipboard The different buttons are Print printing the diagram this opens the dialog to print the diagram 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data Printer POF Creator Portrait f Landscape Reset Margins View Margins
98. be found in DB Plugin Manual 5 9 1 Setup To add an event list add a visualization and use the event list plugin ID 1001 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 115 Event List Settings General Madule Switcher Caption Event List Administrator Description Group root Visible Legend Columns COMMENT CONFIRM USEACC USEACCID Owner CONFIRM TIME DURATION Mire FAULID GMT INS IN SID INSTNAME y L1 v L2 v L3 LOGICALCAPTION Show invalid Faults ree B show faults that are invisible outlines MASTERGUID MASTERINS INSID MASTERTRIGGERINDES MEASLIREMENTID Transientlist MODULECAPTION MODLILEINDEX 7 NOMINAL VOLTAGE NOT_DELIVERED_ENERGY NUM_OF_USERS Print Template Caption title of the setup as used in the visualization list Description additional description to the setup Rights to define access levels to this view Owner the user who generated the view Group the group which has special rights here Others everybody else Read the right to read only in this view Write the right to change the view Transient list select a transient list load transient graph for a selected event The owner s the group s and the others rights can be defined by highlighting the check boxes on the right side 5 9 2 Details of the Event List The event list element shows
99. continue until all the columns are displayed After that FastReport f continues to display data from the first column Our report with two columns should appear as below 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 246 Number 90020 Number 90140 Category Triggertish Category Cod Clown Triggertish Lingcad Length cm 50 Length cm 150 Number 40030 Number 90150 Category onapper Category sculpin Red Emperor Cabezon Length cm BU Length cm gg The Columns property available in all data bands is another way to set number of columns It all columns for a particular band and not for the whole page as it was previous example Thus data wil right then from top to bottom instead of from the top to bottom then from the left to the right We ll disable columns in the page set the columns number 1 and enter 2 in the band s FastReport displays the column frames as dotted lines We can modify column dimensions by setting Column Gap properties N umber Bio Specie Cate gory Bio Category Name Bio Comman Name K Length cm Bio Length A report constructed in such a way will differ from the previous one only by displaying the data fr from top to bottom order 9 1 2 20 Child bands Child bands Top Let us examine the case when one of the lines in a report of label type may have a variable size To simu
100. default value General information compulsory 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 63 Ej Series Eigenschaften General Statistics Borders Storage C3 Min s hart rms L1 Color live D isplayformat 0 00 3 Max Average Lett C3 Right 5 Time Offset d Fined to device Module Cancel Short the name as shown later in the graph default the name taken from the database Color color to use Display format format of values related to this graph Axis left or right You have to select if the left or right axis shall be used Time Offset d If you want to shift the diagram after some time you can enter a value here Example In order to compare Monday and Monday of last week you have to select a channel Select this channel once more and enter 7 The two diagram lines will be shown with an offset of 7 days Storage to define which type of value will be shown Depending on what was originally stored see settings on the measurement instrument itself plugin different values will be available Possible are average max RMS Page statistics only affordable if you need statistic values such as VAR STDABW etc ATTENTION Statistics are based on the calculation of a Gauss curve 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 64 Series Eigenschaften General Statistics Borders Ac
101. design page to place the object Jc MEME ndn E 1s d a 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 318 All settings are specified using the object s editor Call it by double clicking on the object Cross tab Editor Source data Cross tab structure d SimpleCross v Year gt 2 Show title Select style Show corner Column header Grand Total Row header of Grand Total 000 Z Row grand total Auto size E Border around cells Print down then across Reprint headers on new page Side by side cells Join equal cells The Numerical list of the Editor s items from the illustration above 1 A drop down list with available data sources 2 The list of fields in the selected data source The fields from this list can be dragged to the 3 4 5 lists 3 The list of fields which generate a line row header 4 The list of fields which generate a column header 5 The list of fields which generate a table cell 6 Table structure preview 7 Structure options here one can specify whether it 1s necessary to display titles and totals You can only use the mouse in this editor to make modifications For our demo it is enough to drag f 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 319 from the 2 list to the 3 4 and
102. email ReportTitle1 Logo 4 Our company L r email emailicermail com L d E Save the report Now open the inherited report and see that email 1s changed in this report as well 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 381 9 1 12 3 ReportTithe ReportTitle1 Our company L Gur email new mail com J L d PageHeader PageHeader 1 1 r 1 Customer Phone L d L d Customers Company Customers Phone What if we need to add some objects in a base report It s easy but remember the base and inherited reports can t contain objects with same names While changing the base report we can t know how many reports already use this base one and what object names they have So the common rule is if you add an object to the base report give the following name to the object ReportName ObjectName For example add a Text object to our report and set its name to BaseMemo3 There is no restrictions on deleting objects from a base report or moving them Inheritance control Top Inheritance control We have observed the inherited report creation from scratch What 1f we have a report already which we need to make inherited To do this open the report and go Reportl Options menu Choose the Inheritance tab 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 382 Report Settings General Inheritance Description
103. export into any other format depends greatly on competent design of initial report FastReport allows a great number of ways to manipulate objects during report output creation This gives the advantage of fast development of any reports and their further printing Printed document will look just as on display And this 1 the primary intent of FastReport report generator usage The downside of such development 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 417 freedom 1s the complexity of exporting the FastReport document to different data formats which have their own limits and requirements for information presentation and are sometimes rather complex In this chapter special design requirements of reports intended for export to other data formats will be discussed Many formats use table data presentation Formats such as HTML XLS XML RTF and CSV do Not allow cell crossing or arranging in layers when table marking this concerns HTML and RTF In contrast to freedom of report development in FastReport designer Export filters as a rule take into account these requirements when objects are transferred from FastReport report to necessary format This is carried out by special algorithms which takes object crossings into account and their optimal placing At object crossing points new columns and lines in the resulting output table appear That 1s necessary for saving of the FastReport transferable objects exact positioning and for getti
104. gt Channel Storing Alarm Events Channels Full FFT Spectrum CAPTION Storage Group Nominal Voltage Currer Power Reactive Power Line Voltage PMTLOCAL No device Leistungsmodul 0 DEFAULT 230 v a a Leistungsmodul 1 230 a a iala lt gt oot a eno Caption name of the devices and module respectively Storage group defines the channel group to which the measured value belongs it moreover defines the storage interval please also see chapter home channel storage groups Nominal voltage the nominal voltage of the module deriving from the power module 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 15 2 2 4 Voltage indicates whether the voltage spectrum should be stored e g U1 Current indicates whether the current spectrum should be stored e g 11 Power indicates whether the active power spectrum should be stored e g P1 Reactive power indicates whether the reactive power spectrum should be stored e g Q1 Line voltage indicates whether the voltage spectrum of the line voltage should be stored e g U12 only in 3 systems Alarm Events All incidents that precipitate an action are regarded as alarm events The most common application is the fault recorder In PMT arbitrary programs can also be started e mails and SNMP traps can be sent The SQL server technology
105. if possible In conclusion the StartNewPage group header property allows output of each group on a separate page This probably will lead to a waste of paper however it might be useful in some cases 9 1 3 3 Reset page numbers Reset page numbers Top Group has ResetPageNumbers property which allows us to reset page numbers when printing a group What is it for For example you have created the report with groups In the group header you have the customer name inside the group customer s orders Now you need to print a report and send it to customers each customer should get only its own pages of report Unfortunately the page numbering in such report is continuous Some customer may get the pages with numbers 50 51 52 and where is the first 49 pages he will ask To avoid such situation you have to give a number to each customer s page separately Inside one report you will have pages with their own numbering for each group Pay attention to the following if you set ResetPageNumbers property to True you also should set the StartNewPage property to True Thus each group will start a new page To print a page number or total pages you may use Page TotalPages system variables 9 1 3 4 Drill down groups Drill down groups Top The group header has a property called DrillDown If you set it to True the group becomes interac means you can click on the group header in the preview window The group will expand
106. in this case it returns 0 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 211 Another use is to perform any calculations in the first pass and display the results in the second pass For example when it 1 required to display a sum in the group header which usually is calculated and displayed in the group footer Calculations of this type are accomplished by writing report script code the OnBeforePrint event of an object The Print if empty flag allows construction of a report which contains no data lines If this option is disabled blank reports would not be constructed The Password field enables setting of a password which must be entered before opening a report On the second page you can setup the report inheritance options Report Settings General Inheritance Description Inheritance settings This report is nat inherited Select the option Don t change CO Inherit From base report d a 100 Fr3 101 Fr3 You can learn about inheritance later in the Report inheritance chapter In this dialog you can see the base report s name if report 1s inherited detach the base report in this case your report will be standalone non inherited and inherit the report from one of base reports Controls in the third page of the dialogue allows you to set report s description properties 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 212 Report Settings
107. jumping from line to line 21 E eo adding a new alarm code qu cr deleting an alarm code Apply ancel confirming all changes cancelling all changes ID unique ID generated automatically DICT CAPTION name of the alarm code module CAPTION name of the alarm code Select Tools User groups and the corresponding alarm code in the menu bar 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration 154 PMT Configuration 0 Exit Home Back Excel Copy Prior ext Insert Delete amp pply Cancel Export Home Configi Configuration i Alarmcode Instrument Default 301 UW Webling m Alar Icons same as above Caption name Alarmcode Name of the alarm code module Group name of the alarm code Instrument choose the adequate instrument add a new alarm code delete an alarm code confirm all changes 7 1 2 Modules Modules can be different power modules and individually defined modules or general all other channels Select tools module groups in the menu bar 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 155 Configuration COMMON 4 SECURITY After clicking the Prior Next Insert Alarmcode Default Default Default Default Instrument 602 UW 603 UW Zwaring G04 UW Deutschlandsberg GOE UW Leibnitz Def
108. name for authorization on SMTP server if its usage is necessary for mail sending via specified SMTP server Password authorization password Remember properties remember all parameters for further usage After filling in the necessary parameters for mail sending you must fill in message parameters in E mail page tab 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 416 Send by E mail Account Message Address supporbidfast report cam Subject POF Export Feature request Text Hello Attachment Format PDF file Advanced export settings Address e mail address of receiver Earlier used addresses can be selected in drop down menu Subject message subject Earlier used topics can be selected in drop down menu Text message text Format format of report attached to mail One of the available export formats and also own format of FastReport FR3 ready report may be selected Advanced export settings on this option enabling after clicking on OK the dialogue box for selected export format setting appears Otherwise default export parameters will be used Export via e mail peculiarities only plain authentication on SMTP servers 15 supported If authentication is not required it 1 not necessary to fill Login and Password fields in settings 9 1 14 7 Report Design References Report Design References Top It is significant that the quality of the
109. offers endless possibilities DEWESoft File Edit Data Displays System Help Keine 4 D Wandlerkarte om 1 Rs Measure Analyse Setup Overview Scope X Recorder Store Stop lt DATA FILE OPTIONS File details Create a multifile Savemultifile opt setup de Saar Stop storing after DYNAMIC ACQUISITION RATE STATIC REDUCED RATE STORING OPTIONS 5000 Auto v always fast Hz ch Adjusted to pp Start storing automatically Analog Counter Math Power Plugins Ordnungsanalyse DB Plugin dg opc P Home Devices Bi Channel Storing ug Alarm Events Identity and Functionality Channel Storage ID Act Dewesoft Event Cap Module Alarm Code Type of channel storage adding an alarm event starts the detail setup screen deleting an alarm event from the list 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 16 2 2 5 Alarm Detail Setup Screen Alarm Event Detail Index Alarm Code Nominal Voltage Alarm reset settings Activate alarm event Module eerie Immediatly Caption New Alarm Posttime Lrosstrigger On Condition at event start Haldaff Time Posttime Extention C After e 05 c dk dF at event end storage time Storage Type ee eee ms Slow s EVE STO ALARMINI Start Conditions Mode Level
110. page ranges separated by commas example 1 3 5 12 Export settings Styles Fixed width All in Folder Multipage Page navigator _ Background Pickures JPEG Ww Open after export Export parameters Styles transferring of text objects design styles Disabling increases exporting but worsens document appearance All in one folder all additional files are saved in the same folder with main file Page navigator special navigator for fast shift between pages is created Fixed width blocking of automatic table diagram width modifying on changing preview window size Multipage every page will be written to separate file Background export of graphic attributes assigned to report page Pictures includes graphic images exporting possibility Open after export resulting file will be opened right after exporting via HTML files 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 412 viewing program which 1s allocated in OS by default Export peculiarities export may consist of several files Each graphic image is supported and saved in their own separate file RichText objects are transferred as simple text Appearance and file volume depend greatly on report design Report Design References chapter 9 1 14 5 8 Export to Text Format Export to Text Format Top Usual text file It contains information from report This information is optimize
111. previously selected Text object into the object 9 1 1 3 2 Standard toolbar Standard toolbar Top gt Open report Opens an existing report from the file Hotkeys combination Ctrl O Save report Saves a report into the file Hotkeys combination Ctrl S Preview Performs report constructing and its previewing Pi Hotkeys combination Ctrl P New page Adds a new page into the report Cut Cuts the selected objects into the clipboard Hotkeys combination Ctrl X Copy Copies the selected objects into the clipboard Hotkeys combination Ctrl C Paste Pastes objects from the clipboard Hotkeys combination Ctrl V 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 205 Undo last operation Hotkeys combination Ctrl Z Repeat Redo the last cancelled operation Hotkeys combination Ctrl Y Show grid Shows the grid on the page Grid pitch can be set in designer options During dragging or during modifying object sizes the coordinates sizes are modified step wise according to grid pitch 9 1 1 3 3 Text toolbar Text toolbar style F Arial No style Style Allows to select a style To define the style list call the ReportlStyles menu item Arial Font Allows to select font name from the drop down list Stores last five fonts previously
112. repetation without being attached to the data The figure below shows an example of this Bands RowCount property is equal to 14 which makes the bands repeatedly show 14 times 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 257 9 1 3 9 1 3 1 Data Source Fixed data Values Groups aggregates Report with groups Report with groups Top In the previous example we constructed a two leveled report based on the data from two tables FastReport allows designing of reports which appear the same based on one set of data the result of a joined query To perform this one needs to create a query using SQL language which would return data arranged according to a certain condition from both of the tables In our case a condition will be the value of the CustNo fields in both of the tables An SQL query may look as follows select from customer orders where orders CustNo customer CustNo order by customer CustNo The order by line is needed to sort the records on the CustNo field The example below shows how the query data would be returned CustNo Company T OrderNo SaleDate 1221 Kauai Dive Shoppe 1023 01 07 1988 1221 Kauai Dive Shoppe 1123 24 08 1993 1231 Unisco 1060 28 02 1989 1351 Sight Diver 1003 12 04 1988 1351 Sight Diver 1052 06 01 1989 1351 Sight Diver 1055 04 02 1989 How can a multi leveled report be constructed on the basis of this data In FastReport there is
113. selected channel from the graph After clicking add channel the settings must be saved 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 62 Adding a channel to sub graph Select the channel from the upcoming list and click ok Using the buttons shift and ctrl you can choose more than one measured data Add Channel to Subgraph Drag a column header here ta group by that column DEFAL LOGEHACODE LOGICALCAPTION LINITSTR DESCRIPTION MMs WEN cross NH Us 08600 00680200 2 0000200 0 2 WEE O0340000 0 O 01 02 WENN 010034620000 4 UlSiper 0 7 0080200 Ulineper OS WEE 002080000 ams 010698000 2 2 NEN 0034000 Dosla 0 O10406000 ms 066810000 0 O 0001969620000 0 WEN 10196830100 2 L NEM 7 5 0 2 5 010010682000 Then you need to define the properties of the channel When you selected more than one data all values for each data series are equally adopted excluding the channel color This one is set as
114. series in our example To perform this click the T gt button and select the pie chart 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 344 TeeChart Gallery Series standard Extended Financial Uther 3D Stats Line Bar Harizantal Fast Line Horizontal Line Horizontal Bubble Area Cancel 3D Smooth Buttons with arrows pointing up and down helps to move diagram series and give them an ordered drawing When needed you can also give the series a name simply by clicking on it with a mouse There are many different types of series available After adding the series the bar 3 becomes active Here you specify which data should be used for plotting First of all let us select the data set in the DataSet pulldown Fill the Label and Pie fields using their respective pulldowns 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 345 53 Chart Editor Chart Pie Series Active Angle Size 4SutoMarkPosition CircleBackColor Circled ColorEachPoint CustomeRadius Custom Radius Dark3D DarkPen ExplodeBiggest Gradient Marks MultiPie OtherSlice PercentFormat PieMarks PiePen Pie Values Data Source gt DataSet C3 Band source CO Fixed data Values Label True True B cibsraul _ False True 0 Toph values True 0 amp Axis TTeeaGradient T5eriesMarks mpaubamatic
115. table function RowCount Integer Returns the number of rows in a table function IsGrandTotalColumn Returns True if the column with specified Index Integer Boolean number 15 the total one function IsGrandTotalRow Returns True if the row with specified Index Integer Boolean number 15 a total one function IsTotalColumn Returns True if the column with specified Index Integer Boolean number is a column with intermediate totals function IsTotalRow Returns True if the line with specified Index Integer Boolean number 15 a line with intermediate totals procedure AddValue const Adds a value to the table Rows Columns Cells array of Variant Let us show how one can highlight the third column in our example it 1 the November 1999 date To do this select the cross table object from the report design page in the object inspector click on the events page tab locate the OnPrintCell event and create the handler s on the script page by dbl clicking in the empty list to the right of the event name the script editor will appear with the basic declaration created for you then add the code required in the empty begin end block of the declaration Pascal script procedure CrosslOnPrintCell Memo TfrxMemoView RowlIndex ColumnIndex CellIndex Integer RowValues ColumnValues Value Variant begin if ColumnlIndex 2 then Memo Color clRed end C Script void CrossiOnPrintCell TIfrx
116. the basis of one table Let us now examine query building including data from two tables Earlier we examined report working with groups Let us build query for this report via query constructor We need to make up a query in SQL language which will return data from both tables and the data will be grouped according to a definite condition In our case the condition will be CustNo fields in both tables As in the previous example create new report and put ADO Query component on page It query editor click button for query construction Drag two tables to work area Customers and Orders Both tables have CustNo field which we will use to join them By dragging the CustNo field from one table to the other we create a join between the two tables 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 396 Colluran 3 Fast Query Builder Designer SQL Result customer c E Iiic usto Float Company WideString Addri widesString Addr2 widesString C City WideString State WideStrinq zip widesString Country WideSkring Phone WideString FAX widestring TaxRate Float Contact WideString 5 Visible Where E orders _ OrderMa Float SaleDate DateTime ShipDate DateTime EmpMo Integer ShipToConkack Wide ShipToAddr1 WideStr ShipToAddrz Widest ShipTaCity WideStrin ShipToState Widestri
117. the editor by clicking IE When previewing a report FastReport does the following After outputting a record from the master table Customer it will set the filter on the detail table Orders Only those records which match the Orders CustNo Customer CustNo condition will remain in the table That means that for each customer only those orders which belong to the current customer will be displayed in the detail band Note this is an important concept to grasp Even though databands may be of master or detail type they only control where the data appears on the output page order and no of times of appearance What data their objects display is dependant upon which fields the objects contain and the external tables relationship linkage The illustration below shows the new output appearance 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 253 9 1 2 23 Headers and footers of a data band 1221 1023 01 07 88 1221 1076 16 12 94 1221 1123 24 08 93 1221 1169 06 07 94 1221 1176 26 07 94 1221 1269 16 12 94 129000 Unis 1231 1060 28 02 89 1231 1073 15 04 89 1231 1102 06 06 92 1231 1160 01 06 94 Reports containing up to 6 data levels can be constructed in the similar way Headers and footers of a data band Top Each data band may have header and footer Headers are output before a data band footers are output after all data records are output Here is an example of how the headers footers working in c
118. the events with additional information such as voltage time and channel 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 116 4 DEWETRON Process Monitoring Too Be General Visualisation P Export To Excel e c P Copy Table 28 11 2008 14 59 20 29 12 2008 14 59 20 Print ape Back Forward Load Show Event Show Report Print List Graph Transient File Data Ereignis Liste lt all gt all Visualisations Ereignis Liste lt all gt lt all gt start Page Root Drag a column header here to group by that column E Demo Reports HE Standards E INSTNAME DURATION VOLTAGE COMMENT NUM USERS SCALEN UNITSTR INS INSID PRETIME TRIGGERTEXT PERCENTAGE Berichte p GOS UW Weiz1 264 709 960 15 822 200000 8 1500 Spannungsband 0 0 Leittechnik 608 UW Weiet 264 709 950 15 161 0 200000 8 1500 Spannungsband 0 0 608 UW Weizi 264 709 951 16 423 0 200000 v 8 1500 Spannungsband 0 0 608 UW Weiz 264 709 966 4 230 0 40000 Vv 8 1500 Spannungsband 0 0 608 UW Weiz 264 709 956 4 783 0 40000 Vv 8 1500 Spannungsband 0 0 1 608 UV Wieizi 264 709 962 3 365 0 40000 v 8 1500 Spannungsband 0 0 609 UV Weiz 264 713 435 12 663 0 40000 v 9 1500 Spannungsband D 1 609 UW Weiz 264 713 436 6 181 0 40000
119. to assign the diagram lines to the graphs Go back to the page channel graph assignment and fill in the fields on the right side by selecting the graph There can also be more than one value in one graph Graph Assignme nt COLOR Module _ Caption Unit _ Format Aix Visi cfvellow UW Miterdof 55201700000 clreen Uw Mitterdorf 55 Hz Er D r m 7 0 om e V 0 0 0 ERN PENNE UW Mittedof 554 13 He 51 51 100 51 100 51 100 1 100 1 100 clPurple Uw Mitterdarf 55 0 1 t 000 Left Right 51 150 7 Uw Mitterdarf 55 5 L1per 0 000 Left Right uc mm Zi CI ce e clMoneurer _L1 per 844000 Lett Right 51 1807 LW Mitterdorf SSE I 11 cto Lips Uw Mitterdorf SSE P L1per 1 100 clCream Mitterdorf SSE Q_ Leper Myar 000 Right 1 100 clBlue L2per DO let O 51 100 cRed Uw MiterdofSSE L2per 88800 Diet O 510 ooo cINavy Uw Miterdof 55112 Left 51000 OOo clGreen UW Milterdorf SSE LI L2per elBkyBlue UW Mitterdorf SSE P L2per domno let clSilver UW Mitterda SSE Q_L3per 0 000 CG Right O 51 100 clBlue Uw Mitterdarf 55 H 880000 Lett CG Right L 51 100 cl araon LIV Mitherdorf SSE L3
120. to use default or empty list all modules will be used can be shown as colored bars on the top of the diagram Add Module adds a module to the list above if the list is empty all modules will be used Remove Module removes a selected module from the list above Trigger enabled makes it possible to view the triggers in the diagram Setup for viewing triggers defines the setup to be started when clicking on this trigger bar Triggers will be shown as yellow boxes Events enabled makes it possible to view the events in the diagram Setup for viewing events defines the setup to be started when clicking on this event bar Events will be shown as green boxes Alarms enabled makes it possible to view the alarms in the diagram 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 60 5 2 7 2 Setup for viewing alarms defines the setup to be started when clicking on this alarm bar Alarms will be shown as red boxes After clicking Next gt gt step 2 will follow Step 2 Sub Graph Definitions In the next steps the graphs can be defined The screen will have one large diagram window which can have one ore more sub graphs A sub graph is a section in this large view and each sub graph can have more diagram lines in it The full screen has 100 where 0 is on the top Examples One diagram 0 96 to 100 96 Two Diagrams first one from O 96 to 45 96 second one from 55 to 100 96 Each sub graph wil
121. use so called pseudonyms or aliases such situations Both the data source and the field possess second names 1 e aliases which can easily be modified the original names of course are not modifiable If a name has an alias this alias is what 15 used FastReport Otherwise the original name 1 used It 1 very easy to rename a data source and its fields in FastReport This is performed from Delphi environment To open the alias editor double click on the frxDBDatasSetl component You can modify the data source name names of its fields and select the fields you would need in the report Let us rename the source and fields see picture 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 229 Edit Aliases Dataset alias Field aliases User name Company Address addr city State zip L Country Phone Fax L TaxRiate L Contact L LastInyvoiceDate Our ceusbamers Press Enter to edit item Original name t ustMo Company Addr 1 Addrz City Skate Country Phone FA TaxRate contact LastinvoiceDate Note that an alias of the source can be modified without using the alias editor To perform this modify the UserName property of the frxDBDataSetl component Now we need to modify the report as the names of the fields have been changed To modify the names of fields in objects it 1s easier to use the fourth way which was described in the List of clients Report c
122. we will examine examples of scripts written in PascalScript language When new report is created this language is selected by default 9 1 6 3 Hello World script Hello World script Top We have already examined an example of the Hello World report now let us view how to create a simple script which would display a window with a greeting Enter the designer and click on the New report button for FastReport to automatically create a blank template Switch to the Code page tab and write the following script PascalScript begin ShowMessage Hello World end C Script ShowMessage Hello World After that run report As we expected FastReport displays a little window with a greeting 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 284 Frdemo EJ Hello World Let us explain some details We created a script consisting of a single begin end block Thus our script has a very simple structure it consists of a main procedure only see the Structure of a script in this chapter The main procedure is executed as soon as the report runs In this case it displayed a greeting window the procedure ends right after the window is closed After the main procedure is finished report building starts 9 1 6 4 Using objects in the script Using objects in the script Top One can address any report s object from the script So if there are for example the
123. will appear this way masterheader masterdata detailheader detalldata detaildata detailfooter masterfooter masterdata det ailheader detaildata detaildata detailfooter masterfaater 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 255 9 1 2 24 reports Multipage reports Top FastReport reports can consist of several design pages You can adjust such parameters as size and orientation for each page as well as to place different objects and bands on it When outputting this type of report all bands from the first design page will be displayed then the bands from the second one etc When a user creates a new report in the designer it already contains one page by default You can add a new page by clicking on the button in the toolbar or by selecting the FilelNew page menu command Then you would see that a new page tab appears in the designer Code Data Pagel Page2 ig Repot One can easily switch between pages by clicking on the required page tab Page tabs can be dragged drag amp drop to easily modify their order An unnecessary page can be deleted using the button in the toolbar or by selecting the EditIDelete page menu command One can also call the context menu by right clicking on the page tab mee ES New Page Eg New Dialog 5 Delete Page Settings The number of design pages in a report is unlimited As rule additional pages
124. would see the following 10 2B 3 3 u gf 443 kk Kauai Dive Shoppe Unisco Sight Diver 25 05 1950 Cayman Divers Pane Unilimite 07 07 1988 Tom Sawyer Diving Centre Blue Jack Aqua Center 06 10 1955 Divers Club 16 11 1994 Ocean Paradise Fantastique Aquatica 26 01 1995 1093 01 06 1989 Blue Sports Makai SCUBA Club 1016 02 06 1985 Action Club 1084 11 05 1989 Jamaica SCUBA Centre Island Finders 1115 21 02 1999 Adventure Undersea 1034 i3 08 1985 Clicking on any element of the tree executes jumping to the corresponding report s page and as result the selected element occurs at the top of the window Let us add the second level to the report s tree Just set the MasterData OutlineText band s property as lt Group OrderNo gt Thus the tree will look as follows 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 307 Kauai Dive Shoppe 1076 E 1123 1169 1176 1269 1023 Unisco 1160 1302 1278 1202 1173 EF As you might notice the navigation even in the orders numbers is possible and hierarchy of the tree s elements resembles the report s hierarchy Now we will create a similar tree using script code without using the OutlineText property In our report clear the OutlineText properties of both bands and create two event s handlers GroupHeaderl OnBeforePrint and MasterDatal OnBeforePrint PascalScript procedure GroupHeader
125. 0 255 0 323 3 500 Y 12 0 005 0 011 0 200 Y 13 0 228 0 261 3 000 Y 14 0 006 0 012 0 200 15 0 069 0 078 0 300 Y 16 0 004 0 010 0 200 Y 17 0 035 0 060 2 000 Y 18 0 003 0 006 0 200 18 0 068 0 094 1 500 Y 20 0 003 0 006 0 200 21 0 047 0 055 0 200 Y 21 0 003 0 005 0 200 23 0 049 DOTT 1 500 Y 24 0 002 0 004 0 200 mm harmonics order Value value of the harmonic Limit if available the limit of the standard only if selected in the setup OK Y if the value is below the limit otherwise N 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 78 5 4 2 4 Spectra with Limits standard for limits was selected in the setup the following picture will come up BY HB EMBER EBYE RE a wee 5 4 2 5 FFT Select activate 3D view the FFT setup and enter the number of 3D timelines 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 79 FFT Setup Step 1 General Settings General Module Switcher Caption FFT Descriptors Flagging enabled Show chart legend Rights Owner Administrator Standardvisualisi
126. 00 Root 4294967386 PNA710Supporttrakt PNA710Supporttrakt No device 25 09 2007 13 28 40 27 09 2007 10 50 00 Demo 4294967385 PNA710Supporttrakt PNA710Supporttrakt No device 03 09 2007 14 24 13 25 09 2007 13 20 00 g CERE 4294967385 PNA710Supporttrakt Supporttrakt 03 09 2007 14 24 13 25 09 2007 13 20 00 Harmonics Speichern unter Cj Events 5 EN50160Star 50160 51122 EN50160Delta 4 C3 training Aam 50160 EN50160 Diagram EN50160 DISDIP SS v 3 0 35 408 Administrator Please enter a file name Please Wait Export Measurement Please be patient 3 The exported measurement is an XML file Copy Measurements copying the chosen measured data 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 199 5 Delete Measurement PMT Hint deleting the measured data Drag a column header here to group by that column MEASUREMENTID INSTRUMENT END GMT NAME MODINFID MCOMMENT INSINF INSI 4294967389 PNA710Supporttrakt 4294967389 PNA710Supporttrakt 4294967386 PNA710Supporttrakt 4294967386 PNA710Supporttrakt 4294967385 PNA710Supporttrakt 4294967385 PNA710Supporttrakt Load Data time selection MODULE PNA7 10Supporttrakt No device 27 09 2007 15 56 57 Supporttrakt 27 09 2007 15 56 57 Supporttrakt 25 09 2007 13 28 40 PNA710Supporttrakt No device 25 09 2007 13 28 40
127. 00 400 Use the Text object and Draw category objects to draw diagram The Customers table Te AD This table contains all information about ADOTable1 the customer such as company name contact phone Fax Orders Customers _ustho The Orders table This table contains all orders made by customers Table is linked to the ADOTablez Customers table by master detail relationship 9 1 12 Report inheritance Report inheritance Top Often we have many reports with the same data in it for example same header footer with company logo and some data email address etc Now imagine the situation that you need to change some company data for example email You have to do this in each report To avoid this you can use report inheritance What 1 it For example you have some common elements in each report logo company name email etc These elements are typically placed on the report title and or page header You can create a base report that contains only common elements All other reports will use base report and thus will contain such common elements plus own elements defined in a report In case you need to change something logo email you just open the base report and make necessary changes All other reports that inherit from a base will be changed automatically In fact when you open a report that is inherited one the base report 1s opened 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh
128. 010 DEWETRON Gmbh 276 9 1 5 2 Side by side subreports Side by side subreports Top You can have two or more Subreport objects side by side on the same band This allows one to design reports where the data output by each has different lengths rows records or stretching or heights As you can see FastReport continues to output the basic design page after the longest Subreport is finished One can also use the Vertical alignment property to adjust text object alignment within each subreport 9 1 5 3 Limitations on using subreports Limitations on using subreports Top Since subreports are substituted on the basic design page it cannot contain the following bands ReportTitle ReportFooter PageTitle PageFooter PageBackground and ColumnTitle ColumnFooter It 1 possible to put these bands on the nested report page but they however will not be handled For the same reason there 1 no sense in modifying nested report pages options inasmuch as the options of basic report s page are used during outputting of a report Do not put objects below the Subreport object 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 277 9 1 5 4 Company Customers Company When displaying a nested report the nested report objects will overlay everything placed below and the user will see something like this Order Na 1014 This 1s wren To display the objects below after
129. 06 07 94 9 471 95 1176 26 07 94 4 178 B5 1269 16 12 94 1 400 00 As we can see the algorithm is rather simple Nevertheless it can be simplified The second way We use the list of report s variables as array for sums storage As we remember 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 295 reference to such objects is performed via the Get and Set functions This saves us from having to create extra objects and to free them Our script will look as follows PascalScript procedure GroupHeaderlOnBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin 1 Engine FinalPass then Memo8 Text Sum Get Group CustNo end procedure GroupFooterlOnBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin oe isoproup CustNo FloatToStr SUM Group ItemsTotal MasterDatal end begin end C Script void GroupHeaderlOnBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender if Engine FinalPass Memo8 Text Sum Get Group CustNo void GroupFooterlOnBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender lt Group CustNo gt FloatToStr SUM Group ItemsTotal MasterDatal As you can see the script was rather simplified code in the GroupFooterl OnBeforePrint handler sets a variable s value with a name similar to the client s number one can use any identifier which unambiguously identifies the client for example his name Group Company If there is no such variable it
130. 07 94 5 1176 26 07 94 1269 16 12 94 22 10 00 29 02 09 2 1073 15 04 99 3 1102 Ub 06 92 4 1160 01 06 94 For continuous numbering of second level data we use the Line variable instead of Line in the text object on the data band The result will then appear as below 1023 01 07 86 2 1076 16 12 94 3 1123 24 08 93 4 1169 06 07 S4 5 1176 26 07 94 1269 16 12 94 2 73 1060 28 02 09 E 1023 15 04 89 3 1102 06 06 92 9 1 3 6 Aggregate functions Aggregate functions Top In most cases group reports need to display some summary result information such as total of a group number of group elements etc FastReport provides these aggregate functions this purpose With their use one can retrieve the defined aggregate value over a data span The list of aggregate functions SUM Returns the total of the expression MIN Returns the minimal value of the expression MAX Returns the maximal value of the expression 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 265 AVG Returns the average value of the expression COUNT Returns the number of lines rows in the data span The syntax of all aggregate functions except COUNT is as shown below using an example of the SUM function SUM expression band flags SUM expression band SUM expression The parameters assignment is as follows expression the expression the value of which will be handled ban
131. 1111 24 hou 25 26 27 mmm 29 ae ee 32 Part Starting 33 1 Starting PMT the eR 33 Part IV The General Screen 35 1 The Main VAIN OW 36 2 THe Folder TTO dev 38 Th Visualization LIST 40 ING rie e 42 Part V Visualization of Measured Data 42 tAddmng ree eet 43 2 RMS DIAG MANN eisene 44 TNE Diagram Visualization eL 45 The Mend Bar ion ca a A EA 45 Changing the diadr str online zerei a E a MERE tds 50 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh ll PMT Markers ZooM enia tee 51 Tne AN 52 TNE Legend 53 Showing 55 Guided etl 55 1 56 Sled 2 oub Graph Definition 60 Siep 3 Sub Graph 09
132. 128130 321341361 1 Ug 8 17 5403 2 The list of objects available for inserting has changed now they are the Band Text Line ESC Command Subreport and Cross tab objects Other objects cannot be used in dot matrix printer Ej E By Place Report title Page header and Master data bands on report page ReportTitlel 5 Place Text objects on bands in the following way 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 352 ReportTitle ReportTitlei Customer list PageHeader PageHeader1 EQ Company f amp ddressS Customerzs cComparnwv Custome rs Addr1l Dot matrix objects placing principle is the same as in ordinary report Difference is in the fact that objects are strictly bound to netting and it is impossible to set another font size or color for them But some font attributes can be modified To perform this select Text object and click on toolbar w Bold Italic Underline SuperScript Subscript Condensed wide 12 cpi 15 cpi As you can see here you can set font attributes which are specific for dot matrix printing Report page and all dot matrix objects with the exception of bands have these attributes Attention In designer and preview only Bold Italics Underline attri
133. 15 30 DIP3000 20000 30 60 DIP3000 20000 60 99 DIP3000 20000 DIP20000 60000 10 15 DIP20000 60000 15 30 DIP20000 60000 30 60 DIP20000 60000 60 99 DIP20000 60000 DIPS Max Gesamtoberschwingungsgehalt Stunde Flickerwert Kurzzeitflicker 9596 Flickerwert Kurzzeitflicker Gr ter Flickerwert Langzeitflicker 95 Flickerwert Langzeitflicker Dauer von bis ms Restspannung von bis 96 0 20 10 15 Summe 0 20ms Gesamtsumme 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 131 5 13 Statistics of Frequency Disturbances The module frequency evaluation curve is a module for calculating frequency and events Every event is displayed constantly The module frequency evaluation curve was created to generate statistics as tabes and diagrams which classify the events in terms of duration and height e Frequency valuation Curve 5 13 1 Setup After choosing a frequency evaluation curve the setup assistant starts Frequency valuation curve General Module Switcher Caption Frequency Valuation Description Fights Disdip Chainer Administrator Enabled Group root Curve Points Write Execute Owner Duration s Frequency Group Others Wena log Voltage log Duration OO ml Pa Co CTT Rm 0003 Show only Faults that are visible vor outlines Use Outline filtering O Absolute Valu
134. 23 12 2008 07 19 17 3500 1500 Spannungssprung UV Leibnitz UN 606 UW Leibnitz 25769803788 23 12 2008 07 19 17 3500 1500 Spannungssprung 23 12 2008 07 19 01 3500 1500 23 12 2008 07 19 01 3500 160 23 12 2008 07 19 01 3500 1500 23 12 2008 07 19 01 3513 1500 23 12 2008 07 19 01 3520 1500 23 12 2008 07 17 55 3500 1500 23 12 2008 07 17 55 3500 1500 t t UW Webling 134 1B 1106 UW Webling IKEA 20k UW Webling 134714 110k UW Webling 134 1B 1106 UW Webling 134714 110k UW Zwaring 110k Uv Zwaring 11069 GO1 UW Webling GO1 UW Webling 601 UW Webling GO1 Uv Webling GO1 UW Webling GO3 UW Zwaring 603 UW Zwaring 4294967337 4294967337 4294967337 4294067337 4204067337 12884001921 12884001921 Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Erdschluss Erdschluss Spannungssprung c ojocjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojjoljoloilojuo 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Spannungssprung 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Spannungssprung v 4 0 80 619 Administrator The navigation bar Copy Grid Export Print List 1438 38 29 12 2008 14 38 38 Print Reload Export Import printing the list exporting the list Show raph opening the graph for the selected transient double click in the list 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh
135. 3 Average Finalize the set up process and the new FFT is made available in the list of possible visualizations 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 88 5 5 1 2 Starting Full FFT Spectrum Choose a generated setup in the visualization list and open it with a double click 5 5 1 2 1 View of Full FFT Spectrum The following picture shows a typical FFT spectra window In the upper left graph the data are presented The lighter the red is in the chart the higher is the amplitude DEWETRON Process Monitoring JEE General visualisation G j 5 i Edit Color Graph Legend T 22 01 2009 22 40 00 27 12 2008 10 57 16 27 01 2009 10 57 16 Edit Time Chart axis a Show Marks Back Print Print Save Scroll acScrollForward Reload A Report Graphs Graphs 7 Back Edit Chart Axis Auto refresh Home File Data Navigation Q Full FFT DEWE Graz 230 ax Visualisations Full FFT DEWE Graz 230 start Page Root Color Graph Average Graph 22 01 2009 22 40 00 f 50 000 Hz Demo Reports L ee 3C Standards 24 Berichte B 21727 22 154 88 11015 i B 78 34 M 55 72 12 39 63 10 25 25 8 20 09 6 1429 4 B 10 16 2 724 28 28 28 288 28 28 5415 E Alam List AS AS AS AS AS AS 48 U Event List aa ne
136. 3 all the objects are filled with data in our case with values of the Company and Addr1 DB fields after that the OnAfterData events of all the objects are called 4 such actions as positioning of objects on the band if there are stretchable objects among them calculating of the band s height and stretching if it 1s stretchable are performed 5 the band s OnAfterCalcHeight event is called 6 a new output page is formed if the band does not find room in white space of the page 7 the band and all of its objects are displayed on the report s output page 8 the OnAfterPrint event of all the band s objects is called 9 the OnAfterPrint event of the band itself is called Bands are printed as long as there are data in the source connected to the band After that forming of a report stops the OnAfterPrint report s page events and finally the OnStopReport event of the Report object are called Thus by using events of different objects one can manage practically every moment of report s formation process key to using events 1 a thorough understanding of the bands output process discussed in the next nine sections Most of the actions can be performed using the band s OnBeforePrint event only any modifications made to an object are displayed immediately However in this event it 1 impossible to analyze in which page the band will be printed if it 15 stretchable since calculation of band s height w
137. 352 21 08 32 784 21 08 30 624 21 08 30 192 8 8 9 328 21 08 21 08 28 464 21 08 28 896 21 08 28 032 Using Export FFT the following window will appear Here you can do the setting for printing or saving options 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 103 wa Export Dialog Format Options Gize as Metatile Colors Default Monochrome Filters Preview Activating FFT log shows the FFT visualization in a logarithmic scale 5 7 3 2 Printing Reports For the transient list as well as for the transients themselves report setups can be generated Click at list template and graph template to do the printing settings For more detailed information please go to chapter Generating Reports 5 7 3 3 Changing the chart axis of a transient After clicking on Edit chart axis the next window comes up As the column Graph is empty all values are shown in one graph 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 104 Channel Graph Assignment m Subgraphs Channel Graph Assignment COLOR Module Caption Unit Format AKIS Wisible Graph FFI UW Mitterdor SSE Frequency Hz 44000 Left 51 300 o Uw Mitterdorf SSE G_LIper Right 1 5100 0 000 511607 Uw Mitterdorf SSES Llpe Olet 1400 0 00 0 jeMonejGre Uw Mitterdof SEL L1
138. 38654705703 26 12 2008 09 49 51 4500 1500 38654705703 12884901921 26 12 2008 09 49 12 4500 1500 26 12 2008 09 49 12 4500 1500 23 12 2008 23 04 46 4500 1500 25769803788 23 12 2008 23 04 17 4500 1500 12884901921 23 12 2008 23 03 44 4500 1500 12884901921 60129542163 60129542163 60129542163 12884901921 23 12 2008 22 46 28 4500 1500 8580934620 CONFIRMTIME CONFIRM_ C Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Erdschluss Erdschluss Spannungsband Spannungsband Erdschluss Spannungsband Spannungsband Alarm Liste Ereignis Liste Measurements RMS Graph P 0 RMS Graph f D AMS Graph I D AMS Graph Ustar O Starunasliste Spannungsband Spannungsband Spannungsband 23 12 2008 17 41 05 350 1500 23 12 2008 17 41 05 3500 1500 23 12 2008 17 41 05 3500 1500 23 12 2008 08 50 40 4500 1500 23 12 2008 07 19 23 3500 1500 Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Spannungsband Spannungssprung UW Leibnitz SSB 606 UW Leibnitz 25769803788 23 12 2008 07 19 18 3500 1500 Spannungssprung UW Leibnitz SSB 606 UW Leibnitz 25769803788 23 12 2008 07 19 18 3606 1500 Erdschluss UW Leibnitz UN 606 UW Leibnitz 25769803788 23 12 2008 07 19 17 3687 1500 Erdschluss UW Leibnitz SSA 606 UW Leibnitz 25769803788
139. 5 Cross tab Editor Dimensions Cross tab structure Rows Columns Cells Select style alumni Column Row ew Pd ld r a a eae Total Subtotal w 4 2 1 4 2 Show title Show corner Column header Row header Column grand total Row grand total Auto size Border around cells Print down then across Reprint headers on new page L Side by side cells Join equal cells Let us demonstrate using the Cross table object with an example Put an object on the report 4 page and set it as shown in the illustration above the number of levels in the strings title is 1 columns title 2 in the cell 1 To fill the table with data let us use the OnBeforePrint object s handler PascalScript procedure Crossl0OnBeforePrint Sender begin with Crossl do begin AddValue Ann AddValue Ann AddValue Ann 4001 2001 L20027 lt lt lt AddValue Ben 2002 TfrxComponent 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 336 AddValue Den 2001 1 4000 AddValue Den 2001 2 4100 end end C Script void CrosslOnBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender Crossl AddValue Ann 2001 2 1500 Crossl AddValue Ann 2001 3 1600 Cross AdgdValue Ann 2002 Lll 17007 Crossl AddValue Ben l
140. 512 44 7554 Blue slass Happiness Christine Taylor 213 555 1964 This is a result of the script assigned to the band s OnBeforePrint event PascalScript procedure MasterDatalOnBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin Engine CurX Engine CurX 5 end C Script void MasterDatalOnBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender Engine CurX Engine CurX 5 Manipulation of the CurY property allows for example to print bands in splice The corresponding script PascalScript 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 303 procedure MasterDatalOnBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin Engine CurY Engine CurY 15 end C Script void MasterDatalOnBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender Engine CurY Engine CurY 15 The Engine NewPage method allows page breaks at any required place of a report At the same time printing continues from a new output page In our example one can insert a break after printing the second record PascalScript procedure MasterDatalOnAfterPrint Sender TfrxComponent begin if Line 2 then Engine NewPage end Script void MasterDatalOnAfterPrint TfrxComponent Sender if lt Line gt 2 Engine NewPage Note that we used the OnAfterPrint event that 15 to say after the band is already printed Note the fact that the Line service variable returns the sequence number of the record The
141. 7 19 01 23 12 2008 07 19 01 23 12 2008 07 17 55 23 12 2008 07 17 55 23 12 2008 07 17 55 23 12 2008 07 17 55 23 12 2008 07 17 55 ALENDTIME 29 12 2008 11 21 52 29 12 2008 11 21 52 29 12 2008 11 21 12 29 12 2008 11 21 52 29 12 2008 11 21 52 29 12 2008 11 21 52 29 12 2008 11 21 52 29 12 2008 11 21 12 29 12 2008 11 21 12 23 12 2008 23 18 08 23 12 2008 23 19 44 23 12 2008 23 18 08 23 12 2008 23 19 37 23 12 2008 12 35 31 23 12 2008 07 19 23 23 12 2008 07 19 18 23 12 2008 07 19 18 23 12 2008 07 19 18 23 12 2008 07 19 17 23 12 2008 07 19 17 23 12 2008 07 19 01 23 12 2008 07 19 01 23 12 2008 07 19 01 23 12 2008 07 19 01 23 12 2008 07 19 01 23 12 2008 07 17 55 23 12 2008 07 17 55 23 12 2008 07 17 55 23 12 2008 07 17 55 23 12 2008 07 17 55 CONFIRMTIME CAPTION Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Erdschluss Erdschluss Spannungsband Spannungsband Spannungsband Erdschluss Spannungsband Spannungsband Spannungsband Spannungsband Spannungsband Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Erdschluss Erdschluss Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Erdschluss Erdschluss Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Spannungssprung Erdschluss Frdschluss MODULECAPTION UW Weiz UM1 20k UW Weiz UM1 110k UW Weiz ELIN 1 UW Weiz UM1 110kV UW Weiz UM1 20kV UW Weiz UM1 110k UW Weiz UM1 20kV UW Weiz ELIN 1 UW Weiz ELIN 1 UW Zwaring UM2 110k UW Leibnitz UM3 UW Zwari
142. 738 800 555 0353 1563 Blue Sports 610 772 6704 610 772 6896 1624 SCUBA Club 317 649 9098 317 649 6787 1645 Action Club 813 870 0238 813 870 0282 1551 Jamaica SCUBA Centre 011 3 697043 011 3 697043 1580 Island Finders 713 423 5575 713 423 5576 9 1 2 10 Displaying DB fields with the help of the Text object Displaying DB fields with the help of the Text object As you can see the Text object is able to display data from DB in addition to displaying static text and expressions Moreover we can do it in two ways by either placing a link to the DB field into the object text or connecting an object to the required field with the help of the DataSet and DataField properties The first way is used when we want to display both field contents and any explanatory statement in the same object For example Contact person frxDBDataSetl Contact Person As you can see special syntax is used for links to the DB field datasetname fieldname The field name as well as the set name can contain spaces Space between the point and quote symbols 1 not permitted Not only can a link to a field can be placed in the text of the object We can apply different computing operations to a field as well Length cm frxDBDataSetl Length in 2 54 Note how square and angle brackets have been used Remember that square brackets are 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 228 used default fo
143. 8 a 8 98 SECURITY MW View Element Event List I c I 7 1 10 Table Viewer Please select table viewer in the menu maintenance This tool is used to load any table of the database in a read only mode This example shows the loaded measurement table which has previously been selected in the pulldown menu table You can also open the data of the clipboard 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration 170 Bt peas Export data Drag column header here to group by that column n ALARMID NSINF INS ALARMINDI ALACOD Al ALSTARTTIME GMT ALENDTIME CONFIRM LC FDE944D4 6D5C 42E 0 98 3 000 71 60 VGMEONVEIFSARIDOADMQQOUWSCSS2 112122008225350 11122 AMEBBYAGNDAISSBESODSTNUFNU 13 2 1 I22NBQSBOS 112 BIABIZODGEDOAFBASEE2DANEDEME 13 1 11612208 _ 111220810 En WAECODCLCHSAFBDBBFLOOBUSABREDS 4 6 1300020094258 WCOMTSIEESMADUBFCSUUEDIECADEA 1 1 12012298238836 E ADGGSEAD I7ES EQEABDCOTTSREAEETAD 8 860 004980 _ 12932238 10219 VAFRGEBFRAIACSDETABOICHDROFSG 3 2 isnat _ 3 9T2NE 2D SECURITY MDUSDTBM ECTSIDRIIDEEDEMOE 13 1 ACRRDUSIEFARESABAACYDAESI 0 12012298238208 QZLID2N VIRES VUDSiSS2NCAEDDAACHQOOTIMFIAES 9 36 1232208220456 USEDOAMABDAMBS AEFCUZIDEASCHD 28 1 MT22NE 184888 EWeASTSSTEDEQS
144. A INSTRUMENT STATE Visualisations H Root Demo Reports ID INSTNAME IPADDRESS INSTSTATUS SETUP EXTRAS Standards 1 GO1 UW Webling 10 44 0 1 RUNNING 12 12 2008 09 36 18 15 10 2008 08 08 16 Bericht encnte 1 2 G02 UW Pirka 10 44 1 1 RUNNING 15 10 2008 09 32 40 15 10 2008 09 26 06 Leittechnik I E 3 603 UW Zwaring 10 44 2 1 RUNNING 19 12 2008 10 37 16 15 10 2008 09 29 38 4 604 UW Deutschlandsberg 10 44 3 1 RUNNING 31 10 2008 10 19 28 15 10 2008 08 00 08 5 GOS UW Breitenfeld 10 44 9 1 RUNNING 29 12 2008 10 31 02 29 12 2008 10 15 38 6 GD6 UW Leibnitz 10 44 4 1 RUNNING 12 12 2008 09 41 49 8 608 UW Weiz1 10 44 5 1 RUNNING 19 12 2008 10 14 31 01 12 2008 16 21 27 9 609 UW Weiz2 10 44 5 2 RUNNING 16 12 2008 15 18 46 01 12 2008 16 28 48 d M TH _ 611 UW Bruckl 10 44 7 1 RUNNING 12 12 2008 09 43 56 07 12 2008 13 02 07 A POT U Stem undi 12 G12 UW Bruck2 _ 104472 _ RUNNING 10 12 2008 12 30 19 _ 07 12 2008 13 29 27 13 613 UW Mitterdort 10 44 8 1 RUNNING 19 12 2008 07 12 50 16 12 2008 09 11 26 01 2 U Stem und 14 G14 UW M rzzuschlag 110 44 10 1 RUNNING 18 12 2008 16 37 52 18 12 2008 13 40 02 02 U Delta und P02 1 MIN Delta und I P02 2 U Delta und P03 3 U P und QH P04 L1 und Min Max P04 L2 U und Min Max P04 L3U und Min Max Po FFT UI Pf v 4 0 80 619 Admin
145. ARM CODES DATA IMPORTER DOWNLOAD FFT SPECS INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT STATE PMT v 4 0 80 619 Administrator Send data to server localhost Source directory D soutbaxsMAINSD 2008420081215 Send data to server enter the server name or IP address of the database server Source directory data directory of the measured data 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 157 Select Directory Directory M ame D Adaten sre projects dewepower main Directories Files DA gt daten projects dewepower mai d daten Click the button OK Contirm The files in the selected directory will be deleted Do you really want to start the transfer Start transfer with YES Information i Transmission finished 7 1 4 Download Updates Please select software configuration in the menu maintenance After clicking download current version the software will be restarted automatically In order to upload new versions onto the server select the page UPLOAD of the maintenance software config menu This file has to include all files that have to be updated 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration 158 PMT Configuration BAX SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION uw A 9 Home Back Upload Upload current Update PMT version DB Home Config2
146. Administrator 4 2 The Folder Tree In this window the visualization elements can be defined in a tree structure By default only ROOT is available Branches can be added or edited by using the menu functions which are described in an other chapter to come You can also add branches by clicking into the element using the right mouse button 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 39 Visualisations H Root Hc Standards 2222 Harmonics a Events 50160 Berichte iC Leittechnik Add folder Edit Folder Foldermame Rights Owner Administrator Head Execute Owner Group Others Folder name the name of the folder as it then appears in the folder tree Rights You can define access rights to this branch Owner the user who generated the branch Group the group which has special rights please see menu bar how to define a group and user groups Others everybody else Read the right to read in this branch 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh The General Screen 40 Write the right to write and makes changes in this branch add edit branches and visulaisations The owner s the group s and the others rights can be defined by highlighting the checkboxes on the right side After clicking OK the new branch is available among the options in our example Special Report Root Cj Demo Reports
147. Alignment property The following properties are available when selecting a series ColorEachPoint color each value with different colors ExplodeBiggest select the largest value only for the series of the circle chart type Marks settings for the explanatory hints appearance ValueFormat the line for formatting values It is necessary to note that all charting capabilities are accessible in the TeeChart Pro library you can buy it separately from teechart com This library contains many types of charts and has convenient chart and series editor 9 1 8 3 Chart with specified values Chart with specified values Top In the previous example we constructed a chart on the basis of the DB table data There is another way of constructing a chart to enter the necessary data manually This way is 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 348 convenient when constructing small charts Let us demonstrate how it works with a simple example Put a chart on the report design page and enter its editor Add the series of the Bar chart type and set its properties Data Source 7 DataSet C3 Band source Fixed data values Label January February March Y 31 28 31 30 optional The result BH 51 January ll 28 February Bl 31 March lll 30 April January February March April 9 1 8 4 Chart completion from Script Chart completion from Script Top Let us e
148. B tables or queries What is considered table in such case It 15 a required number of lines records rows each of which has a certain number of columns fields To print information of this kind FastReport uses a special type of band databands These are bands with names of xxx 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 223 data level type print a whole table or some of its fields you must add these band s to the report connect it to the table and add to it the objects with the fields you want to be printed out When FastReport builds these bands they will be printed on the output page as many times as there are records in the table If there is no free space left on the output page new output pages will be formed as needed by the report engine 9 1 28 TfrxDBDataSet component TirxDBDataSet component Top The TfrxDBDataSet connector component 2 from the FastReport component palette is used 1n order to connect a table or any other data source This component plays a role of a messenger between the data source and the FastReport core The component is responsible for record navigation and field reference This allows the FastReport core to be independent from any data access library FastReport can simultaneously work both with BDE IB Objects with their non standard implementation incompatible with TDataSet and other libraries as well as to receive data from a source not connected with DB f
149. Blue 010109800000 5 ang clBlue 010109820000 Sper clBlue 010109840100 _H1 clBlue 010108820000 clGreen 010102820000 Uper clBlue 010100800000 PF i clBlue 01010D820000 clBlue 01010 800100 Frequency gt 8 clRed 1010F800000 clareen 01010 820000 al clBlue 01010 840100 7 w clareen ad 4 4 Logical Channels define the globally used measuring channel identifiers DEWESoft measuring channels are typically provided with a name Names are also used in the evaluation PMT but these have to be unique within one device While e g 2 test benches with 2 currents and 2 voltage systems are monitored in DEWESoft there is only 2 devices in PMT each having 1 voltage and 1 current They are distinguished by their device name in the device switcher The intermediate interface is called logical channel and defines the connection of DEWESodt and via a definite code logchacode Logchacode logical channel code the definite and unique channel identification This is an arbitrary character string Caption name of the measured value as is to be used in the PMT Unit the physical unit of the parameter Color the color which should be used by default This one can later on be adjusted in the PMT With you can add a channel 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of
150. CS Te ERDEI GUN Ty iA Cresc Crmab cuan 22 nis bic wis gh 18 50 Alum Vete races Hha sky ent cf Ehe cije re tne ko bard or Cecheber TIDA num HESE 70 E i ENSE 2 Now e save the report e exit the report generator and e finish the setup procedure of the diagram itself Open the diagram and click on You will receive the following report Already opened diagrams do not have a report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Generating Reports 142 first Report 3 DEWETRUON Power Quality Division 6 2 Comprehensive Reports For Several Visualization Elements Generate large reports with several visualizations Large reports can be generated by adding a view element and selecting Report from the icon list 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 143 Report Default MaduleSwitcher Caption ENS0160 overview Description 8 short report for EM S01 60 Administrator rot Owner Group Others Print Template SETUP Root Standarde 60S tar EM 501 60 5 pectra fAootStandardsE 60S tar EN 507 60 EN 501 60 Diagram H44H 4 ae Cancel Caption title of the setup as used in the visualization list Description additi
151. D internal ID number automatically generated User login enter the login Name enter the full name of the user Password choose the password of the user Repeat Password repeat the password e mail enter the e mail address of the user 174 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 175 Tel enter the phone number of the user Languagecode choose the language 1 English 2 German in order to receive more languages please contact DEWETRON User is active The user is activated only when this box 1 ticked User is root The user has administrator s rights only when this box 1 ticked root Member of group name custom Choose the group Add an entry by clicking and choose a group from the pull down menu Confirm with 7 3 1 2 User Groups Choose security user groups on the welcome page of the configuration programme USER GROUPS lt Exit Home Back Excel Copy Prior Next Insert Delete Apply Can Export Home Configi Caption Description E Mail Benachrichtigung SSG System Administrator COMMON Dewetron Dewetron System Administrator SNG Pichler Werke ARCHIVE 2 SECURITY NVO UW Webling UW Weiz UW 2waring Uw Deutschlandsberg UW Uw Leibnitz Standardvisualisierungen UW Bruck Uw Mitterdorf Uw Murzzuschlag Breitenfeld ID internal ID number generated automatic
152. DE Caption Description Color UNITSTR a 0103800 _ COMMON 50000 4 4 4 _ 4 WUWEENXQD El SECURITY mmwamm mowe _ mono 0 mono _ moro Vk _ V 0 Mie _ _ mowumm uH mowapm Mile o 7 1 9 Software Configuration Additional functions can be configured in this menu Select tools software config in the menu bar In the appearing window you can make necessary adjustments 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 165 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION General Upload Module Dictionary Dewesoft Upload Load PMT at startup COMMON Activate Dewesoft Control Start with Dewessoft Control ARCHIVE Dewesoft directory C Programme Dewetron DEWESoft65 C Enable App Server Functionality Only one instance of PMT allowed at time SECURITY Use OPEN GL for 3D graphics C Enable maintenance 7 1 9 1 General Settings Select the page general of the tools software config menu On this page you can edit general settings for PMT Software
153. Diagram Topology 4 Loogbook Measurements dizdip Full FFT H Frequency valuation VEO Report Curve Cancel If the command was successful the assistant to set up a diagram will appear 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 44 5 2 RMS Diagram Select the generated set up in the visualization list and double click on it EN50160 CBEMA EN50160 Diagram EN50160 DISDIP ENS0160 Events EMS01 60 FFT Subsequently the diagram will be shown in the main window If the module switcher is active you will be asked to select a module in order to evaluate it Otherwise the diagram window Is opened automatically Module Selection Direct Selection Po stow Drag a column header here to group by that calumn Breitenfeld UW webling UM TIO DEE Lat UW Select the module and click 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 45 5 2 1 5 2 2 The Diagram Visualization The diagram view window mainly shows the diagram and additional information in the legend on the bottom The picture below shows the diagram which was generated in the example before 42 DEWETRON Process Monitoring JEE General Visualisation ca Print 22 12 2008 11 25 43 29 12 2008 11 25 43 EA Legend cart edi 4 id PM Export Graph PZ chart
154. H44 kb Pm X H4 4 X Load Image Edit Chart Ok Cancel The fields values are Caption title of the setup as used in the visualization list Description additional description to the setup Gray rectangular top left shows the background picture can be any jpg file Load Image selects the background picture You can also get to this function when clicking into the gray rectangular using the right mouse button Edit Chart to arrange the power modules and other elements Module List the list of the power modules Module add power modules to this list by clicking and selecting from the pull down list 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 111 Setup To each module several setups can be defined which can directly be started in the topological view later on Just click select the setup and quit by using the green hook Rights to define access levels to this view Owner the user who generated the view Group the group which has special rights here Others everybody else Read the right to read only in this view Write the right to change the view The owner s the group s and the others rights can be defined by highlighting the check boxes on the right side A fully defined setup will look like the following picture Caption Description arambach Rights A Administrator Le root Owner Y i bs Group omi Others Module List SETUP Powers H
155. Height Printable region s height in pixels PageWidth Printable region s width in pixels StartDate TDateTime Time of report running A counterpart of the lt Date gt system variable StartTime TDateTime Time of report running A counterpart of the Time system variable TotalPages Integer A number of pages in a report A counterpart of the TotalPages gt system variable The report should be a two pass one so that this variable can be used SecondScriptcal Boolean Flag for the determination of repeat call of event in 1 some cases the event be called repeatedly during grouping if True then the script has already been operated Methods 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 299 procedure AddAnchor const Adds anchor to the list of anchors See more below Text String procedure NewColumn Creates a new column in a multicolumn report After the last column page break 1 automatically inserted procedure NewPage Creates a new page page break procedure ShowBand Band Displays a band with a specified name After TfrxBand displaying a the CurY position is automatically shifted function FreeSpace Extended Returns height value of white space left a page in pixels function GetAnchorPage const Returns the number of the page which the specified Text String Integer anchor is placed 9 1 6 13 3 Outline object Outline object Top This obje
156. IGHTS 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Other 188 8 2 Transient Data Transient data are stored in the table TTRIGGERDATA In order to get the timestamp of the trigger the field TRIGGERDATE 1 used The TTRIGGERINFO has additional information and is connected with a GUID globally unique identifier This GUID can already be generated on the instrument itself The data themselves have the DEWESoft format TTRIGGERDATA TRIGGERDATA 2 byte integer with byte order The sampling rate is defined in the field TTRIGGERDATA SAMPLERATE in ms The content of the data field also depends on the type of the trigger Field TTRIGGERINFO STORAGETYPE e 0 event e 1 slow trigger e 2 fast trigger e 3 cross trigger The dependency of TTRIGGERINFO and the module information Table TMODULEINFO is defined in the following conditions e IMODULEINFO INSINF INSINFID 22 TTRIGGERINFO INS INSID e IMODULEINFO INDEX1 6000 e IMODULEINFO INDEX2 TTRIGGERINFO MODULEINDEX The fields TCHANNELINFO INDEX1 and TCHANNELINFO INDEX2 relate to the same fields in the table TMODULEINFO If the configured module is no power module the value will be TMODULEINFO INDEX2 1 TMODULEINFO CAPTION General The field TTRIGGERINFO MASTERGUID contains the GUID of the related cross trigger if it was one otherwise it is 00000000 0000 0000 0000 000000000000 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 189 TCHANNELINFO CHAINFID INSIMF_I
157. ING AGGre Gate 268 Formaning HN 269 c ae 269 MNS CONTIN VEL EIL I T EA 271 GING ET ETT mE 273 Alternate color every other data DUNS ER AREA 274 Nested reports SUDFeDOFTS eoe rideo edd 275 Nested reports SUDFODOFNLS 275 olde Dy SIide SUDKED ONS iere iuo had cae beu a 276 Limitations USING SUDIEDOMS a RU REB Eee RU GE M NUR 276 PRMUOMIP ar CMU ODI o 25 EE NT Ed 277 IE icut D DD EL Mz 278 griego 279 281 METS Ose UL 283 USING 284 Calling the variables from the report s variables 1161 285 calling the DB 286 Using aggregate functions in the Pase abo sa 286 Displaying the vari
158. MemoView Memo int RowIndex int ColumnIndex 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 330 int CellIndex Variant RowValues Variant ColumnValues Variant Value if ColumnIndex 2 Memo Color 1 We will see the following result when the report is previewed mm Catherine 3000 on M Grand Total 100105 To highlight a column title create an OnPrintColumnHeader event handler as described above Pascal script procedure CrossiOnPrintColumnHeader Memo TfrxMemoView HeaderIndexes HeaderValues Value Variant begin if VarToStr HeaderValues O 1999 and VarToStr HeaderValues 1 11 then Memo Color cLIBed end C Script void CrosslOnPrintColumnHeader TfrxMemoView Memo Variant HeaderIndexes Variant HeaderValues Variant Value if VarToStr HeaderValues 0 1999 66 VarToStr HeaderValues 1 11 Memo Color clRed Result would appear as follows 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 331 1999 sw mm Catherine 3000 on B How the scripts work The OnPrintCell event handler is called before printing a cell included in the table s body when printing cells from the table title either the OnPrintColumnHeader or the OnPrintRowHeader handler is called At the same tim
159. N Gmbh 91 Color Graph Average Graph 22 01 2008 10 02 36 f 49 975 Hz COLOR UNIT STORAGETYPE HARMONIC DATETIME CURVAL BORI EE b 2 8 5 22 01 2008 10 02 36 0 000 2 8 5 22 01 2008 10 02 36 0 664 F 2 9 5 22 01 2008 10 02 36 0 000 d 5 6 Alarm Lists On one hand alarm lists can be used to monitor the status of instruments On the other hand they can be used to monitor any measured parameter if this one has reached the limits Depending on the settings those alarms can e always be shown or e only if they are active or e as long as they haven t been confirmed by a user So it is possible to get a simple overview of the full system or individual power modules For the procedure of how to set up an alarm on the instrument please see the DEWESoft and PWR DB Plugin Manuals 5 6 1 Setup of an Alarm List In order to add an alarm list you have to add a visualization to the list and select alarm list In the upcoming window the following parameters are to be set up 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 92 Alarms Default switcher Caption Alarm Liste Description Visible Legend Columns ALARMINDES 4LEND TIME ALS TART TIME CAPTION Standard visualisierungen CONFIRM TIME ERE Head Write Execute MODULECAPTION Owner TEXTVALLIE Others Administrator C Only pending Alarms C Only unconfirmed Alarms C Au
160. N Gmbh Configuration 172 Archive stark 23 12 1338 Archive end 23 12 207 s Archive filename D S rchive 2008_12 7 3 Security Configuration ALARM CODE USER USER GROUPS USERS GROUP NM COMMON 4 SECURITY 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 173 7 3 1 7 3 1 1 Users and User Groups The settings and different view elements are user dependent That means everything is stored in the central database Depending on the user s rights different view elements with different rights are available The membership for different user groups allows a simple handling of the rights in different view elements and branches Users Choose security user in the menu bar PMT Configuration users Wigs Gee amp amp Home Back Excel Copy Prior Next Delete Apply Cancel Mew Edit Export User User Home Configi Config Configuration Active E Mail Telephone Add a new user or edit the user s properties in the following dialogue window 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration USER DETAIL J rgen Zaff User ID User login Full Password Repeat password E mail Tet Language Coshcenter Standard Gruppe Jurgen Zaff User is active User is root Wengen zaffi amp gdewetran com 43 bz b 3070 226 German Cancel User I
161. NSINFID TABDES TABDESID LOWERLIMIT UPPERLIMIT MIN DURATION FREQUENCY DESCRIPTION STORAGE Mae STORAGE AV STORAGE RMS STORAGE TRANS STORAGE PAIR COLUMN TCHANMELINFO COLUM RIS coo Emm IMDESLEVEL IMDEX1 IMDEXZ IMDEX3 IMDEX4A IMDEXS STRLIMIT CAPTION Isa TIVE 8 2 8 Logbook TINSTRUMENTINFO INSINFID INS THAME IPADDRESS PHONENR INSTSTATUS INSTCONFIGURATION STAR TLOWPER CENT AGE STOPLO PERCENTAGE STARTHIGHFERLENTAGE STOPHIGHFERCEMNTAGE MUMOFUSER S NOTDELIVEREDENER SY NOMINAL VOLTAGE TMODULEINFO SIMF INSIMFID CAPTION MODCONFIGUR ATION STAR TLOWPER CENT AGE STOPLO PERCENTAGE STARTHIGHFERLCENTAGE STOPHIGHFERCEMNTAGE MUMOFUSER S NOTDELIVEREDENER GY NOMINALYOLT AGE TTRIGGER DATA INS IMSID MESSUREMENTIO TRIGGERDATE CHAIMF CHAIMFID TRIIMF TRIIMFID PRETIME POSTTIME SC ALEM TRIGGERDATA TTRIGGERINFO TRIIMFID IMS IMSID MESSUREMENTIO TRISGERINDES TRIGGERTIME PRETIME POSTTIME MASTERIMS IMSID MASTER TRIGGERINDES STORAGE TYPE TRIGGERTEXT MOCULEINDE MASTER GUID The data structure for the logbook service documentation is described in the following 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Other 190 TINS TRUMENTINEFO 9 INSINFID INSTNAME IPADDRESS INSTSTATUS INSTCONFIGURATION CAPTION START TIME EMDTIME DESCRIPTION INSINF_INSINFID ERROR CODE COMMENT USERACCOUNT TUSERACCOUNT 5 LI
162. Pagel page and the 1 object one can use them in the script calling them by names for example PascalScript Memol Color clRed C4 Script Memol Color clRed The list of the report s objects available from the script is displayed in the Report tree service window What objects properties are available in the script The answer is simple those ones which are visible in the object inspector At the same time at the bottom of the inspector there 1 a hint concerning the selected property Both windows report s tree and inspector are available during working with the script To get a detailed help about objects properties and methods use the FastReport help file which is included in distribution kit A simple example Put a Text object with the MyTextObject name and the Test text on the report s design page Then write in the script PascalScript begin MyTextObject Color clRed end C4 Script 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 285 MyTextObject Color clRed Run the report and see that our object s color became red 9 1 6 5 Calling the variables from the report s variables list Calling the variables from the report s variables list One can call any variable which is specified in the list of the report s variables ReportlVariables menu item from the script Variable s name should be enclosed in angle brackets PascalScript
163. Report creates a table in memory and fills it with data Thus the table expands dynamically if a line or a column with a specified number does not exist 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 316 Titles can consist of more than one level See the following illustration In this illustration the number or index of the column is composite 1 it consists of two values This report requires the following data a 10 1 10 1 10 2 10 2 20 1 20 1 20 2 20 2 b 10 1 b10 1 b 10 2 b10 2 b 20 1 b20 1 b 20 2 b20 2 In this example the first field contains the line index as it was before the second and the third fields contain column indexes The last field contains the cell value Examine the following picture in order to make it clear how FastReport constructs a tables with complex titles Before handling is accomplished our table would look like the table shown in the picture During handling FastReport unites the title cells with equal values which are allocated on one level The next table element which is shown in the following picture displays intermediate totals and totals is ator 2102 at teat s201 s202 2201 202 sumi _ 7 102 161102 6201 6202 52016202 Total 210 1 210 2 210 1 510 1 20 1 20 2 820 1 620 1 sumia 610 1 1610 2 10 2 6510 2 1520 1 B20 2 a20 2 b20 2 sumib 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 317
164. S T T I ETT 410 pde ni qiiod AT Formal em 411 beo eu UE eae Edo du 412 Export to Jpeg BMP Gif Tiff Graphic 413 sending EIA 414 416 Index 0 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh VII Introduction PMT Process Monitoring Tool is an analysis tool of a database system which was developed for the work with and visualization of measured data These measured data are first at all saved on a database server Originally PMT was used for the analysis and evaluation of the measured data that are gained from the power fault recorder But these could also be data from the CAN bus GPS receivers or simple analogous input data PMT has an integrated update function This means that the software is always looking for new versions available in the database as soon as one logs on to server PMT is a part of a complete database system and evaluates data which are coming from a measurement system being stored on an SQL server and finally being evaluated with this tool PMT Power Monitoring Tool was originally developed to be used for data from power fault recorders but can be used with data from CAN busses as well GP
165. S receivers etc or just simple Al channel data System Overview MEASUREMENT SYSTEM DEWESoft with PWR DB Plugin SQL Server MS SQL2005 or SQLEXPRESS with PMT Database Client Computer PMT Of course all these tasks can also run on less than three computers For example the data can be generated and stored on one computer and evaluated within a second or everything could even run on one system e g sand alone or portable system The software is designed to be used by multiple users from multiple client stations For this purpose all settings are stored on the server and setups can be shared with different access levels for different users Also the libraries and updates are stored on the server so that clients can easily get along with the updating and handling For further information please see the following manuals as well DEWESoft DEWESoft POWER DEWESoft DB Plugin PMT Server Installation Installation of the Software 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 2 2 1 Installation routine Insert the Power System CD in your computer and start the setup program 0 PMT Setup Welcome to PMT Please select your installation method i i a i m You will get the following choices Lom installs only on your computer it can happen that some windows components need to get updatet Standalone installs everything That is PMT DEWESoft will all compone
166. SEGROID USEACC USEACCID SETTYP SETTYPID CHAINF CHAINFID SETFOLID CAPTION ACCRIGHTS LUSEACC LISEACCID LISEGRO LISEGROID SETFOL SETFOLID 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Other 184 8 2 3 Setups A TVISSetup is a visualization of data in PMT The setups are organised in a folder based hierarchy Each setup can have 0 to n sub graphs Each sub graph has 0 to n data rows Each setup is from a special type Each type can have different parameters The style and function of the dataset is based on the type of setup and stored in the table TSETUPPARAMVAL This dynamic style allows the system to store different types of setup in one data table TSU BG TO RAGEASETD TUSERG 2 roam TSETUPFOL GER sum n h TUSEACC_USEG MM T LEGE Ub GEIL 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 185 8 2 4 Alarms The e mail configuration is stored in the directories TUSERACCOUNT TUSEACC USEGRO NM TUSERGROUP and TALCOD_USEGRO_NM The fields DESCRIPTION STRUNIT and CAPTION of the table TCHANNELINFO are directly taken from DEWESoft and include values with alphanumeric characters Each alarm corresponds to a certain alarm code Alarms can be forwarded via e mail to different users That s why each user has to define his her personal e mail address in the table TUSERACCOUNT Each Alarm code can be assigned to a certain user group Additionally the instru
167. SERLOGIN FULLNAME ISACTIVE PASSW EMAILADORESS LAMNGUAGETODE ISROGT LAMNGUAGEFILE 8 2 9 DeviceSwitcher IEC60870 Module switchstater exe IEC60870 Client pmtswitcher exe Manager der die IEC60870 Clients verwaltet und die Buffer ausliest und f r den Switchstatereader convertiert pmtswitcher ini Konfigurationsfile f r pmtswitcher switchstatereader exe Managed zuordnungen f r Schalterstellungen switchstatereader ini Konfigurationsfile f r switchstatereader pmtswitcher ini general rem events von 60870 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 191 logfile D Daten src projects dewepower bin log txt rem pfad wo switchstatereader seine Daten einliest outlinepath d outlines dbconnectstring Provider SQLNCLI 1 Password sasa01 Persist Security Info True User ID sa Initial Catalog PMT Data Source dgsal rem fernwirkkopf 1 targethost1 127 0 0 1 rem fernwirkkopf 2 keiner wenn leer targethost2 Aktueller Systemstatus wird in der Tabelle TSWITCHMATRIX gespeichert SOURCE ist modinfid von TMODULEINFO des Powermodules DatenfluB Tabelle dbo TSWITCHMATRIX Zusammenfassung DESTINATION SOURCE SwWITCHZOID SWITCHISTATE SWITCH2STATE SWITCHILASTONM SWITCHILASTOFF SwITCH2LASTONM SWITCH2LASTOFF Datentyp varcharr 128 varcharr 128 int int smallink datetime datetime datetime datetime MULL zula
168. SFTDD2MESEUE 480 10 1812238220028 1812238220030 UFATMCIODAMABBGABABUUFSDTARA 4 86 enara 104 107 0208 4 8 2 4 1 _ WWMGDDBATIAMAAGESEXGUNMSETDDAN 8 128TI2NBISSE 11291208198 BO2ACHDONCHXCMIBKGSOBIFSTER 1 8 120082008071720 2 00 SESISSOGIFIHSTSDADISSENDEWGE M 2 1081228221808 1081229221808 00 VFRTERDAIEESATIDSBARAGEDDUODSAS 1081229922309 SSSMDABESDASIFAE2ADSBSIMODI 1 2 12MD2N U SCOMIDAdEDAdEDIATIEDICIHEOR 2 10R122382MPT6 108122362HP39 UEDUSSG7UDAMOREAMTSERNDS M 2 iZLI22NBUSSYID _ QZLI2N NSE GADAICZACRAD AEDB ASCH ORNECEOCESAC 3 azana Tazen 00 ETAFAEFEJFSEABAVSCCPOSIBDDCHBQU 10812238 120720 1612238061209 0 40677790 6F13 445C AF1 4 069D 422403EC 8 23 1105 12 2008 09 51 36 1105 12 2008 09 51 36 lt gt 7 2 7 2 1 Howto archive data selected measurement data RMS or transient lists can be saved as a zip file on your computer Select restore measurement data from archive to restore the saved file 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 171 Configuration Fs Fs ARCHIVE ALL ARCHIVE RMS ARCHIVE TRANSIENTS COMMON ARCHIVE SECURITY In the menu maintenance archive you can select 1 archive all 2 archive RMS 3 archive transients 2010 DEWETRO
169. SSB 20 L3 Uwi Mitterdorf SSB 20 3 12 2008 02 41 07 1 500 1 000 500 L 500 1 000 1 500 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 r The navigation bar has now changed and is similar to the normal diagram navigation bar d Edit Chart Axis with the help of this button the axis can be changed FFT View Click in the visualization list using the right mouse button or select the command visualizations edit visualization from the menu bar Activate the FFT View and select a view rectangular Hanning Hamming Blackman 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 101 triangle flat top aA Trigger Setup General Module Switcher Caption Transient List Description Rights Visible Legend Columns Owner Administrator CONFIRM USEACC USEACCID Group Standardvisualisierungen LJ MR Head Write Execute MASTERGUID LI MASTERINS 14510 Group C C M amp STERTRIGGERINDEX MEASUREMENTID 0 0 0 eae Views Trigger PRETIME View confirmed trigger Cross Trigaer STORAGETYPE TRIGGERDESC Auto refresh TRIGGERINDEX TRIGGERTEXT as time axis TRIGGER TIME Legend at bottom FFT Rectangular Event Trigger Slow Trigger FFT Height 22 The following visualization will appear 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 102 Visualization of Measured Data
170. Soft autoload setup If the DEWESoft launcher does not find any dongle it asks the user for current settings By confirming the settings you create a new dongle Instrument Selection Addresse des A ppzerverz Streaming Server localhost Reload List Key Drive Lokaler Datentr ger Configure Network Settings Enable SNMP Service Interface name localhost Use DHCP address 132 158 0 1 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 1971680 1 SNMP Target localhost SNMP Target localhost Startup Delay 0 ERFASSLINI3 PLDB1046 ERFASSUNG4 ie O8 ERFASSLINGE test Liste gt Gerate Erfassung Ausser Betrieb D Por ZErfassungz Ausser Betrieb zErmassungs ausser betrieb ERFASSUNIGE ERFASSUNGS EHFASSLINI333 DB1E130C ERFASSUMNGET2 etassurnigs_ 1 102 Verwendet Gerateid vom auegewahiten Gerat aus der Erzeudt Liste 2123 2 4 PMT DEWESoft Control the data analyser When DEWESoft are used on the same instrument such as e g portable instruments you can have full access to DEWESoft from PMT In this case PMT is the main programme and should be started with the auto boot function The client remembers the settings of the previous status and uploads the former operation mode when being re started 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 25 2 4 1 Activation Activate DEWESoft control in the PMT menu soft
171. TU kA E r de 3 W FETAN m Suma 0 Lagani z7 TOON hii E B 1 B 78 Dual raho Haid E Plat JERS ag Bb Properties Events ep DEVIETHOTM e ob eae E 3 lage PRS Power Quality Division FR Potton B ChS0LO0Spectre_legend 2 zh Soler hen L Rec I L Dh CHADWEID i Think senere i Eh ToS ENN E D ple dnce Dh TORGET E VE EF Eh CO aj EFrave Use DATETIME dn i r Ei Piirab Eh laure Eh oucur ta Fy Ca rm e kane nho MEEL 71 ngpi Tns L Oe Erin Or alee L Eh Fizhk Ua 1 Eh 2 is Eh vi Tne oberi Tp Age 1 OB CHAHHELCAI DO Tie 8 YETUK HTANE IINE AAFAA ure Fl DROEGE gt ihe pra p runs Crezte FM Creche caption 73 499 4 00 Papel As you can see there are two picture objects included The first is connected with the diagrams of the diagram view and the
172. UREMETRNT ITEM 9 MEASROWID 9 LOGCHACODE MINVAL MAXVAL AVGVAL RMSVAL 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Other 194 8 3 1 Import Export of Setups In the visualization list you have to click onto the setup that should be exported using the right mouse button and select export visualization Show Visualisation Add Visualisation edit Visualisation delete Visualisation Copy Visualisation Paste Visualisation Import Visualisation Export Visualisation The exported setup would be stored as an XML file Enter a file name and select a directory where the exported file should be stored speichern unter Speichem in Setups Ed Eigene Dateien Arbeitsplatz amp Metzwerkumgeb Dateiname EN50160 Diagram ung Dateityp Setup 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 195 8 3 2 Mame Ge ndert am EN50160 Diagram XML g4KB XML Dokument 01 10 2007 11 31 Select import visualization in the menu in order to import a visualization Load the XML file and the visualization will then be imported It is also possible to export or import large reports Take care that all included visualizations diagrams FFT etc are imported as well Import Export of Measured Data Select measurements in the menu in order to export or import measured data 3 _ File Visualisations Tools Help Show Setup Load Filter Save Fil
173. WideStrinc Ir widestring TaxRate Float Contact WideString country crosstest T currency quating customer customer query T employee items MSysAccessObjects MSys4ccessaML MSysACES MSysIMEX Columns MSysIMEXSpecs MMSysObjects E MSyvsOueries MSysRelationships Callumn Visible Where Sort Function Group E nextcust Custho T nexkibem Company Phone L nextord T orders parks unicode vendors That 15 all that necessary for query building You can see query code on SQL page tab and on Result page tab you can see data which the query has returned Click to close constructor At that we return to query editor window where the generated query code 15 now displayed 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 395 SELECT c CustHo c Company c Phone FROM Customer c Attention If you modify query code you will lose plan tables placing in query constructor and their joins Do not modify query code manually you can always enter query constructor and correct the plan visually By clicking IE in editor we return to the report designer All that is left to do is to connect Master data band to data source and place fields on the band 9 1 13 5 2 Complicated query building Complicated query building Top In previous example we built reports on
174. a special band Group Header A special condition is established for the band DB field value or an expression the band is output every time the field s value is changed The following example illustrates this Let us create a new project in Delphi put the TfrxReport and 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 258 TfrxDB DataSet components the form Set their properties as shown below Query 1 DatabaseName DBDEMOS SOL select from customer orders where orders CustNo customer CustNo order by customer CustNo frxDB DataSet DataSet Queryl UserName Group Let us open the designer and connect our data source to the report After that add the Group header and Master data bands to the report Set a condition in this case it is Group CustNo data field in the Group header band editor Break on gt Data Field Expression Options Keep group together Start new _ Show in outline Drill Down Reset Page Numbers Let us link data band to the Group data source and place the objects in the following way note that the group header must be placed above the data band GroupHeader GroupHeader 1 Group E Sroup OrderNo Group SaleDate 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 259 On previewing we would see report similar to the one shown belo
175. able s value a 287 EV GIS ase 287 Example of using the OnBeforePrint CV NL cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeaeaananseessesessacaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaeas 289 Printing the group s sum total in the group s 291 ESPERE 295 DCT VICS 297 PREPO ODJECE 297 REI IL TD T EUN E 298 CEP 299 WSINnG ANG Endine OD IGOLasscutes vascos ox etae nx veg us cas susauasaqasinianeinenasaacean a Evo ARN ULP UAR UE 300 cT 303 Usno he pea soto 305 OniManualBulld page S event acini erre E Meena 309 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh VI Creanon Or ODIECiS uias 314 Cross tab TeDOLIS 315 EEA 317 Ghatiging appestali6gsss 6253509 matum a 319 eaae adeat oxi esi
176. agram editor ver 2003 and later Export method is a table diagram one On exporting to XML format the dialogue box for output file parameter settings appears Export to Excel Page range AJ Current Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Export settings _ Continuous WYSIWYG Page breaks Background _ Open Excel after export Export parameters Continuous generate continuous document without page breaks and page headers footers Page breaks includes page breaks in resulting document WYSIWYG full compliance to report appearance Disabling allows reducing the number of lines and columns resulting table Background export of filling color assigned to report page 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 410 Open Excel after export resulting file will be opened right after exporting into Excel Export peculiarities Excel program must be installed on your PC RichText objects are transferred as a simple text graphic images are not supported 9 1 14 5 6 Export to CSV Format Export to CSV Format Top CS V file contains values formatted in the form of a table diagram and adjusted in such a way that every value in column is divided from value the next column be means of separator and every new row begins with new line This format may be imported into different table diagram editors Export method is a table di
177. agram one On exporting to CSV format the dialogue box for output file parameter settings appears Export to CSV Page range All Q Current page Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Export properties OEM codepage Separator Open after export Export parameters OEM codepage resulting file OEM coding selecting Separator values separator in files Open after export resulting file will be opened right after exporting via CSV files viewing program which must be installed in OS Export peculiarities on transferring into this format report design 1 not saved Graphic images are not supported 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 411 9 1 14 5 7 Export into HTML Format Export HTML Format Top HTML Hypertext Markup Language is regarded as standard language for document marking in the Internet HTML was created as a language for scientific and technical documentation interchange suitable for usage by people who are not specialists in nesting It is used for creating relatively simple but nicely designed documents Besides document structure simplification hypertext support is included into HTML Export method is a table diagram one On exporting to HTML format the dialogue box for output file parameter settings appears Export to table Fage range AJ Current Enter page numbers and or
178. aks in document file WYSIWYG full compliance to report appearance Disabling the option allows optimization reducing the number of lines and columns in the output file Background export of graphic image assigned to a page into ODF file It considerably increases output file size Open after export output file will be opened right after export Export peculiarities RichText objects are transferred as simple text graphic images transference is supported 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 407 9 1 14 5 3 Export to RTF Format Export to RTF Format Top RTF Rich Text Format was developed by Microsoft as a standard for text documents interchange Now RTF documents are supported by many modern text editors and operating Systems Export method is a table one On exporting to RTF format the dialogue box for output file parameter settings appears Export to RIF Page range All Current Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated bv commas For example 1 3 5 12 Export settings Pictures WYSIWYG Page breaks _ Continuous Page Header Footer Export parameters Open after export Pictures enables graphic images export to output file Page breaks enables page breaks RTF file WYSIWYG full compliance to report appearance Disabling the option allows optimization reducing the number of lines and columns in the output file
179. ally CAPTION name of the group DESCRIPTION additional information to this group 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration 176 7 3 2 Alarms and E Mails Configure PMT software for e mail notification after an alarm Add a new user group in the menu tools user groups PMT Configuration 5683 USER GROUPS OOO Home Back Excel Prior Next Insert Delete Apply Cancel Export Home Configi Configuration Caption Description Dewetron Dewetron System Administrator E Mail Benachrichtigung ID unique ID generated automatically Caption name of the group for example Mail Description additional information to this group add a group delete a group y quit all changes Add the user who should receive an e mail notification to the user group mail 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 177 User ID User login Full name Password Repeat password E mail Tet Language Costcenter Standard Gruppe Group rot Dewetror Jurgen Zaff User is active User is root Select the submenu alarm code relation in the menu bar settings 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration 178 PMT Configuration Jog ALARM CODE USER GROUP E2 aing OOO Exit Home Back Excel Copy Prior Insert Delete Apply Export Home Configi Alarmcode Instrument De
180. arranged according to the user s need You can also change the view and split the window in two parts by moving the caption in the header line with the mouse and placing it on some other space in the main window The following picture shows a split view with a diagram and the start up page DEWETRON Process Monitoring JEE General visualisation 2 Print PA Legend in Chart P Reset Marker Marks a Prin e 22 12 2008 11 13 49 29 12 2008 11 13 49 e LO egend in Chart T Reset Marker 4 PA Export Graph chart axes n active Trigger 1 Points Reporting Back Forward Load to Clipboard il a i eS auto refresh T2 Active Trigger 2 Edit File Data PO1 U Stern und I UW Webling IKEA 20kw 01 U Stern und I UW Webling IKEA 20 0 2212 2008 23 12 2008 23 12 2008 24 12 2008 24 12 2008 25 12 2008 25 12 2008 26 12 2008 26 12 2008 27 12 2008 27 12 2008 28 12 2008 28 12 2008 29 12 2008 CURVAL2 INSTRUMENTCAPTION DATETIME OF MED STDDEV MOD P 8 THD 22 0 002 0 003 P09 Flicker 23 0 044 0 075 P10 Frequenz 24 0 002 0 002 P12 1 Oberwelle 3 5 Dreieck 25 0 013 0 027 m omaan iraan 26 0 002 0 003 27 0 021 0 026 28 0 002 0 002 29 0 017 0 023 Devices 30 0 002 0 002 31 0 006 0 011 Measurements 0002 0 002 33 0 006 0 009 34 0 002 0 002 gt 35 0 010 0 014 PMT v 4 0 80 619
181. ase of simple report Header Header1 header Footer Footerl footer header data data data data data footer Let s look at more complex example using two data levels master detail 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 254 Header 1 masterheader p masterheader masterdata det ailheadaer Masterdata detaildata Footer Faateri detaildata mastetooter det ailfnat er Header Header masterdata detailheader det allhead detaildata Hetalldata detaildata Footer Footer det ailfooter Setailfooter masterooter As we can see the header is output before all data band records Thus master data header is printed once at the beginning of a report detail data header 1 output before each eroup of detail bands belonging to the current master record band The detail footer 1s output after the group of detail bands belonging to the master record band the Master footer is not output until after all the master databand records Using the FooterAfterEach property of the data band we may override this behavior Setting this property to True you may also use context menu of the data band Footer after each row item will cause the footer to output after each data row It may be useful in some cases when designing master detail reports The previous example with FooterAfterEach property of the master data set to True
182. asms the tongue thickened the eye fixed the breathing laborious and the patient expires in paroxysm of extreme suffering When constructing a report if a text does not find room in the top object the part which does not fit the object will be transferred to the bottom object Since the objects are located around the picture the effect of text wrapping is performed Attention the main object should be inserted in the report before inserting the linked one Otherwise text wrapping may function incorrectly If your report operates incorrectly select the linked object and then transfer it to the forefront by the EditlBring to front menu command 9 1 2 18 Displaying data in the form of a table Displaying data in the form of a table Sometimes it 15 necessary to display a report in the form of a table with a frame One of the examples of such a report might be a price list To build such report in FastReport a user just needs to enable framing function for the objects located in the Data band Let us demonstrate several variants of frames with a test report example Let us create a report of the following kind Bia Specie Bio common Bia Length Place the text objects on the band side by side and minimize band s height 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 242 The first and the simplest type of the table is a table with full frame To do this one needs to enable a
183. ata are discussed that must be saved periodically which means at fixed intervals Fault records ie fast event driven recordings are described in the following chapter The storing mechanism of raw DEWESoft data is not influenced by this programme We distinguish between the following types of measured data 1 measuring channels in general 2 full FFT channels 2 2 3 1 Channels The following data are stored AVG arithmetic average values RMS root mean square values MIN minimal value of the record interval 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 13 maximum value the interval record ATTENTION When the measurement software e g power module has already calculated average values the RMS value is superfluous yon X M 4 S File Edit Data Displays System Help Keine 4 D Wandlerkarte SE d d 2 Measure Analyse Setup Overview Scope Recorder Store Stop d DATA FILE OPTIONS File details 2 Create multifile Save multifile opt setup Stop storing after DYNAMIC ACQUISITION RATE STATIC REDUCED RATE STORING OPTIONS 5000 lt v always fast pau Adjusted to 05 sec Start storing automatically Analog Counter Math Power Plugins Ordnungsanalyse DB Plugin dg opc m per a P Home E Devices Channel Storing Alarm E vents Channels Full FFT Spectrum
184. ation on a design page of an area which has definite behaviour according to it s type Text object displays one or several text lines within the rectangular area Picture object displays a graphic file in BMP JPEG ICO WMF or EMP format amp Line object displays a horizontal or a vertical line 2 System text object displays service information date time page number etc as well as aggregate values Subreport object allows inserting an additional report design page inside the basic one 49 the objects of Draw category represent different geometrical figures diagonal line rectangle rounded rectangle ellipse triangle and diamond H Chart object displays data in the form of charts of different kinds circle chart histogram and so on RichText object displays a formatted text in Rich Text Format RTF object displays a checkbox with either a check or a cross Barcode object displays data in the form of barcode many different types of barcodes are available OLE object is able to display any object using OLE technology The basic objects you most likely need to work with are the Band and Text objects You will learn about their capabilities in detail further in this chapter 9 1 2 2 Hello World report example Hello World report example The report will contain one inscription
185. ault 308 UW Weiz Default Default Default Default Default Server Server Server 303 UW Weiz2 G11 UW Bruck G04 UW Deutschlandsberg Server GOE UW Leibnitz Server Server Server Server Mail Mail Mail GO8 UW Weiz1 03 UW Weiz2 G11 UW Bruck1 G12 UW Bruck2 Alarm Server Mail G13 UW Mitterdorf Alarm Server Mail G14 UW Murzzuschlag 7 1 3 Importing Measured Data on the left side of the name opening the branch the power modules can be selected and added to the group If there is no network connection available between the server and the measurement instrument it is possible to import the data onto the server database with the help of PMT 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration DEWETRON Process Monitoring Tool General Visualisation uv Logout Group Wisible Visualisations Status close General Navigation A Start Page Visualisations ENE Root Demo Reports HC Standards CJ Berichte Leittechnik Configuration UPDATES GROUPS LOGICAL CHANNE MODULES SOFTWARE TABLE VIEWER CONFIGURATION 01 1 MIN U Stem und 01 2 Stem und 02 U Delta und 4 N ARCHIVE SECURITY P02 1 MIN U Delta und P02 2 Delta und P03 3U P und GH P04 L1 und Min Max P04 L2 und Min Max P04 L3U und I Min Max 222222222 AL
186. axis to configure the settings 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 118 GRAPHCAPTION GRAPHSTART GRAPHEND LEFTMINAUTO LEFT MIM LEFTMA AUTO LEFT Mavs LEFTLOL LEFTARISVISIBLE 3 m a o m A click shows all measurement points RMS Data A click on Marks shows all measurement data 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 119 5 9 3 A click deletes the marker Column Values COMMENT CONFIRM USEACC USEACCID CONFIRMGMT CONFIRMTIME DURATION FAULTID GMT INS INSID INSTNAME INSTRUMENTGROUPCAPTION LOGICALCAPTION LOGICALINDEX LOGICALNAME MASTERGUID MASTERINS_INSID MASTERTRIGGERINDEX 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 120 disturbance value of voltage as percentage of the nominal voltage MEASUREMENTID MODULECAPTION MODULEINDEX NOMINAL_VOLTAGE NOT DELIVERED ENERGY NUM OF USERS PERCENTAGE POSTTIME PRETIME PROCESSABLE SAMPLERATE SCALEK SCALEN STORAGEINDEX STORAGETYPE TRIGDAT_TRIGDATID TRIGGERDESC TRIGGERINDEX TRIGGERTEXT TRIGGERTIME TRIINFID UNITSTR VALID VOLTAGE 5 10 DISDIP Statistics Indicates whether the event is valid for further evaluation for example DISDIP CBEMA The module DISDIP Statistics is an additional module for evaluating event and requires the event list module as well The DISDIP statistics was created
187. ayed as a single value representing the sum of values which did not fit the chart In our example the chart has 18 values and only 8 of them can be displayed Let us enter the editor and set limiting Other options Sort order Toph values E Toph caption xs Text The limiting will work if the TopN is not zero The name in the TopN title which will be displayed opposite to the sum value should be specified Sorting mode 1 not significant values will be sorted by default As a result the report will look as follows 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 347 9 976 147 Canada 3 363 130 United States of America Eo 8 511 196 Brazil 777 815 Argentina C 1 967 180 Mexico IE 1 285 215 Peru 1 135 307 Colombia 1 093 575 5 207 330 9 1 8 2 Some useful settings Some useful settings Top Let us examine several settings which can be useful for setting chart appearance These settings can be specified in the object inspector only The following basic properties are available when selecting a chart in the top of the list Gradient settings for gradient background filling Enable the Gradient Visible property for gradient displaying Legend settings for explanatory table appearance The table can be disabled with the help of the Legend Visible property The table position is set with the help of the Legend
188. be unique it 1s impossible to create two identical variables in different categories Let us illustrate the use of variables by the following example Assume we have two data sources the first is frxDBDataSetl with the CustNo and fields and the second is frxDBDataSet2 with the OrderNo and Date fields We can associate the following list of variables to the fields Clients Client number Client name Orders Order number Order date where Clients and Orders are two categories Let us open the variables editor and create a required structure with the help of the New category New variable and Edit buttons To associate the variables to the DB fields let us select a variable and double click on the required DB field in the right part of the window The link to the DB field will be moved to the bottom pane of the window The variable is now associated with the expression so the value of variable becomes the value of the expression If necessary the expression can be edited or modified manually and any FR functions or other variables may be used within it Remember that categories must not be associated to anything 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 231 3 Edit Variables Variables Data Variables Functions Classes B Clients J Data Client number T Customers Client name Cust B Orders Company asc O
189. bh 340 salary Year 1999 2000 2001 2002 Grand Total Ann 3300 2700 3100 1700 Ben a900 2100 1800 Catherine 6100 3200 Den 3999 8100 Grand Total 13300 11999 11200 3500 The Print down then across option determines how to print a table across several pages Here are two examples of using this option with and without pay attention to page numbers 1 Print down then across is on salary Employee 1999 2000 2001 2002 Grand Total Ann 3 300 00 2 700 00 B 100 00 1 700 00 10 800 00 Ben 3 900 00 2 100 00 1 800 00 7 800 00 Catherine 6 100 00 3 200 00 9 300 00 Den 3 999 np 12 099 00 rand Total 15 355 11 999 00 4 500 0 39 9900 2 Print down then across is off 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 341 salary 1999 2000 2001 2002 Grand Total Employee Ann 3 300006 2 700 00 8 100 00 1 700006 800 3 900 00 2 100 00 1 800 00 7 800 Catherine 100 00 3 200 006 9 300 006 Den 3 999 np 12 099 00 rand Total 43 300 00 11 999 00p 3 et UR 39 999 00 The Reprint headers on new page option determines if it is necessary to print table headers on each new preview page The Side by side cells option is used if you have two or more cell values in a table It determines if it is necessary to print cells side by side or stacked de
190. bject s property as it is shown in the illustration above can act as a value In case when a parameter is taken from the data master set it 15 necessary to adjust the IirxADOQuery Master property The data set must contain a field with the name coinciding with the name of the parameter At the same time it 1 not necessary to specify either a parameter type or its value 9 1 11 1 4 TfrxADODataBase TfirxA DODataBase Top This component is used to connect to a database Its function is similar to the l ADOConnection Delphi component The component has the following properties Connected If True it activates the connection DatabaseName The ADO connection string LoginPrompt Defines whether it 1 necessary to request a password upon connection to DB The LoginPrompt property defines whether it is necessary to request a password when connecting to DB If LoginPromt False a user name and a password must be specified in connection parameters 9 1 11 2 Report constructing Report constructing Top Let us examine design of a simple report using data access components at runtime We will use the demo database comes with FastReport FR Demos Main demo mdb as data for the example Create a new Delphi project which we will use for experimentation Add the IfrxReport TfrxDesigner TfrxDialogControls IfrxADOComponents IADOConnection TButton components on the form
191. ble in its editor DATE you should remember that the date can be displayed in a Text object by typing DATE in its editor We add Text object which will contain the Hello text in the Report title band Note you can see the text object which displays page number is already added to the Pagefooter band ReportTitle ReportTitle1 r Hello L d PageHeader PageHeader1 m BATE L d PageFooter PageFaoter1 r 1 _ Page When running the report you will see that the objects in the finished report are allocated on the page in the appropriate position 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 222 Thus bands are responsible for object positioning in required places Depending on band type we can add objects either at the top or at the bottom of the page on the first page or on the last one The basic bands which we would need in most reports work in the following way header band is displayed at the very top of each page Page footer band is displayed at the very bottom of each page Report title band 1 displayed at the top of the first page but below the Page header band depending upon the TitleBeforeHeader page property assigned in the object inspector Report summary band is displayed at the very end of a report at white space 9 1 2 7 Databands Databands Now we are about to learn how to print the data from D
192. ble the Stretch propert both the band and the text object However that is not all because a text object with longer should be able to stretch by itself we ll need to set some of it s properties also The text object can automatically set its height and width in order to find room for it s contents can use the AutoWidth and StretchMode properties for this The AutoWidth property allows the t object width to vary so that all the lines find room without division of words This mode 1 useful whei object has a single text line and growing to the right will not effect other objects The Stretch property the object s height to grow to accommodate the text without changing the objects width This property several modes and you can select one in the object inspector smDontStretch do not stretch an object by default smActualHeight stretch an object in order to find room for the whole text smMaxHeight stretch an object so that its bottom would coincide with the bottom of the band in which object 1 placed We will examine this mode later Now we are interested in the Stretch property of the Text object Enable it in the object context or set the StretchMode smActualHeight property value Also enable the Stretch band prop Preview the report and make sure that everything works as expected 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 237 Clown Iriggerfish Red Emperor
193. butes are displayed The whole set of attributes is only printed Let us modify our report appearance with Bold style for headings Report is ready you can run preview mode 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 353 Customer list Company Address Action Club PO Box 5451 Action Diver Supply Blue Spar Box 3 Adventure Undersea PO Box 744 American SCUBA Supply 1739 Atlantic Avenue Aquatic Drama 921 Everglades Way 9 1 9 1 Cross tab in dot matrix Cross tab in dot matrix Top The number of objects for dot matrix report is restricted only by those which can be displayed in te form Among them there is Cross tab object Let us examine simple cross report creation which is simi one built earlier in Table with composite headers chapter For dot matrix report creation perform the same steps like the previous chapter call Empty matrix report wizard Put DB cross table component on report page and enter its editor 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 354 Cross tab Editor Source data Croass tab structure Lg Cross al E A E Salary m Month Year Employee Grand Total op o s mea ma Year Subtotal 4 2 Month I0 4 2 Showy title Show corner Column header Row header Column grand total Row grand total Auto size Border around cel
194. by coloring every second data line Using the Customer List report example which we constructed previously to save effort Remove all the text objects from the Master data band Put a Text object on the data band and stretch it so that it would occupy practically all the band space ReportTitle Band Customers This object will modify its color depending the data line number Select the object and set the following conditional expression in the highlight editor Line mod 2 1 Attention if you have selected C Script as a script language See more details in the Script chapter you should write the condition using C Script Line 2 1 Select gray color for highlighting but not too saturated closer to white Now other objects can be added to the data band on top of the empty text object Bandi mE mum EMEN T Customers Customers Company Customers Phane Customers FAX 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 275 When previewing the report we will can see following output Action Club Action Over Supply Adventure Undersea American SCUBA Supply Aquatic Drama Blue slass Happiness Blue Jack Aqua Center 913 870 0233 22 44 500211 011 54 09054 213 654 0092 h13 442 b54 413 555 1884 401 609 623 610 772 6704 015 070 0202 2 2 4 4 500596 0011 34 0906 4 213 654 0095 613 442 765
195. commands are available 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 356 Escape commands IBM Generic Mane Epson Generic HP Generic IBM Generic Also there is a set of flags setting options of dot matrix printing Print to file defines whether it 1s necessary to send printing stream to file on hard disk If flag is enabled a window with file name query appears Page breaks defines whether it is necessary to send Page break control command on reaching page bottom If the flag 1s disabled it allows to print on roll stationery A codepage defines whether it is necessary to perform symbol conversion Pseudographic defines how to draw vertical and horizontal lines If flag is disabled lines are drawn with the help of symbols 9 1 9 3 Command object Command object Top As it was described earlier you can determine the following attributes set for dot matrix report objects yA gy w Bold Italic Underline Superscript Subscript Condensed wide 12 cpi 15 cpi This 15 a standard set which is understood by all models of dot matrix printers Meanwhile a specific printer model can support commands not present in standard set for example printing with 20 character per inch resolution To send such a command on report printing use ESC Command object 8 The object 1 placed in required place of page for example in top left corner or before objects group which 1 t
196. controls what happens when new objects are inserted If the option is enabled its editor will be displayed each time an object is inserted When creating a large number of blank objects it is recommended to disable the option Disabling the Show band captions option you can disable bands captions in order to save some place in a page At that the band s captions would be written inside of it The Show drop down list of fields option stops the drop down list from displaying when pointing with the mouse to a Text object which is connected to data fields This may be necessary if there are many narrow text objects in a band The Free band placement option disables snapping of bands to the page This option is disabled by default and bands are automatically grouped in page according to their function gap between bands can be set in the Gap between bands field 9 1 1 5 Report settings Report settings Top A window with report parameters is available from the ReportlOptions menu A dialogue has three pages In the first page you can see the general settings of the report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 210 Report Settings General Inheritance Description Printer settings SS Microsoft Office Document Image Writer on Microsoft Document Imagir SS Canon iP4200 5 001 Copies e Collate copies General Double pass Password 40 Print if empty
197. ct represents the Report tree control element in a preview window CA Preview Edd 5 4 8 C 100 c BI EE E Action Club 1014 1029 4 1038 11129 E Action Diver Supply 1039 Order 1014 Dz B Adventure Undersea 1017 E uud 7612 Krypt 1074 ii Order 1029 Ds 1117 1137 1217 1328 5313 Safet 1294 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 300 This element displays a treelike structure of a finished report When clicking on any tree node there is a jump to the page connected to this node To display the tree you should either enable it by clicking the button in the toolbar of the preview window or specify it with the help of the Report PreviewOptions Outline Visible True property The control element s width in pixels can be specified there as well Report PreviewOptions OutlineWidth Let us examine this object s methods procedure AddItem const Text Adds an element with the Text name to the current String tree position The current report s page and the current position on the page are associated with the element procedure LevelRoot Shifts the current position in the tree to the root level procedure LevelUp Shifts the current position in the tree on one level up 9 1 6 14 Using the Engine object Using the Engine object Top We have already stated that the Engine object represents the report s engine which manages report s cons
198. d the name of data band on which the value s to be handled originally reside flags a bit field which can be the following values or their sum 1 include invisible bands in calculation 2 accumulate the value or running total do not reset the result value when the current data span resets An expression is the only mandatory parameter all the rest are optional Nevertheless it is recommended to always use band parameters to avoid mistakes The COUNT function has the following syntax COUNT band flags COUNT band The parameters assignment is similar to the one described above There is a general rule for all aggregate functions a function can be counted only for the data band and used only in that band s footer the following bands refer to the latter footer page footer group footer column footer and report footer summary band How do aggregate functions work We will examine it using our group report example Let us add some new elements to the report GroupHeader SroupHeader 1 Group OrderNo Group saleDate Group GroupFooter GroupFooter SUM lt Group tems Total gt MasterData1 L The Group ItemsTotal field on the data band will display the current order total Place 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 266 Text object in the group footer containing the aggregate SUM call as shown above It will display the total of all
199. d Connect the Master Data band to the data source double click on the band and select Bio from the list Increase the band s height to 5 cm by dragging the bottom of the band down or use object inspector Place a Text object in the band and connect it to the CommonName field using any of the methods described previously After that drop the Picture object alongside and connect it to the Graphic field by setting it s properties using the object inspector DataSet Bio DataField Graphic Note that both of these properties are of the List type and one can select the required values using the mouse To make room for the picture stretch the object up to 4 x 2 5cm ReportTitle1 Bio Comman Name We are done The report is finished see the picture below 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 235 Clown Triggertish Red Emperor 9 1 2 15 Multi lined text displaying Multi lined text displaying Top We ll add to the previous example In the Biolife table there is a Notes field which contar detailed description of each fish Update our report by adding this field into it At first glance everything seems to be easy add the Text object to the databand between the exis objects connect it to the Notes field and set the object s size 8 x 2 5 cm When previewing the report will see that the output 1s not exactly what we want
200. d True HFont TFont Height 25 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 358 9 1 10 1 Controls Controls Top For Dialogue form controls use in a report the TfrxDialogControls p component from the Delphi FastReport component palette should be added to the Delphi form in your project or add frxDCtrl into the uses list The following controls will then be available for use in the reports TfrxLabelControl This control is used for displaying explicative inscription on the dialogue form TfrxEditControl This control is used for entering a text line with the help of the keyboard TfrxMemoControl This control is used for entering several text lines with the help of the keyboard TfrxButtonControl The control represents a button TfrxCheckBoxControl The control represents a flag which can perform two statuses enabled and disabled Near the flag the explicative inscription is displayed TfrxRadioButtonControl The control represents a switch key counterpart with radio button This is the reason why it cannot be used alone TfrxListBoxControl The control represents the list of lines with a possibility to select one of them TfrxComboBoxControl The control represents the drop out list of lines with a possibility to select one of them TfrxDateEditControl The control represents a field with a drop out calendar for date entering TfrxGroupBoxControl The control represents
201. d alphabetically We can separately set our own sorting mode for each line and or column value The following modes are available arrange in ascending order arrange in descending order and perform no sorting In the latter case values in lines columns will be displayed depending on their entries Let us modify column sorting in our example Let years be arranged in decreasing order To perform this let us enter the cross object editor and select the Year column element To modify sorting click on the item s down arrow select descending Ascending 4 2 Descending Close the editor and preview the report It will look as follows 8700 sm eum Den Sum 3999 19099 9 1 7 5 Table with composite headers Table with composite headers 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 323 Our previous example contained one value per line and column headers Let us examine cross table design using a complex header which means that it will contain two or more values The table contains data of the following kind Name Year Month Days Salary Ann 1999 2 3 1000 Ben 2002 1 5 2000 We have added the Month and Days fields which contain month number and the number of working days respectively One can construct several reports on the basis of this data for example salary of all the employees during all years broken down by months What kind of a
202. d as condition in the channel list Start Conditions RE Made Levell Level Setup data window 253 207 adds a starting condition deletes a starting condition Setup By clicking these buttons the setting window is loaded ID increasing number Type type of the trigger data time FFT etc Relative condition if this box is activated the relative values are used as nominal voltage values settings see Devices Mode mode of trigger such as window step etc Levelt lower limit Level2 upper limit if existing or time Such as e g slope trigger Settings 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software Edit Trigger condition Trigger or Data Value data Mode window leave Upper level 253 Lower Level 207 Relative condition 20 DEWESoft Editor starts the DEWESoft window in order to set the triggers The channel choice source 1 ignored in this case 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 21 Trigger Setup we Modus Bereich verlassen HIGH eistunigsmadul 020 Tame g Leiztungemodul 00H oi LOW Lvl Lv 1 2 2 5 3 Stopping Conditions Defines the stop conditions of the alarm if the latter is defined as stop on condition ACHTUNG Only those values are checked that are marked as condition in th
203. d to the limit and converted accordance with the given format peculiarity Export method is a table diagram one On exporting to text format the dialogue box for output file parameter settings appears Export to Text Page range All Q Current page Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Export properties Page breaks Empty lines Frames codepage Open after export Export parameters Page breaks export of page breaks to resulting file Empty lines export of empty lines Frames export of text objects frames OEM codepage resulting file OEM coding selecting Open after export resulting file will be opened right after exporting via default text files viewing program which 15 installed in OS 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 413 Export peculiarities report design is not saved on transferring to this format graphic images are not supported exported page width is figured automatically depending on type of text objects on report page 9 1 14 5 9 Export to Joeg BMP Gif Tiff Graphic Formats Export to Jpeg BMP Gif Tiff Graphic Formats FastReport allows exporting information to graphic formats JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group is a format based on shrinking algorithm which is based not on the same elements search but on difference between pixels It is characterized by high c
204. design work space 2 menu bar 3 toolbars 4 object s toolbar 5 report pages tabs 6 Report tree window 7 Object inspector window 8 Data tree window You can drag elements to a report page from this window 9 rulers When dragging a ruler to a report page the guide line which objects can be adhered to appear 10 status line 9 1 1 1 Control keys Control keys Description FilelOpen menu command FilelSave menu command FilelPreview menu command EditlUndo menu command EditlCopy menu command EditlPaste menu command EditlCut menu command EditlSelect all menu command Move between objects Delete of the selected objects Call the editor of the selected object Modify sizes of the selected objects Move the selected objects Alt arrows The selected object is adhered to the nearest one in the specified direction 9 1 1 2 Mouse control Mouse control 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 203 Left button Selecting an object pasting a new object moving and resizing objects For the selected objects you can perform zooming in and out by dragging the red square in the left bottom corner of the selected objects group Right button Selected object s contextual menu Double click Object editor call Double clicking on the white space of a page calls the Page Settings dialogue box Scrolling a report page Shift lef
205. ding the TfrxADOComponents component from the FastReport palette to the project The following objects appear in the object toolbar when you switch to the Data page in the designer TfrxADOTable TfrxADOQuery and TfrxADODataBase These components are similar to the corresponding Delphi components TADOTable TADOQuery and TADOConnection in terms of their functioning Also you will able to use the TfrxDBLookupComboBox control on a dialogue form 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 367 TfrxDBLookupComboBox The control is used for selecting a value from a directory TfrxBDETable The control 1 used for access to DB table E TfrxBDEQuery The control is used for performing SQL query TfrxBDEDataBase The control is used for connecting to DB Let us examine each component 9 1 11 1 1 TfrxDBLookupComboBox TfrxDBLookupComboBox Top This element is used for selecting a value in the directory table It substitutes the directory identifier of the selected value The element has the following properties DataSet Data source which a control 1s connected to ListField Name of the DB field which will be displayed in a control KeyField Name of the DB key field which will identify the selected record KeyValue Value of the DB key field which was selected in the list Text Value of the DB field displayed in the list AutoOpenDataSet the property is set to tru
206. dows connection window where you can choose the database and set the connection parameters After this you may specify the user name password NB you can create a new connection manually just put the TfrxADODatabase component into your report 9 1 13 3 New table wizard New table wizard This wizard allows you to add new database table into existing report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 389 Connection Wizard Choose the connection type ADO Table Choose the table name customer Filter records fF You need to select the table name Also you can specify the filter if you want to filter a table records for example CustNo 2000 and CustNo 3000 NB you can create a new table manually just put the TfrxADOTable component into your report 9 1 13 4 New query wizard New query wizard This wizard allows you to add a new SQL query into existing report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 390 Connection Wizard Choose the connection type Apo Query SOL statement select From custarmer You need to specify the SQL here You can use visual query builder to do this push the button The query builder is described later in this chapter NB you can create a new query manually just put the TfrxADOQuery component into your report 9 1 13 5 Query construction Query construction Top For Visual query construction Fas
207. e Orders db DataSourcel DataSet Tablel frxDBDataSetl DataSet Tablel UserName Customers frxDBDataSet2 DataSet Table2 UserName Orders In the report designer we ll connect our data sources in the ReportlData window Now add a Master data and Detail data bands on the page Ree elfe epe 1 7 Orders Cust No Orders Order No Orders Sale Date Note that the Master Data band must be placed above the Detail Data band If placed under it FastReport will generate an error message when you preview the report If you previewed the report now you would see that the list of orders remains the same for every customer and contains all records from the Orders table This happens because we did not set the mastersource property of the Orders table Set the MasterSource DataSourcel property in the Table component on the Delphi form Now we have set a master detail connection After that we select the fields to link on Set the MasterFields property of the Table component 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 252 Field Link Designer Available Indexes Detail Fields Master Fields Add Joned Fields We need to link together two CustNo fields in both sources To perform this select the desired fields and then click on Add button Fields linkage will appear in the bottom pane After that close
208. e a link to the Text object which represents a table s Memo parameter and the cell s address in two variants the number of row column and cell the last is relevant if your cross table contains multi leveled cells the RowIndex ColumnIndex and CellIndex parameters respectively are transmitted into the OnPrintCell handler The Row Values and the ColumnValues parameters the second variant of the address The Value parameter is the cell s contents To specify an address you can use the second variant RowValues ColumnValues since it is easier in the given case as well as the first one RowIndex ColumnIndex In our case it was necessary to highlight the third column therefore it would be more convenient to analyze the first variant Since numbering of columns and rows begins with 0 the ColumnIndex 2 checking allows us to define the third column One could do it in a different way 1 e by analyzing the required column by its data we need the 11th month of 1999 Pascal script procedure CrosslOnPrintCell Memo TfrxMemoView RowIndex ColumnIndex CellIndex Integer RowValues ColumnValues Value Variant begin if VarToStr ColumnValues 0 1999 and VarToStr ColumnValues 1 11 then Memo Color clRed end C Script void CrosslOnPrintCell TIfrxMemoView Memo int RowIndex int ColumnIndex int CellIndex
209. e channel list Stop Conditions ID Tune RE Made Levell Level 0 Setup data 771 window 248 4 211 7 14 x Jen adds a stop condition deletes a stop condition 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 22 Setup By clicking this button the setting window is loaded ID increasing number Type type of the trigger data time FFT etc Relative condition if this box is activated the relative values are used as nominal voltage values settings see Devices Mode mode of trigger such as window slope etc Levelt lower limit Level2 upper limit if existing or time such as e g slope trigger 2 2 5 4 Example Frequency Band Trigger A competely defined alarm can have the following characteristics whereas in this case all raw data and the most important RMS data are stored Alarm Event Detail Index 0 Alarm Code 1 Nominal Voltage Alarm reset settings Activate alarm event Module Leistungsmodul 0 Fretime 2 immediatly Flagging Caption Voltage band Fosttime Crosstrigger On Condition at event start Holdaff Time Fosttime Extention Co After s 05 at event end storage time Storage Type SERE ma em Fast ms Slow z STO LOGCHACODE EVEI STO ALAAMIN 3 7 v 14 jo 20 24 Start Conditions HE Level 1 Level 2 Setup
210. e the connected data source will be opened automatically after the event OnActivate dialogue For connecting of a control to the directory you should fill values of the three properties DataSet ListField and KeyField The selected value is available via either the Text or KeyValue properties You can set the initial position of a cursor in the list with the help of the Key Value 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 368 9 1 11 1 2 TfrxADOTable TfrxADOTable Top The component is used for organization of DB table access The component has the following properties Property DatabaseName FieldAliases Filter Filtered IndexFieldNames IndexName MasterFields Master TableName UserName Fields connected with master dataset Master dataset DB table name User name alias of the dataset Component properties functions are similar to the TADOTable Delphi properties To connect a component to the DB table it is enough to fill the DatabaseName and l ableName properties Table opening is performed either via the Active True setting or with the help of the Open method The FieldAliases property editor allows to select fields which will be available upon addressing the table and to set aliases for the whole table and for each field 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 369 Edit Aliases Dataset alias Field aliases User name C
211. e report to see that everything works correctly Another way of form managing 1 to use the OnRunDialogs report event In order to create this event handler select Report object in report tree or object inspector and switch to Events tab in the inspector Double click on OnRunDialogs event to create necessary handler 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 364 Data Dialog agel Button Labell Buttonz Paget Memoal FrxRepork1 TFrxReport hal Properties Events OnRunDialags t1OnRunDialogs OnStartRhepor OnStopReport Write the following code in handler PascalScript procedure frxReportlOnRunDialogs var Result Boolean begin Result DialogPagel ShowModal mrOk if Result then begin if CheckBoxl Checked then Result DialogPage2 ShowModal mrOk end end C Script void frxReportlOnRunDialogs bool amp Result Result DialogPagel ShowModal mrOk if Result if CheckBoxl Checked Result DialogPage2 ShowModal mrOk How the handler works we show the first dialogue If it was closed via IE look at flag status and show the second dialogue if it is necessary If handler returns Result True report is building if Result False report stops 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 365 9 1 11 Data access components Data access components Top Most reports as a rule are based on data from DB For accessin
212. e setting dialog can directly be started in the diagram Changes of the layout of the report are directly incorporated in the 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 49 current diagram auto refresh nh active Trigger 1 Active Trigger 2 Tt Reset Marker chark axes automatic updating of data in the diagram set marker 1 set marker 2 deletes markers if they have been set before starts the chart axis dialogue see below a Chart axes GRAPHCAPTION Flicker Plt GRAPHSTART GRAPHEND EX GAAPHCAPTION Frequency Hz GRAPHS TART al I3RAPHEND Hd GARAPHCAPTION LUnbalance 4 4 GRAPHSTART 1 59 GRAPHENCD 79 LEFT MINALIT OU LEFT MIM LEFT MA LEFTL G LEFTAXISVISIBLE RIGHT MIM FIGHT Macs RIGHTLOG RIGHT ASIS ISIBLE LEFTHRINALITD LEFT MIM LEFTMASALITU LEFT MA LEFTLOLG LEFTAXISVISIBLE RIGHT MINAUTO RIGHT MIM RIGHT MASAU TO RIGHT Mas RIGHTLOG RIGBHTAXISVISIBLE Oe E Ll LEFTHIMALITD LEFTMASALITU LEFT MA LEFTASISVISIBLE RIGHT MINAUTO RIGHT MIN RIGHT MASA TO RIGHT Mas RIGHTLOG RIGHT ASISVISIBLE Oe E Ll Graphcaption title of the graph Graphstart top of graph Graphend bottom of graph Leftminauto if checked the scale is set automatically Leftmin t
213. ecords in the net in case of triggering an alarm All cross trigger channels are recorded please also see channel storing cross trigger Posttime extention If this field is activated and if the same disturbance is again indicated during the recording the time of recording 1 extended Alarm reset settings indicates in what way the alarm should be reset Immediately On Condition after a stop event please see stop condition below After S after xxx seconds the value in seconds must be indicated Storage Type indicates what should happen when the event occurs None the data are not stored but the alarm information is posted Fast ms The data are stored as completely recorded data and the alarm information is posted All time values pre time post time etc have to be listed in seconds Application typically voltage changes recording interval a few seconds Slow s The data are stored following the reduced recording interval of DEWESoft and the alarms are posted All time values pre time post time etc have to be listed in seconds Application typically power and frequency disturbances recording interval 10 minutes Export The settings can be exported to a so called alarm setup This makes sense when the settings have to be used more often Example You have 3 power modules and all should respond to one voltage disturbance Then you ought to define the alarm for the first one and import it for the others In this ca
214. ed inside the Text object one can call it in the script after it is used If an aggregate function is used in the script only without using it in the Text object an error message will appear That happens due to the fact that an aggregate function must be connected with a definite band and only then will it work correctly 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 287 9 1 6 8 Displaying the variable s value a report Displaying the variable s value in a report To display the contents of any script variable in a report one should describe this variable and bind a value to it Here is a simple example of a script variable PascalScript var MyVariable String begin MyVariable Hello end Script string MyVariable MyVariabl Hello The variable s value can be displayed in the Text object for example by placing My Variable text into it A variable s name should be unique which means that it should not coincide with the names of the report s objects standard functions and constants If there is an error in the script a message will be displayed and report construction process will be stopped 9 1 6 9 Events Events Top So far we have examined scripts with only one main procedure which is performed when a report starts running In the main procedure one can perform any initial settings initialize variables However this is not enough for to
215. eeSpace How do ready report s pages form The FastReport core produces bands on the page as long as there 15 enough free space When there 15 no free space left the Page Footer band 15 printed if available and a new blank page is formed As it was already said after displaying the next band the height of free space reduces Moreover displaying of a next band begins from the current position which is defined by coordinates X axis and Y axis This position returns in the Engine CurX and Engine CurY properties respectively After printing the next band the CurY position automatically increases by height value of the printed band After a new page is formed the CurY position is equal to 0 The CurX position 15 modified when printing multi column reports The Engine CurX and Engine CurY properties are available not only for reading 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 302 but also for writing That means that bands can be shifted manually by using one of the appropriate events For example when you have a report that resembles the illustration below Customers Company Lustomers Contact Customers Phone it can be printed in the following way Actian Club Michael Spurling g13 BrD 0238 Action Over Supply Marianne Miles 22 44 5002 1 1 Adventure Undersea Gonzales 011 344 0905 4 American S CUBA Supply Lynn Cinciripini 213 654 0092 Aquatic Drama Gilian Owen
216. eee De ce ist eed 194 Imports Export OF Measured Dal RS ERR ek 195 Tio NAVIGATION Bal 196 Part IX Annex 200 1 Pant A Report Generator ger E RR 200 DESIGNER IN 200 o W MO H A 202 MOUSE COME ETT 202 cicuta adversi ba dn uU ive fub idc he a o bua etd ut did ut 203 Designer mode nr v Sa Rod S BR 203 119 872 6 21 RR TEE D ET rm 204 M iode 205 Frame a URS 206 SANON 206 DESINE ODON S EE TETTE ET LT 207 M 209 t P 212 Creating 2 215 FREDONI OD 6 CS act aconascvgutanssnstcecentsacessnvacealoant a
217. elOnManualBuild TfrxComponent Sender int i for 1 1 1 lt 6 i Show two bands Engine ShowBand MasterDatal Engine ShowBand MasterData2 make a gap if i 3 Engine CurY Engine CurY 10 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 311 OnManualBuild test MasterLatal MasterDataz sterDlataz 2 MasterDatal Masterliatas MasterLDatal MasterDataz MasterDatal MlasterDataz The following example displays two bands groups next to each other PascalScript procedure PagelOnManualBuild Sender TfrxComponent var 1 j Integer SaveY Extended begin SaveY Engine CurY for 1 to 2 do begin for i 1 to 6 do begin Engine ShowBand MasterDatal Engine ShowBand MasterData2 if 1 3 then Engine CurY Engine CurY 10 end Engine CurY SaveyY Engine CurX Engine CurX 200 end end C4 Script void PagelOnManualBuild TfrxComponent Sender int 1 1 Extended SaveyY 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 312 SaveY Engine CurY for j 1 j lt 2 j for i 1 i lt 6 i Engine ShowBand MasterDatal Engine ShowBand MasterData2 If i 3 Engine CurY Engine Cury 10 Engine CurY Engine CurX oaveY Engine CurX 200 OnManualBuild test WasterDatal MasterDatal 2
218. els being rare Let us examine the two data level report design process It will output data from the demo tables Customer and Orders The first table is the list of clients the second one is the list of orders placed by the clients The tables contain data in the following fields 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 250 Customer CustNo Company 1221 Kauai Dive Shoppe 1231 Unisco 1351 Sight Diver Orders OrderNo CustNo SaleDate 1003 1351 12 04 1988 1023 1221 01 07 1988 1052 1351 06 01 1989 1055 1351 04 02 1989 1060 1231 28 02 1989 1123 1221 24 08 1993 As you can see second table contains the list of all the orders placed by all companies To view all of orders from table 2 placed by a company selected from tablel the tables are linked on the CustNo field which is common to both tables The report output from such data should appear as follows 1221 Kauai Dive Shoppe 1023 01 07 1988 1123 24 08 1993 1231 Unisco 1060 28 02 1989 1351 Sight Diver 1003 12 04 1988 1052 06 01 1989 1055 04 02 1989 Lets design the report Create a new project in Delphi put two TTable one IDataSource two TfrxDBDataSet and one TfrxReport components on the form Set the components properties as shown below Tablel DatabaseName DBDEMOS TableName Customer db Table2 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 251 DatabaseName DBDEMOS TableNam
219. enerate a report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 5 6 2 Opening an Alarm List 94 By selecting the alarm list in the visualization list the following picture will be opened DEWETRON Process Monitoring Jes General Visualisation eoo 4 NT 0 lt 4 Excel Copy Print Print Previous Auto Confirm Export List Refresh Home Navigation Alarm Liste lt all gt lt all gt Root Demo Reports Standards Berichte C3 Leittechnik Alarm Liste Ereignis Liste Measurements AMS Graph P Q RMS Graph f RMS Graph RMS Graph Ustar Udelta D Starungsliste Measurements PMT v 4 0 80 619 Administrator INSTNAME name of the instrument apse Alarm Liste lt all gt lt all gt Analyse ALARMINDEX ALSTARTTIME 29 12 2008 11 21 52 29 12 2008 11 21 12 26 12 2008 09 49 51 26 12 2008 09 49 51 26 12 2008 09 49 51 26 12 2008 09 49 51 26 12 2008 09 49 12 26 12 2008 09 49 12 23 12 2008 23 04 46 23 12 2008 23 04 17 23 12 2008 23 03 44 23 12 2008 22 46 28 23 12 2008 08 50 40 23 12 2008 07 19 23 23 12 2008 07 19 18 23 12 2008 07 19 18 23 12 2008 07 19 17 23 12 2008 07 19 17 23 12 2008 07 19 17 23 12 2008 07 19 01 23 12 2008 07 19 01 23 12 2008 07 19 01 23 12 2008 0
220. er home channel storage groups 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 14 2 2 3 2 Storing defines whether the measured value should be stored at all Crosstrigger defines whether the measuring channel should be stored in case of cross trigger please also see chapter Alarm Detail Setup Screen Full FFT Spectrum ATTENTION This function can can only be applied in power applications FFT is understood as the full FFT spectrum In power applications the harmonics are typically calculated over 10 periods therefore obtain a frequency line of harmonics that is 10 times more accurate than the one of the fundamental frequency e g 10 periods at 50 Hz produce 5 Hz lines These spectra can later on be merged to groups and regarded as harmonics and interharmonics respectively Please also see subchapter Full FFT in visualizations DEWESoft ma i File Edit Data Displays System Help Keine 4 D Wandlerkarte ZE pe 24 Measure Analyse Setup Overview Scope X Recorder Store Stop DATA FILE OPTIONS File details Create multifile Save multifile opt in setup Fue ser Stop storing after DYNAMIC ACQUISITION RATE STATIC REDUCED RATE STORING OPTIONS 5000 Auto v always fast Hz ch Adjusted to pps Start storing automatically Analog Counter Math Power Plugins Ordnungsanalyse DB Plugin dg opc Hone
221. erage of the selected time interval is taken and shown Harmonics Order defines the maximum order to be shown If this value is higher than the data that are available all higher values are taken as zero Interharmonics If the interharmonics are measured they will be displayed when activating the checkbox Limit specification If you want to compare the values with limits defined in certain standards such as EN50160 or IEC61000 2 4 you can select the standard here The values are shown in the spectra view and are compared to the list of values 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 72 Limits Limit specification Drag a column header here ta group by that column 6100 2 4 LI CLASS 1 EN 6100 2 4 U CLASS 2 EN 6100 2 4 U CLASS 3 50160 Module switcher The module switcher is function in order select the power module for visualization FFT Setup Step 1 General Settings General Module Switcher Module Switcher Setup iz valid for the groups below Caption Description Active If this checkbox is highlighted you will be asked for which power module you want to run the evaluation If it is not highlighted the diagram channels will already be selected in the setup together with the source power module Add group to add a power module or group 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 73 Remove group to delete a power module group Pr
222. eries identifying variable identifier sub graph number of the sub graph in ID which the variable is displayed storage index logical logical name name logical logical index index trig dat ID internal variable is visible indicates whether the variable 1 visible sample rate min minimal value max maximal value avg average value var variability med medial value stddev standard deviation Q95 95 quantile value FFT indicates whether the Fast 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 107 Fourier transformation is to be carried out 5 7 5 Mathematical channels Press button Math channels to open the mathematics formula editor and add a new formula Mathematics Editor MATHFORMLULA 255 128 010 100 COLOR GRAPH CAPTION LIMITSTR Lett Aight gt After clicking the button select a function 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 108 Formular Editor Functions variables arccos arccosh arcsin arcsinh arctan arctanz arctanh cos cosh degtaerad expl radtodedg randaf conversion of rad ta degrees valid Abbrechen Select the variables Formular Editor Variables 1 2 2 pi pi 2 pi 3 pu I pu pu 2 pu lzper pu 3 pu 3per time JS conversion of rad to degrees Abbrechen valid
223. ers where orders CustNo customer CustNo order by customer CustNo orders OrderNo frxDB DataSet DataSet Queryl UserName Group Enter the designer and connect our data source to the report Enable the double pass in report s settings the ReportlOptions menu item Add two bands to the report Group header and Master data In the Group header band s editor specify the condition Group CustNo data field Connect the data band to the Group data source and then arrange objects the following way GroupHeader GroupHeader 1 Group OrderMo Group SaleDate Group ItemsTotal GroupFooter aGroupFaoter1 3UM s Group Items Total gt MasterData L For entering sum value we use the selected object in the picture in our example its name is Memo8 The first way We use the TStringList class as an array for sums storage We will store numeric values as strings At the same time the first line in the list corresponds to the value of the first group etc The integer valued variable which we will augment after printing the next group is used for calculating the group s number Thus our script will look as follows PascalScript var Last TSLETWOLLSU i Integer procedure frReportlOnStartReport Sender TfrxComponent begin List TStringList Create end 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 293 procedure frReportlOnStopReport Sender T
224. erungen Read Write Execute Owner Group Others Group Print Template It is possible to switch from 2D to 3D view Data view O Absolute gt Relative H1 Relative to limits Relative to nominal voltage Relative to operating voltage Limits Limit specification EN50160 na Limit Harmonics Calculation Timestamp Interval Harmanics L Inter harmonics Quartil 2 Average Maximum gt Quantil Cancel 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 80 General Visualisation ge Print Report Export Graph 28 12 2008 14 05 44 29 12 2008 14 05 44 RelH1 95 95 LIM flagged Print Back Forward Load Legend in chart Report Copy Legend File Navigation A 50160 FFT UW Webling IKEA 20kV Visualisations 50160 FFT Uw Webling IKEA 20 Start Page HE Root 465 Demo Reports ENE Standards E Harmonics Cj Events BG 50160 O 50160 02 Berichte E Leittechnik EN50160 D 50160 Diagram 50160 DISDIP 50160 Events 7 EN50160 FFT DO DW yw MDM A hi WwW lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt PMT 4 0 80 619 Administrator Rotate the graphics and
225. es Print Template 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 132 Appoint caption description and rights as already described in the previous chapters DISDIP Choose a DISDIP statistics and activate DISDIP With this setting a DISDIP matrix will be displayed in the graph Frequency valuation curve General Module Switcher Caption Frequency Valuation Description Rights wner Administrator Group root Write Execute OU OU View Axis log Voltage log Duration Show only Faults that are visible vor outlines W Use Outline filtering Absolute Values Print Template Disdip _ Enabled Curve Points 2 3 4 F D B 9 UNIPEDE ENS0760 DISDIP ENS0760 DISDIP _ So on ee m Od Curve Points Here you can add and edit or delete curve points 5 13 2 Statistics The frequency evaluation curve plots the depth of frequency sags on the vertical axis against the duration of frequency sags on the horizontal axis 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 133 4 DEWETRON Process Monitoring Tool x General Visualisation Print Report 10 02 2009 11 23 19 11 02 2009 11 23 19 0 Load 25 PrintGraph Chart Axes 15 1 Export To Excel Forward Points Navigation Frequency Valuation DEWE Graz 230 Visualisations ENE Root Demo Report
226. expression For our example disable the object formatting select the Text without formatting category in the format editor Now we need to modify the format of the first variable since the second will definitely be displayed correctly without formatting 1 as an integer and this is what we need Modify the object text in the following way Sum SUM lt Group TtemsTotal gt MasterDatal n 2 2m Number COUNT MasterDatal Preview to make sure that the object displays correctly 1269 16 12 94 1 400 00 Total 51 450 90 Number 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 272 When using format tags the general syntax is as follows expression tag Note that space between the expression and the sign is mandatory The tag itself might look as follows nFormattingLine the numerical format dFormattingLine date time format bFalse True boolean format FormattingLine in every case is the argument to the function by which formatting is accomplished Thus for numerical formatting Delphi s Format function is used for date time it is the FormatDateTime function One can find the possible values from the Delphi help system Below are several values used in FastReport for the numerical formatting g a number with the minimal signs number after decimal point 902 21 a number with the fixed number of signs after decimal point 2 2n a number with bits delimi
227. ext wrap of objects Top For report designing some cases it becomes necessary to wrap text around other objects often when using pictures Let us demonstrate this FastReport feature with our current example Add one more Text object to databand below the Bio Notes object as shown in the following illustration ReportTille ReportTitle1 Fishes mon Bio Nates We will disable stretching for the Bio Notes object We will enable this property for the bottom object To make the text flow from the Bio Notes object to the bottom one set the FlowTo property of the Bio Notes object This property is set in the object inspector and 1 of the drop list type The bottom object s name must be selected from this list The result will look like the following illustration 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 241 Clown Iriggerfish Also known as the big spotted triggerfish Inhabits outer reef areas and feeds upon crustaceans and mollusks by crushing them with powerful teeth They are voracious eaters and divers report seeing the clown trigqgertish devour beds of pearl oysters Do not eat this fish According ta an 1875 account the poisonous flesh acts primarily upon the nervous tissue ofthe stomach occasioning violent spasms of that organ and shortly afterwards all the muscles of the body The frame becomes rocked with sp
228. f Some characteristics e different triggers are possible e different acquisition rates slow fast are possible at the same time e different pre post trigger times are possible DEWESoft Launcher on the Data Analyser The DEWESoft launcher is a programme that is in the DEWESoft programme directory and that starts the DEWESoft according to the instrument settings The instrument settings are certain system parameters such as the ID of the instrument and IP address of the APPServer that are usually stored on a dongle If the launcher starts normally from the autostart file it looks fore the dongle The dongle is a file DEWESoftkey ini that is in the directory DEWESoft key The launcher starts to look for this file beginning with directory Z When the launcher finds the file it compares the key on the dongle with the one stored in the system If the keys differ the launcher updates its keys oubsequently the network settings are compared with the information on the dongle and if necessary updated If instrument ID and network settings are ok the launcher looks for new updates It uses a certain commando of the AppServer If updates are available the 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 24 DEWESoft possible additional files extras and the DEWESoft setup from the database are loaded and stored in the appropriate directory The DEWESoft setup is saved as originally named in the DEWE
229. fault The Join equal cells option allows printing side by side cells with equal values as one big cell Using Object inspector you can also setup the following properties AddWidth AddHeight adds specified amount of space to the cell width or height It will be used when calculating cell size the AutoSize options must be on NextCross pointer to the next crosstab that will be displayed side by side to this one NextCrossGap gap between side by side crosstabs 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 342 9 1 8 Charts Charts Top FastReport allows us to insert charts into the report For this purpose the IfrxChartObject object from FastReport component palette is used The component is based on the TeeChart library which is included in Delphi distribution kit One can also use the TeeChartPro library which can be obtained separately Let us illustrate a simple construction of a chart using the following example To perform this we would need the country table from the DBDEMOS demo database distribution kit The table contains data about countries their area and population Name Area Population Argentina 2777 815 32 300 003 Bolivia 1 098 575 7 300 000 Create a new project in Delphi Put the TTable TfrxDBDataSet TfrxChart and IfrxReport components on the form and then customize them Tablel DatabaseName DBDEMOS TableName country db
230. fault 601 UW Webling Default i 302 Uw Pirka Default i GO3 UW Zwaring Default i G04 UW Deutschlandsberg Default i 306 Uw Leibnitz Default i 308 Uw Weiz Default i 308 Uw Weiz2 Default i G11 UW Bruck Default i 312 UW Bruck2 Default i G13 UW Mitterdorf SECURITY Default i G14 UW M rzzuschlag Server i G01 Uw Webling Server i 302 Uw Pirka Server i GO3 UW Zwaring Server 304 UW Deutschlandsberg Server i 306 Uw Leibnitz Server i 308 Uw Weiz Server i 303 Uw Weiz2 Server 311 UW Bruck1 Server G12 UW Bruck2 Server i G13 UW Mitterdorf Server i G14 UW Murzzuschlag Our example all members of the group mail get an e mail notification when the instrument PNA710Supporttrakt shows an alarm code default You can add as many user group relation definitions as you need 8 Other 8 1 Commandline Functions 8 1 1 Starting without a Logon Screen With the use of the command line parameters you can start pmt automatically username password skips the login dialogue and tries to login directly the name of the host as used in the pmt login dialogue O 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 179 Example omt exe user admin pass admin host PMTgraz autologin 8 1 2 Printing Reports from the Command Line Vis setup name gt defines the report which shall be printed must be of the type report module module name gt the name of the power module to be used if required by t
231. fer control to it At the same time the report s core automatically displays the bands located in the page such as Report title Page title Column title Report footer Page footer Column footer and Background The core also handles the process of forming of new pages and columns The task of the OnManualBuild event s handler is to display data bands and their titles and footers a definite order That 1 to say the OnManualBuild handler s essence 1 to give a command for displaying particular bands to the FastReport s core The core will do the rest itself 1 will form a new page as soon as there 1s no free space on the current one handle the scripts attached to events etc Let us demonstrate a handler with a simple example In the report there are two master data bands which are not connected to data 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 310 ReportTitle ReportTitlei OnManualBuild test PageFooter PageFooter 1 The handler will display these bands in alternate order six times for each one After six bands are created a small gap will be inserted PascalScript procedure PagelOnManualBuild Sender TfrxComponent var 1 Integer begin for i 1 to 6 do begin show two bands Engine ShowBand MasterDatal j Engine ShowBand MasterData2 make a gap if i 3 then Engine CurY Engine CurY 10 end end C Script void Pag
232. frxComponent begin List Free end procedure PagelOnBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin i Us end procedure GroupHeaderlOnBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin 1f Engine FinalPass then Sum bist 117 end procedure GroupFooterlOnBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin if not Engine FinalPass then List Add FloatToStr SUM Group ItemsTotal MasterDatal I1 end begin end C Script TotringList List int i void frReportlOnStartReport TfrxComponent Sender List TStringList Create void frReportlOnStopReport TfrxComponent Sender List Free void PagelOnBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender 1 0 void GroupHeaderlOnBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender if Engine FinalPass Memo8 Text Sum List il void GroupFooterlOnBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender List Add FloatToStr SUM lt Group ItemsTotal gt MasterDatal 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 294 Td Looking at the names of the procedures you can easily find out the events we have used They are Report OnStartReport Report OnStopReport Pagel OnBeforePrint GroupHeaderl OnBeforePrint and GroupFooterl OnBeforePrint As for the first two events they are called as it was said in the beginning and in the end of the report respectively To create handlers for these events one should select the Report
233. ftware 28 erre Chere hb Aa ite Al 1224 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 29 EPa eee ale T il 2 ElawvirAz 3 Miraaueciaenis 2 4 2 2 Loading Setup By clicking the symbol load the DEWSoft setup is loaded 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software m m M select Dewiesnft setup Use the on screen keyboard for instruments with touch display 30 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 31 Comment software test On Screen Keyboard File Keyboard Settings Help 21030200 ESESEQES 1 2 4 5 7 xw 99 7 8 noe eise vinio n DBE err Measurement Setup Nominal Yokage Frequency Current Setup ENS0160 best des 230 7 ED a Marne CAPS B measurement 1 ar Symmetry dewetron graz e THD Flicker gt Period Values Enter the nominal voltage and frequency and select which parameters harmonics symmetry THD flicker period values should be stored P Measurement inr Nominal
234. g Storage at rounded time stamps defines whether the time intervals should start on the hour Caption name of the group Generally these channels are assigned the value default 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 11 Interval the time interval in seconds according to which the values should be created and stored 2 2 2 Devices DEWESoft Dr poo Analog Counter Math Power Plugins _lbeistungsmod 19 548 2390 _ Pbestugsmdul 10 10 7 29 Pielmlelexkeluhs gl Devices are modules One module is e g a measuring instrument itself another one could be a power module However an arbitrary combination of channel storages can also present a module as long as the channel storages are unique in the module In PMT these devices are used as module names in the module switcher as pre selection for diagrams or error lists adds a module deletes a module Caption name of the module Modconfiguration Especially for POWER applications 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 12 Caption The name of the module is already taken over by the Power Setup Startlowpercentage Is used for fault record settings and lists the lower value of the window trigger at which the disturbance recording should start as percen
235. g such data Delphi offers effectiv mechanisms which are used in FastReport This matter concerns the TTable and component which can act as data sources for the report Generally for this aim you can use any components 1 TDataSet successors In addition to accessing data defined in the Delphi project as we have done in our examples using th TfrxDBDataset FastReport has available several DB engine specific components for use within report which ones are dependant upon choices made during installation In FastReport the principles for dat access are much the same as those used in the Delphi environment The same as in Delphi a component put on a dialogue form and its properties are set in the object inspector Component ideology is ver flexible you can also create new components to support different data access engines easily see th developers manual They also with the additional use of the TfrxDesigner give the end user of th application the ability to design reports runtime 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 366 R FastReport 100 fr3 Edit Report View Help m inu d PES Cu Ra tjl EAE T 4 LJ 4
236. hapter Move the mouse cursor to the Text object so that the button in the right part of the object would appear click on the button and select the desired field in the list As you can see now the data source name and its fields names are more than understandable Note It is better to assigning an alias in the very beginning before designing a report This will avoid subsequent need to rename fields in the report 9 1 2 12 Variables Variables Top In addition to usage of aliases there is one more way which allows the user to set more understandable names for DB fields and not only for them One can associate a DB field name as well as any expression to a variable To create and work with variables in FastReport select the ReportlVariables 99 menu item and then click Variables in the 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 230 toolbar The list of variables in FastReport has a two level structure The first level contains categories and the second contains the variables themselves Categorization of the variables is designed for convenience when a list of variables is too long A list must contain at least one category That means that the variables cannot be located at the upper level Furthermore categories are needed for logical variables classification only therefore they are not included in reports That 15 why when setting a name for a variable do not forget that it must
237. hat is all we need 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 268 1040 04 09 1988 3 632 00 1140 12 12 1993 1 240 00 9841 Neptune s Trident Supply 1149 14 03 1994 12 900 7 5p 1045 15 10 1988 787 BDp 1049 13 12 1988 1 809 B5p 1145 17 01 1994 4 228 7282 p Total 2922666 1 Total this page 320672 5 9 1 3 8 Inserting aggregate function Inserting aggregate function Top So far we inserted the aggregate functions into the Text object manually Now we will look at other ways to insert aggregate functions First of all we can use the System text object for output of the aggregate function value As a matter of fact it is the same Text object but one that has a special editor for easier insertion of system variables or aggregate functions 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 269 System Memo CO System variable Aggregate value Function Data band MasterDatal Dataset DataField Themis Total Expression _ Count invisible bands _ Running total SUM lt Group ItemsTotal MasterDatal Text You should step by step select a function type a data band according to which it will be counted and a DB field or an expression value of which will be computed You can also set the Count invisible bands and Running totals flags The second way is to use the Text object and the gt button in its editor t
238. he Report element in the Report tree window Methods Method Description function Calc const Expr Returns the Expr expression s value for example String Variant Report Calc 12 2 returns 3 Any expression which is correct in terms of FastReport s can be transferred as an expression function GetDataSet const Returns a data set with a specified name The data set Alias String TfrxDataSet should be included into the list of the report s data ReportlData dialogue 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 298 9 1 6 13 2 Engine object Engine object Top This is the most useful and interesting object it represents a link to the engine FastReport s core which manages report construction By using the engine s properties and methods one can construct really exotic report design layouts The methods and properties of this object CurColumn Integer The number of the current column in a multi columned report A value can be bound to this property CurX Extended The current shift of the coordinates on the X axis A value can be bound to this property CurY Extended The current shift of the coordinates on the Y axis A value can be bound to this property DoublePass Boolean Equal to True if the report 15 a two pass one Analogous to Report EngineOptions DoublePass FinalPass Boolean Equal to True if the last pass of the two pass report is performed Page
239. he report errors occurring during printing are suppressed and written into a logfile flagging uses the flagging concept of data Start lt startdate gt the date of starting the report uses the local time format e g 01 07 2006 for a German version of Windows end lt enddate gt The date of ending the report uses the local time format e g 01 07 2006 for a German version of Windows pdf filename prints a pdf file with the given name and does not open the preview window If filename auto the filename will be created automatically and existing files will not be overwritten Paths are accepted in both ways example c pdf auto direct prints directly on the default Windows printer not in combination with pdf dur duration prints the report of the recent duration days not in combination with start and end Example pmt exe user admin pass admin host testav1pmtz10demo autologin print vis myfirst report start 01 07 2006 end 01 08 2006 pdf c temp mytest pdf O 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Other 180 8 1 3 E Mail Support This offers an additional parameter to send a report via e mail immediately after creating it It is necessary to use the PDF option together with this function mail send a report via e mail smtphost lt smtphost gt SMTP server from lt mailaddress name of the user who sends the e mail sender to lt mailaddress target gt target of the e mail
240. he shorter ana This 15 very very very long All the text in the memo can be rotated at any angle within the limit of 0 360 degrees The button in the Text toolbar allows you to quickly rotate the text at 45 90 180 and 270 degrees If you 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 218 wish to rotate the text at any other value use object inspector The Rotation property sets the required angle When rotating a text setting values other than 90 180 270 the text can exceed bounds of the object as in our case see the picture below Let us increase object height a little so that the text would fit the object Japoys ay JAYJOUE 5101 aui Huo Alaa Aja SI SIU ery very long text daa 51 SIY LL qi m _ Let us briefly examine some other Text object properties which influence its appearance Most of these properties are available in the object inspector only BrushStyle type of object filling CharSpacing between symbols in pixels GapX GapY text indents from object s left and top boundaries in pixels LineSpacing space between lines in pixels ParagraphGap the first paragraph line indent in pixels 9 1 24 HTML tags in the Text object HTML tags in the Text object Yes this object does understand some simple HTML tags Tags can be located inside the te
241. he report designer 9 1 9 Dot Matrix Reports Dot Matrix Reports Top Earlier we examined reports intended for printing with ordinary printers stylus laser etc If sent to a dot matrix printer their printing will be very slow FastReport allows us to create special reports for dot matrix printer where only standard font symbols without graphic elements are printed That is why printing 1 rather fast Let us examine report building of List type which is intended for dot matrix printing Earlier we created such kind of report see List of clients report We need the same data for report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 350 So create a new project in Delphi place TTable TfrxDBDataSet TfrxReport and TfrxDotMatrixExport components on form and set their properties T Table DatabaseName DBDEMOS TableName Customer db TfrxDB DataSet DataSet Table UserName Customers Enter report designer and select FilelNew menu item The report wizard dialogue appears with a report wizard list Select the dot matrix report item Hew Templates d LJ Standard Standard Dot Matrix Report wizard Report Report Wizard Dot Matrix Mew New Table Report Connecti Wizard Mew Query Wizard On clicking IE you see empty design page layout marked for dot matrix font 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 351 P24 Gl 110112 1141716118120 1221241 26
242. his is the value for the scale if not set as AUTO Leftamaxauto if checked the scale is set automatically Leftmax this is the value for the scale if not set as AUTO 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 50 Leftlog logarithmic scale Leftaxisvisible turns the axis on and off The left values correspond with the values on the right OK accepts the values Save stores the values in the setup permanently d Legend in Chart switches the legend in the main window on and off 5 2 21 Changing the diagramm online allows to change the diagram when being online After clicking this icon all channels are displayed next to the diagram You can add those to the diagram by using the drag amp drop function of Windows DEWETRON Process Monitoring Tool Jeg General Visualisation cai Pri E i Mark Rint 28 12 2008 11 46 58 29 12 2008 11 46 58 gt Legend in Chart Reset Marker 4 Export Graph chart axes n active Trigger 1 Points Edit Setup Reportin Back wW Forward Load Copy to Clipboard RAW Flagged SG auto refresh 12 Active Trigger 2 edi File Data Navigation 50160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20kV ax Visualisations 50160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20kV Start Page Root Demo Reports Standards C3 Harmonics Cg Events 50160 50160 Cj Berichte B Leittechnik O Show harm
243. hlight total values columns and lines if necessary 9 1 7 8 Managing a cross table from the script Managing a cross table from the script If setting table visual resources is not enough one can use the report s script to adjust settings for the appearance of the table The Cross table object has the following events OnAfterPrint Event is called after printing a table OnBeforePrint Event is called before printing a table OnCalcHeight Event is called before calculating length of a row in the table The event handler can return either the required value of height or 0 when the row needs to be hidden OnCalcWidth Event 15 called before calculating column s width in a table The event handler can return either the required value of width or 0 when the column needs to be hidden OnPrintCell Event 1s called before displaying a table s cell The event handler can modify the cell s design or its contents OnPrintColumnHeader Event is called before displaying a title of the table s columns The event handler can modify design or contents of the title s cell OnPrintRowHeader Event is called before displaying a title of the table s rows The event handler can modify design 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 329 NEN or contents of the title s cell We can use the following methods of the Cross table object in events function ColCount Integer Returns the number of columns in a
244. ick it to call its editor and write the following SQL text select from Customer where CustNo gt Add a dialogue form into the report Put the Label Edit 2 Button components on the report dialog form Set the components properties Labell Caption Select if CustNo greater than 2000 Button 1 Caption ModalResult mrOk Button2 Caption Cancel ModalResult mrCancel Open the Params property s editor of the Query component and then set the parameter 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 376 Parameters Editor Data Value Float Edit Text 12 After that go to report design page and create the report as we did in the previous example Cust Mo Upon previewing the report the dialogue in which a user will be prompted to enter customer number will be displayed After entering a requested value and clicking on the button the report s building is completed The customers with numbers larger than the entered one will be displayed Select if CustMa greather than 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 377 9 1 11 Other useful settings Other useful settings Top You can put the Text and Draw elements on the Data page Using such elements you can draw simple diagrams like this 100 200 300 100 200 3
245. ied in the designer If we disable this option we would see that the objects with longer texts still stretched although the band 15 not This leads to text overlaying since each next band is displayed after the previous one 9 1 2 16 Data splitting Data splitting Top Let us pay attention to a peculiarity of this report There 1 lot of blank space at bottom of the pages Why does it happen When a report is constructed the FastReport core fills whitespace of the page with bands After displaying each band the current position shifts down When FastReport finds out that there 1s not enough space to display the next band its 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 238 height is larger than white space left on the page then new page is formed and band displaying continues there This operation continues being performed as many times as there are records in the dataset Our report contains an object with large text and that is why the band height is rather large Furthermore if a large band does not find room on a page it is transferred to the next one and much unused space remains at the bottom of the page This is shown at the following illustration To limit paper wastage let us use a FastReport feature which paragraphs the band s contents All we need do is to enable the AllowSplit option of the First level data band You see that there is less white space at the bottom of report pages
246. ies can be changed Delete visualization the view element can be deleted Copy visualization copies the visualization into the clipboard Paste visualization pastes a previously copied visualization 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh The General Screen 42 4 4 The Menu Bar Menu bar General Visualisation General e u Help Maintenance Status Ml close Visualizations for these functions please see previous chapters Show visualisation 1 4dd Visualisation 8 edit Visualisation delete Visualisation Import Visualisation Export Visualisation Copy Visualisation add Folder edit Folder delete Folder 5 Visualization of Measured Data Diagrams is a visualization element to draw diagrams and also offers other possibilities such as e Diagrams with a single line Diagrams with more lines in one graph Diagrams with more graphs and more lines e A table with values like cursor values statistic values etc e Statistics like MED STDABW VAR MOD etc e Quantil calculation e g 9596 values and comparison with limits 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 43 e Printing Export of diagrams e Copying of tables e Report generator 5 1 Adding an element Click in the visualization list with the right mouse button or select the command visualizations add visualization from the menu bar Now you can see all available visualizations m Select Visualisation ii FFT
247. if my variable 10 then C Script if my variable 10 An alternative way 1 to use the Get function PascalScript if Get my variable 10 then C Script if Get my variable 10 Modification of such variable s value is available only via the Set procedure PascalScript Set my variable 10 C Script Set my variable 10 Worth noting that for conferring string value you need to use additional brackets PascalScript 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 286 Set my Variable Ir 4 Toering CEPTI C Script Set my variable String One should address the system variables such as Page in exactly the same way PascalScript if lt Page gt 1 then C Script 1f lt Page gt 1 9 1 6 6 Calling the DB fields Calling the DB fields Top Just as with variables one should use angle brackets for calling the DB fields PascalScript it lt Tablel lt Fieldi gt Null then C Script if lt Tablel Fieldi gt Null i sss j And just as well one can use the Get function as a matter of fact this function 1s always used in implicit way for calculating expressions enclosed in angle brackets 9 1 6 7 Using aggregate functions in the script Using aggregate functions in the script An idiosyncrasy of an aggregate function 1s that it should be us
248. ign ReportTitle ReportTitle1 Our company L Gur email emailemail com L d What this means You cannot rename or delete such objects You cannot move them to another band other settings such as text color frame can be made Remember if you change some property for example color of the base object it will be stored in the inherited report If you then try to change the color of this object in a base report this setting will be ignored in the inherited one For example open the inherited report change the our company object s color to red Save the report Now open the base report and set the color to green for company If you open the inherited report now you will see the color is still red So if you want to change some property of object with lock sign it 1s preferred to do in the base report Let s finish with our report All we have to do 1 add a page header and master data 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 380 ReportTitle 1 Our company 4 L E 4 Gur email emaili amp erail c om L d PageHeader PageHeader1 Custom er Phone Customers Company Customers Phone The report is ready 9 1 12 2 Changing a base report Changing a base report Top Let s look at situation when you need to change a base report Open the base report base fr3 in our example and change necessary fields Let s modify the
249. ill be performed in the step 4 This can be performed either by the OnAfterCalcHeight event in the step 5 or the OnAfterPrint event in step 8 but in the latter event a band will already have been output so any modification of objects will not have any effect One should clearly understand where and when bands are output and the timing firing order of each of their events as well as those of objects contained in the band 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 289 9 1 6 10 Example of using the OnBeforePrint event Example of using the OnBeforePrint event To demonstrate create a report which represents the list of clients This report will include only those companies whose names begin with the letter A Let us create a new project in Delphi put the TTable TfrxDBDataSet IIfrxReport components to the form and set them Tablel DatabaseName DBDEMOS TableName customer db frxDBDataSetl DataSet Tablel UserName Customers Enter the report s editor and create a report of the following type Custamers Company Customers Addrl Select the data band and switch to the Events page tab in the objects inspector MasterDatal TFrxMaskterData Properties Events OnAfEerPrink OnBeForePrint OnMasterDete To create the OnBeforePrint event s handler this is exactly what would be most appropriate to us double click on the b
250. inds Stan Timer End 2 iraphinto EndTime TIS lt generaed Date Time ATMS usus te aecenas Bh STORAGETYPE COLUMNNAME DATETIME B UNIT SHORT CURVAL Sh COLOR zh CURWALZ IMDEXLEVEL Sh INDEXI INDEX Bh INDEXS INDEX4 Eh INDEXS Gb ISAcTIVE Gh CAPTION B MODULECAPTION Ge APT E Picture object e 1 of 5 The page number is a also a sum of fields of a text field 1 the variable Page 5 the variable TotoaloPages 0j 75 2 7 343 v db 7 13 0 151 1 amp dd d amp a 32D a R Dats variables micans i s 1 variables Ted Bey rix wariables 1 T T 1 Dake 50160 Diagrams T Tire Location 7 Legend MODULECAF TOW Page Start page STartTimg End EndTime TotaPages generated Trims gt Sign abure aa EDD 2 TobalPagesa 2 Lite D B Liet Picture object 000 The logo is a simple bmp file and be imported with the help of the button on the left side 6 3 2 Generating Tables A table as the following shall be generated 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 147 Channel I rms L1 I rms Le rms L3 U L1 THO lU L2 THO LU L3 Fit L1 Fit L2 L3 ug 1 Frequency 9 Hz
251. ing conr field s type compatibility is verified It is impossible to create joins between incompatible fields F parameter settings place the cursor on the join line right click and select Options item The join para window appears where you can set the required values See the illustration below 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 393 Link Options Table 1 customer Column 1 CustNo Table 2 orders Column 2 CustNao Join Operator Join Inner CO Left Outer Right Outer Pza Full Outer 9 1 13 5 1 Query constructor usage Query constructor usage Build a simple report using the query constructor Click New report on designer toolbar report page with Report heading First level data footer bands is created Put the ADO Query component on the Data page Double click on component and you will see query editor window Click 93 button in sql editor and you will see the query constructor window Select Customer table in the table list 3 and drag it to work area or can double click on it Mark CustNo Company and Phone fields 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 394 Ld Fast Query Builder Designer SQL Result EE customer c m CustMo Float Company widestring Addr Widestring Addr WideString City WideString State WideString zip Widestring Country wide string Phone
252. int template to generate a report 5 4 1 2 Step 2 Sub Graph Definition Also the FFT diagram can have more sub graphs For further details please see chapter RMS diagram FFT Setup Step 2 Caption START 100 Add sub graph Edit sub graph Delete sub graph lt lt Back Finish Cancel 5 4 1 3 Step 3 Sub Graph Channels The channels to be shown in the different sub graphs can be added in this step 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 74 FFT Setup Step 3 E3 Sub graph data Lett axis Visible Log Min amp uto 0 100 Auto Va 100 000 COL ARIS SH RTDESC FISEDTODEYVIC LOGIC4SLOAPTION MODULECAPTION Delete Channel Edit Channel Add channel Click Add channel select the wanted value only fundamentals are shown and set the properties afterwards Series Eigenschaften Short L12 H1 Storage Color clellow Co Min Displaytormat 90 000 C Fixed ta device Module 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 75 Finish the setup procedure and the new FFT set up is available the visualization list 5 4 2 Starting an FFT Spectrum Setup By selecting the setup in the visualization list and double clicking on it the setup will be started As in the diagrams the module selector will come up if it was set up The following picture shows a typical FFT spectra window 5 4 2 1 The Spectra V
253. istrator INSTSTATUS RUNNING DEWESott is started and measurement and storing is activated READY DEWESott is started in SETUP mode measurement is stoped OFFLINE no network connection between server and measurement instrument moving back Export exporting the measured data to Excel copying the data Refresh List updating the list of instruments 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 163 autorefresh the data are uploaded as soon as the status of one instrument changes Contig X Reset State connecting to the measurement instrument online setting the status to maintenance by using the button set state to maintenance below Using this function the e mail notification is suppressed for this instrument Restart Instr restarting the selected fault recorder Restart all restarting all fault recorders d Upload Setup uploading only DEWESoft setup Upload Extras uploading some extras word export setup exporting DEWESOft setup from the measurement instrument onto the computer Logical Channels Logical channels are predefined measured variables These variables will be defined in DEWESoft You can classify the measurement instrument and the measurement values In PMT it is possible to make an Excel export of the list 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration 164 050 Insert Apply Cancel Configuration LOGCHACO
254. isualization In this window the harmonics are shown as bar graphs As listed before zooming in and out are available If limits have been selected they will be shown as red lines 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 76 50160 FFT UM Webling IKES 206 ENS0160 FFT UMW Webling IKEA 20k Start Page 5 4 2 2 The FFT Legend The legend shows brief information on the channels In the first row you can immediately see whether all limits correlate with the standard only if this function was selected in the setup green within the limits red 2 beyond limits UMIT STORAGET 151 V AMG AMG AMG 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 77 5 4 2 3 The Navigation Bar The functions are the same as already described in the RMS diagram view lt 4 Prin Report gt lt gt Change Axes CP BBB Export Graph 22 12 2008 13 58 28 29 12 2008 13 58 28 RelH1 95 95 LIM flagged Print Back Forward Load Legend in chart Report 2 Copy Legend 5 4 2 3 1 The List of Values Depending on the selected value in the legend list the pending data are shown in this list 1 100 000 100 823 100 000 1 0 052 0 098 2 000 Y 3 0 203 0 273 6 000 Y 4 0 012 0 034 1 000 Y 5 0 672 1 187 6 000 Y B 0 010 0 023 0 500 Y T 442 D 5 31 5 DDD Y o 0 009 0 019 0 500 Y 0 068 0 089 1 500 10 0 009 0 016 0 500 Y 11
255. itching to this tab the designer appears as follows 4 FastReport 100 fr3 File Edit Report View Help We Code a Report a ig Data 0 153 ADOT ablet ES ADOTable ADD a Pagel Memo EE gt G gt Pagel ThrsReportPage Properties Events BackPicture ot assigned BottomMargin 1 Color Columns Dataset Duplex B clNone 0 Mok assigned dmMane EndlessHeight _ False Endlesswidth False Hl Font TFant A Frame TFrxFrame LargeDesignHi False LeftMargin 1 MirrarMargins L False IK ERU EB Name Pagel Orientation Qubline Text poPortrait BackPicture The background page picture Centimeters i2 1 SIE a I T Language PascalScript E Ig begin end Ba DT Month not accessible StartDay not accessible 5 Pagel E 4 94 1111 ul m m _ 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 280 In the illustration above the figures denote 1 Code tab 2 script s editor window 3 a dropdown for selecting a language in which the script is to be written 4 debugger s toolbar run report in debugging mode F9 gt run to cursor F4 perform the regular code line Step into F7 interru
256. just increase a cell width a little 9 1 7 7 Font colors and highlighting Font colors and highlighting Top Sometimes it is necessary to highlight values and or change font color We have examined such a task in the group report example Where we used conditional highlighting for the Text object this can be useful for us now as well To add highlighting using our example assume that we need to change font color for the values which are more than 3000 Click on the object representing the table cell To set highlighting parameters click on the 7 button in the toolbar The already familiar highlighting editor window will open where one can set the following condition 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 327 Value gt 3000 and the font color to red Name Len Monih Total Total Tea 0 ol Highlight Condition Value gt 3000 Font Bold Italic Underline Background Transparent CO Other Color This is all we need Close the editor by clicking on the OK button and preview our report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 328 1999 2000 a for 1999 for 2000 Am 11001200 3300 r300 1400 Bm 2400 Catherine ssi 5 320 0m se s Grand Total 1000 5100 6400 1200 13700 5295 3800 3200 12299 In the same way a user is able to hig
257. l have its own scales and axes of course but the same time axis All values of all sub graphs will be available in the legend of course RMS Setup Step 2 List of Subgraphs Caption START Add sub graph Edit sub graph Delete sub graph 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 61 Click add in order to add sub graph 5 2 7 3 Step 3 Sub Graph Settings RMS Setup Step 3 Sub graph data Caption Start 1 5 100 7 T Lett axis Right axis Wisible Visible Log Min Auto 0 000 Min Max Auto 0 000 SHORTDESC IRMSTYPE FIXEDTODEVIC LOGICALCAPTION MODULECAPTION 15 Delete Channel Edit Channel Add channel Add math Cancel E sub graph data general properties Caption title of the sub graph as it will be shown on the left side of the diagram Start upper border in the window End lower border in the window Left Axis Right axis properties of the axis Visible to switch on and off the diagram axes Log logarithmic scale if necessary Min Max Auto automatic range selection for the minimum maximum value Min Max Value if not defined as auto minimal and maximal values can be defined for the upper lower border scale Add Channel to add a channel see next steps Edit Channel to change the properties of the selected channel of the graph Delete Channel to delete the
258. l0OnBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin Value it s a current cell s value if Value lt 100 then begin first shape object DBCrosslObjectl Color second shape object clMaroon red DBCrosslObject2 Color clWhite third shape object DBCrosslObject3 Color clWhite end else if Value lt 3000 then begin DBCrosslObjectl Color 00CCFF yellow DBCrosslObJject2 Color gt DBCrosslObject3 Color clWhite end 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 339 else begin DBCrosslObject1 Color 00CC98 green DBCrosslObjectz2 Color 9000098 DBCrosslObJject2 Color 20020295 That s all run our report and will see the same picture as at the beginning of this chapter 9 1 7 12 Some useful settings Some useful settings Top Let s look at some settings available in the cross table editor Show title Show corner Column header Row header Column grand total Row grand total Auto size Border around cells Print down then across Reprint headers on new page Side by side cells Join equal cells First six options allow you to show or hide some table elements The Auto size option is already familiar It allows us to set table width and height manually The Border around cells option allows drawing a frame around cell elements Here 1s example of such table note that cells itself don t have a frame 2010 DEWETRON Gm
259. lOnBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin Outline LevelRoot Outline AddItem lt Group Company gt end procedure MasterDatalOnBeforePrint Sender TfrxComponent begin Outline AddItem Group OrderNo Outline LevelUp end begin end C Script void GroupHeaderlOnBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender Outline LevelRoot Outline AddItem Group Company void MasterDatalOnBeforePrint TfrxComponent Sender Outline AddItem Group OrderNo Outline LevelUp 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 308 Preview the report to make sure that it works in the same way as the previous report where the tree was formed automatically Let us examine how a tree 1s formed The Outline AddItem method adds a child block to the current tree block and then makes the child block a current one Thus if AddItem were called several times in row we would obtain a ladder as shown below Item2 Item3 The LevelUp and LevelRoot Outline methods are used for controlling the current element The first one moves the cursor to the element which 1s located on a higher level Thus the script Outline AddItem Iteml1 Outline AddItem Item2 Outline AddItem Item3 Outline LevelUp Outline AddItem Item4 constructs a tree like this Item 2 Item3 Item4 This means that Item4 will be a child element in relation to the
260. lank field to the right of the event s name 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 290 MasterDatal ThrxMasterData Properties Events OnAfEercalcHi OnAfterPrink OnBefarePrink OnMasterDete At same time a blank handler is added to the script s text and the designer switches to the Code page Language PascalScript gt procedure MasterDatalOnbetforePrint Sender TfrxcComponent begin end begin end The only thing we should do after that is to write the following code in the handler s body PascalScript if lt Customers Company gt 1 1 then MasterDatal Visible True else MasterDatal Visible False C Script if Copy lt Customers Company gt 1 1 A MasterDatal Visible true else MasterDatal Visible false Run the report and make sure that the script works correctly 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 291 Action Club Michael Spurling o13 6 0 0254 Action Over Supply Marianne Miles 22 44 5002 1 1 Adventure Undersea Gloria Gonzales 011 34 09054 American S CUBA Supply Lynn Cinciripini 213 654 0092 Aquatic Drama Gillian Owen 512 44 7554 Let us explain several details You can assign one handler to several events of different objects at once in this case the Sender parameter defines the object which has initiated the event To assign
261. late the situation using our example let us reduce the Bio Common Name object width to 2 5 cm and enable the Stretch option for it Let us also enable stretching in the First level data band Enable all the frame lines in all objects so that the principle of the stretching function will become clear This will output a report with the following appearance 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 247 Triggerfish Cow Tragertish Cm c cm Red Empero F ength cm You see that in the first case the first object contains longer text and this is why it was stretched into two lines Thus the object located underneath it and linked to the Bio Length cm field was shifted down This happens because all the objects have the Shift property enabled by default ShiftMode smAlways in the object inspector Such objects shift downwards if there 1 a stretchable object above them a Text object with the Stretch property enabled The height value by which the object shifts depends on how the object from above 1 stretched However it 1s unacceptable in this case since we need the object with the Length cm text to be shifted as well To perform this there 1 a special band type in FastReport the Child band It is linked to and is displayed after it s parent band Add a Child band to our reports design layout and move the 2 Text objects into it umber
262. let us create a new text object and put two lines into it This is a very very very long text line And this is another line the shorter one Let us enable the object frame and then resize the object up to 9x3 cm with the help of the mouse We see that the object can display not only a single line of text but several lines as well Now let us reduce the object width up to 5cm It is obvious that long lines did not find room in the object and therefore were wrapped This happens due to the WordWrap object property If it is disabled either in inspector or the object context menu the long lines will be simply cut off Now let s check how the text alignment inside the object works Alignment buttons are located in the Text toolbar and allows one to set horizontal or vertical text alignment Pay attention to the Block Align button this button let s you align the paragraph on both object edges To do this the WordWrap property option must be enabled This is a very very very long This is a very very very long This is a very very very lang text line text line text line And this is another line the And this is another line the And this is another line the shorter ana shorter ane shorter ane This 15 very very very long text line And this another line the tet i shorter one Ext TE And this 15 another line the avery very very long shorter one Em And this is another line t
263. licking on a tree s element executes jumping to the report s output page which is associated to the tree s element It is not necessary to use the script for operating with the Outline since some bands have a mechanism which enables automatic forming of a tree Let us examine two examples of how the Outline can be used with the help of bands and the script 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 306 Almost all bands have the OutlineText property into which a text expression can be entered and this in turn helps to automatically create a tree The expression will be calculated when forming a report and its value will be added to the tree when printing the band Thus elemental hierarchy in the tree is similar to the bands hierarchy in a report That means that in the tree there will be main and subordinate elements corresponding to main and subordinate bands in a report a report with two levels of data or with groups can exemplify the point We will illustrate operating with a tree using our previous example of the report with groups GroupHeader GroupHeader1 Group Group OrderNo Group saleD ate Specify a value for the GroupHeaderl OutlineText band s property as Group Company make the tree be displayed automatically as soon as the preview window opens one should set the Report PreviewOptions OutlineVisible property True When previewing the report you
264. ll as unconfirmed Auto refresh The list will be actualized every few seconds X axis as time axis To show the time axis as absolute time otherwise relative time will be used 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 98 Trigger Types to define which types of triggers shall be shown see also PWR DB Plugin Manual Cross Trigger general trigger Fast Trigger frequency form trigger Slow Trigger RMS shape trigger Event Trigger only the time of the trigger Button List template to define the layout of the report list Button Graph template to define the layout of the diagram reports waveform Then switch to the next page called Filter ag Trigger 2 5etup 5 Module Sicha Module Switches Ache Setup H valid lor the groups below Capiki Decenphon A DEWETAON Group Remove Group List Template Graph Template OK Cancel Active If this checkbox is highlighted you are asked for which power module you want to run the evaluation If it is not highlighted the diagram channels will already be selected in the setup together with the source power module Add Group to add a power module or group Remove Group to delete a power module or a group Print Template to generate a report 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 99 5 7 2 The Transient Lists After loading the list the window looks as follows General Visualisati
265. ll frame lines in every object 90020 Clown Triggerfish 90030 Red Emperor BO 2 90050 90070 Blue Angelfish 90080 Lunartail Rockcod BO The next type of framing would display only horizontal or only vertical lines Such framing is performed in exactly the same way Horizontal or vertical frames can be enabled in objects 900 20 Clown Triggertish 50 900350 Red Emperor 90050 Giant Wrasse 229 aud Blue Angelfish 30 90080 Lunartail Rackcad aL Finally to show only the external framing the report needs to be slightly modified PageHeader PageHeader1 r Bio Specie Bio Common Bio Length ReportSummary ReportSummary1 L d As you can see we have added two Text objects 1 pageheader and 1 in pagefooter bands and enabled frame lines for the objects along the edges of the data band As a result the report will look as follows 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 243 90020 Clown Triggertish 50 90050 Red Emperor BU 90050 Giant Maori Wrasse 229 aui Blue Angelfish 30 90080 Lunartail Rockcod ou 90090 Firefish ja All examples covered contained bands which had fixed sizes But how 1 it possible to display a table in a case where the band 1 stretched Let us explain that using the example below Add a new field a multi lined text from Bio Notes to our report As you already learned the Stretch property must be enabled both for this object and for the ba
266. long edges JPEG quality JPEG file compression ratio Option is enabled only on exporting to JPEG format Resolution output graphic presentation resolution Export peculiarities on exporting several pages to one file on disabled Separate files option it is necessary to remember large resources capacity of export 9 1 14 6 Sending a Report via E mail Sending a Report via E mail Top FastReport allows sending a ready report by e mail in any format you need You do not need any additional programs to send mail On selecting export by e mail the dialogue box for setup of message and exporting format parameters appears Before export forming and sending via e mail it is necessary to set parameters of mail box owner All these parameters are on the Account page tab 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 415 Send by E mail E mail Account From Mike Smith Fram Address mikem hotmail com Organization Signature Best regards E Connection Hast smtp hotmail corn Part Login Password Cancel From Name sender s name From Address sender s e mail Organization sender s organization Signature signature for mail It may be automatically formed on clicking on Build button on condition that the earlier examined fields are filled Host SMTP server port Port SMTP server port Login access
267. ls Print down then across Reprint headers on new page L Side by side cells Join equal cells cance As be seen the editor shows structure of output table in dot matrix mode Cross cells style can via using Tt button in the toolbar In all other respects working does not differ from the one described The previewed report will appear in the following way on the screen 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 355 2100 1500 1600 wp o efon sen to aos oo sem 000 9 1 9 2 Dot matrix reports printing Dot matrix reports printing Top To print a dot matrix report in text mode 1 e with maximum speed it 1s required to put TfrxDotMatrix Export component on your project form from FastReport 3 0 component palette This component is charged with report converting to text form and further printing in text mode At the same time it replaces standard printing dialogue Printer ag Canon 4200 v Escape commands Copies IEM Generic Number of copies Pages Options All Print to File Current page Page breaks Ores oe codepage Enter page numbers and or page ranges Pseudographic separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Printing dialogue resembles a standard one but dot matrix printer specifics are added here So it 1s necessary to select system of printer commands before printing ESC commands The following
268. me time you have to create a new module group and add all instruments you would like to evaluate to this group In the setup of the report you choose this group under the menu module switcher add it to the list and deactivate the checkbox active 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 128 Modul Switcher Aktiy Caption Description gi DEWETRON Druckvorlage After starting the report for the next time you obtain a list with all measurement points 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 129 4 Jo Allgemein Visualisierung mMm Y2 4 4 07 02 2009 13 36 58 10 03 2009 13 36 58 Drucke Kopieren Speichern Laden Report Datei Daten Navigation n VEDE Demo Visualisierungen Demo Demo Startseite 3 Root SU s CE Demo Reports aures 5 SEE MERE EOE OTS EE e Standards ORT Zweck UN START ENDE SK3POL VERWENDUIF UMIN UMAX H3MAX 3095 HSMAX 5095 Tests DEWE Graz 2304 230 07 02 2009 13 36 58 10 03 2009 13 36 58 215 14 238 44 1 31 1 14 2222 DEWE Graz 20kV 11 500 07 02 2009 13 36 58 10 03 2009 13 36 58 10 635 98 11 773 37 1 3 1 14 1 69 L m 5548 Dewe Graz 230 single phase 230 07 02 2009 13 36 58 10 03 2009 13 36 58 5 12 4 Parameters of the VEO Report Headerinformationen ORT Name der Messstelle Zweck Zweck der Messung
269. measuring instrument in the database ATTENTION This number is unique and is assigned to the instrument which is integrated in the database Instrument name name which identifies the instrument in the database Language the language which the part db plugin should use Enable test plan processing activates the query of name and location when starting the measurement This option is recommended when using portable systems when measurements are often done on various locations When using permanent installations this field should be deactivated Enable SNMP service SNMP is sometimes used in permanent installations for checking the instrument hardware but also for receiving disturbances In this case the option must be activated ATTENTION Additional driver units are in this case necessary and must be registered in the system Field Storing defines the settings of the storing data Outbox path the path on the hard disk on which the data are stored before they are transferred to the database Slow trigger buffer size the value in kB which defines the internal data buffer for slow disturbance recordings These are among other things defined on the page alarm events and listed as slow If no slow disturbances are recorded this should read 1 as otherwise only storage capacity would be wasted Backup time d Additionally to the storage on the database the data can also be buffered on the local storage medium This is rea
270. ment has to be defined as well It is hence possible to define which user group receives which alarm from which instrument Each alarm code belongs to a certain group This is also necessary for later evaluation not used for e mails O 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Other TMODULEINFO 9 MODTNFID IMSIMF IMSIMFID THOES 1 2 HFTASLIEAT ICI H START LOWPERCERT ASE STO PLO WPRERCERNTAGE STARTHDGHPERCENT GE STOP HIGHPERCEHTAE HUG FUSERS WOT DELIV EREDEWERGY MC PTA ETAGE Au PETEIGAGER amp LARHID IMSIMF IMSIMFI ALAR PTHDES ALACO D ALSTARTTIFIE GFT ALEMOTIFIE COMFIRHM CL HFIRHITIME CAFTICH FIEALIR EFIEHTIL DLILETHD ES TALARMCODE ALACODID DICT CAPTICHH 186 C NFIR FESFIT TUSERGROUP TALACOD_USEGRO_MNM ALACOD ALACCO DEFALILTVTSSET LIP VTSSET LIFID LESBEGRO LS BSAROIC LREACCID CAFTICHH LESER LISEGPEOTD DESCRIPTIGOM IMSIMF THSIMFID CAFTICH TUSEACC_USEGRO_NM SEADE USEACCID IMSIMHD P ERO LAEGROID IMSTHAFIE IPADDRESS PHO HEHP TUSERACCOUNT 2 IMSTSTATLA ISTOJ HFIGLIEATIC USER LICIH FLILLMA RIE ISACTIVE PASSI E55 LA KS Liu GROOT LA MALUIASEFILE 8 2 5 Language Text is defined in the table TDicto
271. multi column reports printing The current settings are displayed in the designer The Print to previous page flag allows you to print pages beginning from blank space of the previous page This option can be used in case when a report template consists of several pages or when printing batch composite reports The Mirror margins option switches right and left margins of page for even pages during previewing or printing a report The Endless page width amp height option increases page s sizes depending on number of data records on the page when running a report In this case you will see one big page in the preview window instead of several standard size pages The Large height in design mode option increases page s height several times more This feature can be useful if many bands are located in the page and must be used when working with the overlay band This only effects the page height in design mode 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 215 9 1 2 Creating reports Creating reports 9 1 2 1 Report objects Report objects Top A blank report in FastReport is presented as a paper page At any place on the page a user is able to add objects which can display different information such as text and or graphics as well as to define report s appearance Let us describe briefly the assignment of the FastReport objects which are included in the standard package Band object allows cre
272. n kit Let us create a new project in Delphi Put the T Table component on the form and set its properties DatabaseName DBDEMOS TableName Customer db make the table s data available to FastReport We add a TfrxDBDataSet component and then set its property DataSet Table Finally add a TfrxReport the basic component of FastReport on the form open the designer and click the New report button so that FastReport will automatically create a basic design with three bands Report title Master data and Page footer make our table useable FastReport we must allow it to be used To do this select the Report Data menu item and select frxDBDatasetl it is the only dataset in the list at the moment then click ok After the dialog window closes the Dataset and the fields of the table to which it is connected become visible in the Data service pane window Now let s create the report First add a Text object with the List of clients text to the Report title band Next we connect the Master data band to our dataset This can done in one of three ways double click on the band 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 225 select the Edit item in the band contextual menu click on the DataSet property in the object inspector Now we will place four text objects which will display a client s number a customer name phone
273. nally you can choose whether you would like to select the grouping according to the frequency bands In that case you have to select start frequency end frequency and the width of the bands in Hz As is the case in the usual FFT diagram you can also list the specification limits with which the lines are compared The testing of the limit value is only activated when you select Grouped as display form for the FFT 5 5 1 1 2 Settings Sub Graph The FFT diagram can also have several sub graphs for more detailed information see RMS diagram O 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 86 FFT Setup Step 2 E3 Caption oltage Edit sub graph Delete sub graph 5 5 1 1 3 Sub Graph Channel Channels can be displayed in various sub graphs by using the following setting options 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 87 FFT Setup Step 3 5 Sub graph data Canton Stet 07 End Lett axis Visible Log O Hin Auto Wal 0 000 Auto Wal 0 000 COL ARIS SHORTDESC FlesEODTODEYVIC LOGICALCAPTION MODULECAPTION ave as O Delete Channel Edit Channel Add channel Click Add channel and choose the required value only fundamentals are shown and the settings Series Eigenschaften Short U L1 H l Storage Color chellow C3 Min D isplaufermat 90 000
274. nary whereas the language code depends on the language 1 English 2 German The language code is set in the user setup where each user can choose their own language TDICTIONARY DICTIOID LANGUAGECODE TERTVALLIE 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 187 8 2 6 Instrument Channels TMEASUREMENTCHANNEL TLOGICAL CHANNEL Column Name Data Type Allow Nulls Column Name Data Type Allow Nulls DEWECAPTION varchar 255 LOGCHACODE char 12 LOGICALNAME char 12 CAPTION varchar 64 LOGICALINDEX bigint DESCRIPTION varchar 255 TAG int DEFALILTCOLOR int INDEXLEVEL int UNITSTR varchar 5 INDEX1 int INDEX2 int INDEX3 int INDEX4 int INDEX5 int DEWEUNIT varchar 50 MEASUREMENT MEAS bigint TMEASUREMENT INSINF INSINFID STARTTIME GMTSTART MCOMMENT F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 MEASUREMENTID 1 ES 3 IS 1 E 0000000000000 TINSTRUMENTINEO TMEASUREMENTITEM TMODULEINFO 0 MEASROWID MODINFID LOGCHACODE INSTNAME INSINF INSINFID MINVAL IPADDRESS INDEX1 MAXVAL PHONENR INDEX2 AVGVAL INSTSTATUS CAPTION RMSVAL INSTCONFIGURATION MODCONFIGURATION STARTLOWPERCENTAGE STOPLOWPERCENTAGE STARTHIGHPERCENTAGE STOPHIGHPERCENTAGE TMEASUREMENTROW NUMOFUSERS 9 MEASROWID NOTDELIVEREDENERGY MEASLREMENTID NOMINALVOLTAGE MODINFID SLOPETRIGGER MTIME SLOPETIME GMT DEFALILTVISSETUP VISSETU USEGROU_USEGROID USEACC_USEACCID ACCR
275. nd in which the object 1s located In this case the band height 1s sized depending on size of the text in the Text object Thus we would output a report which appears like this exeo Cw Trigg enrich 5o known 25 the big spotted iriggedizh Inhabit outer re areas anddeedgupon cruziaceans and malluszie by crust ng them vath They woragous ates and divans the clown t ggerksh devour bedz of pea outed Dro not eatihis teh According to an 1878 account the pitoi act prenandy upon ihe tinue of the stomach wiolentspanms of that organ and shorty acteneards all He murdes of fie body The frome becomes rocked oath spasma tie longue thickened the fed the breathing laborious and the patient i aparoxyrm af atram Not edible Ranae tindd Facti e and Bart Amica b Somos RedEmpen 0 Calledzeaperch in Australi Inhabizthe areas amund lagoon comi reet and sandy bottoms It is a little bit different from what we need one would prefer the frames of the neighboring objects to be able to stretch as well FastReport allows one to solve this problem easily For constructing such reports it 1 enough to enable the Stretch downwards property StretchMode smMaxHeight in the object inspector for all objects which are to be stretched Thus the FastReport core first calculates the maximum band height then it s
276. nds 5 10 2 The DISDIP Statistics The following window itself shows the statistics in a table as well as in a graph PMT 3 File Visualisations Tools Help N 6 5 27 08 2007 11 47 04 27 09 2007 11 47 04 amp 2 Edit Chart Visualisations EN50 160 DISDIP 5000power ENSO160 DISDIP 5000 Start Page DISDIP ENSO160Star 50160 C3 501600 0 01 gt 0 DURATION 01 0 0 01 02 0 01 0 1 03 0 1 1 04 1 10 05 10 100 06 100 1000 coo O O Oo oo o o o ooo 5 Ne O v 3 0 36 409 Administrator Table shows the number of events which happened in the range of voltage and duration Graph the table as a 3D bar diagram With a click on edit chart it is possible to edit the chart settings 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 123 3 Editing Chart Chart 3D Options Views 3 Dimensions Zoom sp x 50 H Rotation Orthogonal Elevation esol ange Horiz Offset Clip Paints Vert Offset Perspect Zoom Text 100 5 11 The module is an additional module for evaluating events Every event is displayed continuously The module CBEMA was created t
277. ne to color an object according to a specified condition Any expression can be a condition We ll use the example with groups to demonstrate Let the order totals which are larger than 5000 be green colored Select the object with the Group ItemsTotal field and click on the Conditional highlighting w button in the designer toolbar In the conditional highlight editor enter a condition which after the value is exceeded the object will be highlighted and specify the color attributes to change font parameters and background color Highlight Condition value gt 5000 4 Font Bold Italic m L Underline Background Transparent A Color other eee The preview result will appear as follows 1023 01 07 88 4 67400 1076 16 12 94 47 781 00 1123 24 08 93 813 945 00 1159 06 07 94 88 47185 117B 25 07 94 4 178 85 1269 16 12 94 1 40000 Total 51 450 80 Note the conditional expression we specified Value gt 5000 Value is the DB field value to which the object is linked In a similar way the lt Group ItemsTotal gt gt 5000 condition may be set In general any expression which is correct in terms of FastReport may be specified here 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 274 9 1 4 4 Alternate color every other data row Alternate color every other data row Using conditional highlighting it is easy to create a report having this appearance
278. neral Visualisation Print Prin 28 12 2008 11 46 58 29 12 2008 11 46 58 Export Graph Reportin Back RAW flagge Forward Load to Clipboard RAW Flagged ET File Legend in Chart Reset Marker 9 Marks chart axes S auto refresh n active Trigger 1 Points Edit Setup T Active Trigger 2 edi Data n 50160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20 nx EN50160 Diagram UW Webling IKEA 20 Start Page Navigation H Root Demo Reports H Standards Harmonics Events 50160 EN50160 Cj Berichte Leittechnik Show harmonics DEFAU LOGICALCAPTION UNITS DESCRIP 7 50160 EN50160 Diagram 50160 DISDIP 50160 Events EN50160 FFT gt Frequency Hid hibalance F licker Pit THD 28 12 2008 12 00 28 12 2008 18 00 29 12 2008 00 00 29 12 2008 06 00 2 m c Pee FSP PPP a gt gt gt gt gt STORAGET DATETIME OF CURVAL DATETIME OF MARK DISPLAYFORMAT MED STDDEV Mop 2 20 762 24 10852 2097903 2 4 440 00 1 09 0 30 0 56 EN 2 8880 00 1 10 0 31 0 54 Ww 2 0 00 1 11 0 33 0 51 B Piper W 4 440 0 01 f 2 0 00 0 03 00 0 02 EN Pp HD i T 2 4 440 00 0 03 0 02 0 02 EN P pe Ww
279. ng 110k UW Zwaring UM1 110k UW Zwaring UM1 110k UW Pirka UM1 20k UW Leibnitz SSB UW Leibnitz SSB UW Leibnitz UM3 UW Leibnitz UM3 UW Leibnitz SSA UW Webling 134 14 110k UW Webling IKEA 20k UW Webling 134 1B 110k UW Webling 134 14 110k UW Webling 134 1B 110k UW Zwaring UM2 110kV UW Zwaring 110k UW Zwaring UM1 110k UW Zwaring UM1 110k UW 2 110 FULLNAME A M amp MODULECAPTION name of the power module CAPTION caption and name of the alarm ALARMINDEX index of the alarm ALARMSTARTTIME beginning of the alarm ALARMSTOPTIME end of the alarm GMT offset to GMT CONFIRMTIME time of alarm confirmation MEASUREMENTID ID of the measurement CHANNELCOUNT number of channels stored in relation with this alarm 5 6 2 1 The Navigation Bar Excel Export Print Previous 205 Reload Bua Refresh E Confirm 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 95 Reporting Excel Export E Contirm ScrollForward L Reload c Auto refresh prints the report for this alarm list if it was generated in the setup exports it to MS
280. ng a Report For a Visualization Element 2 2 1 139 2 Comprehensive Reports For Several Visualization Elements 142 3 General Functions In Reports 145 Dp ec E E E E A 145 Generatng 146 148 iiie t 150 Part VII Configuration 151 T General MEC 151 PN ANIA OS E E 151 MoOdUIeS AT ER ESA A EO AE E ER 154 Importing 155 157 159 Groups of Instruments INI eio 160 Status or InstFUrents eee 161 Eogical Channels 163 Software Connora Ol 164 e uiesiuemeue 165 Elements 166 Language ie 168 Table AL
281. ng maximum resemblance between the result and original report A large number of cross objects report design leads to an increased number of columns and lines in the resulting table This leads to the need to edit the resulting file in its own editor for further use For example on report design a slight crossing of two objects placed one under another on the same band The number of records on report forming was 150 On export to RTF format 450 lines will be created 150 lines for each object and 150 ones for crossing If we remove crossing there will be already 300 lines In large reports and on huge number of objects the difference will be really tremendous That of course will affect output file size 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 418 Objects the report Export to Excel result Remember that during designing if you want to export your reports in any table format On creating tables in report keep an eye on neighboring cell s borders to adjoin each other It is important that cells do not cross and arrange in layers Export filter algorithm will cut off cells but export result may be far from desirable you will see not exactly what you wanted to Arrange objects in such a way that they are placed in line vertically as well as horizontally Guidelines can help to perform this Li gt EG goa Fe shadow 1 4 Using guidelines in the designer To use guidelines in FastRepo
282. nnungsband 73 606 UWY Leibnitz D 177 93 370 398 0 200000 wv 6 1500 Spannungsband 849 606 UW Leibnitz 0 078 14 484 646 0 40000 6 1500 Spannungsband 72 4 606 UW Leibnitz 0 071 15 565 156 0 40000 6 1500 Spannungsband 77 8 606 UW Leibniz 0 153 17565592 0 40000 v 6 1500 Spannungsband 88 3 G01 UW Webling 0 068 1 921 952 0 200000 v 1 1500 Spannungsband 745 601 UW Webing 0074 8167720 o 200000 v 1 1500 Spannungsband 743 v 4 0 80 619 Administrator 1 5 9 2 1 The Navigation Bar The navigation bar of the event list module looks as following 2 PA Export To Excel 2 Copy Table Se ale pre Print Bae Back Forward Load Show Event Show Report Print List Graph Transient Print Report printing the report Wi Export To Excel exporting the list to MS Excel Load time selection Table copying the table 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 117 Show Transient showing the visualization of the transient 5 9 2 2 RMS Data With a double click on the list you see the following visualization 4 Edit chart axis 3 Marks Reset Marker Close Transient Devicename Phase Duration Valid FEVTID FAUL TIME HEIGHT 718 5000 Liper 0 317000 7 Nominal voltage remmen Not del energy Num of Users RMS Data Click on edit chart
283. ntered Edit1 Text Preview the report and make sure that the parameter you entered is successfully displayed in the report You can address other objects of the dialogue form In the same way Since each object has a name which 1 unique within the whole report it can be used anywhere within the report 9 1 10 4 Interaction of controls Interaction of controls Top By using script you can easily create logic for the dialogue form s work for example its controls interaction Let us illustrate this by a simple example Modify the form in the following way Double click on the object so that the OnClick event handle would be created and then write the following script PascalScript procedure CheckBoxlOnClick Sender TfrxComponent begin Buttonl Enabled not CheckBoxl Checkeg end 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 362 C Script void CheckBoxlOnClick TfrxComponent Sender Buttonl Enabled CheckBoxl Checked As you can see code does not differ much from what we use in Delphi When running the report you would see that the button responds to the flag condition s modification 9 1 10 5 Several dialogue forms Several dialogue forms Top Let us examine how report with two dialogue forms works Create a report with two dialogues and one design page Name Edit Text Child name Edit2 Text Child2 name Edit3 Text
284. nto output table As text all objects are transferred into table diagram as text ones This option may be useful when transferring numeric fields with complicated formatting Fast export usage of optimized fast data transferring to Excel This option disabling slows down data transferring but increases export compatibility on any errors during data transferring Merge cells cells integration in resulting table diagram for achieving maximum correspondence to the original Disabling increases exporting but reduces document appearance WYSIWYG full compliance to report appearance On this option disabling the optimization for reducing the number of lines and columns in resulting table is performed Background export of filling color assigned to report page 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 409 Page breaks includes page breaks in Excel Open Excel after export resulting file will be opened right after exporting into Excel Export peculiarities Excel program must be installed on your PC RichText objects are transferred as simple text graphic 1mages transference 1s supported 9 1 14 5 5 Export to XML Format Export to XML Format Top XML Extensible Markup Language is expansible marking language XML 1 intended for structured data storage and also for information interchange between different programs FastReport uses XML format for data transferring into Excel table di
285. nts and MS SQL Server Express on your computer it can happen that some windows components need to get updatet Custom you can decide yourself which components you want to install You have the options listed in the following screenshot 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 2 2 60 Setup Welcome to Please select your installation method J POWERSHELL v WINDOW SINSTALLER E SQLNATCL SQLCMDUTIL SQLEXPRESS2008ENG SQLDBIMPORT DEWESOFT 7 DB Plugin 7 Wind Plugin Energy Plugin AppServer Install Quit the installation program The installation routine should work mainly on its own Attention During the installation a reboot of your system might happen Linking of the database and the DEWESoft on the data analyser DB Plugin This description of the setup procedure for database storages from DEWESoft uses the power functionality of DEWESoft whereas every other channel is also supported by DEWESoft These could be torsion vibrations or acoustics data but also raw channels from 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 4 DAQ or PAD modules A completely defined power module could look like this DEWESoft File Edt Daa Displays System Help A D hardware Sou mop es B omg EE Measure Analyze Setup Overview Scope Recorder Store Sop El DATA FILE OPTIONS File details
286. nts of the report The script should be written using one of the languages which are the components of the script engine FastScript Currently the following languages are supported PascalScript C Script BasicScript JScript The following FastScript features available in the script engine standard language set variables constants procedures functions with nesting capability with variables constants default parameters all standard operators including case try finally except with types integral fractional logical character line multidimensional arrays set variant classes with methods events properties indexes and default properties declarations of the following types absent records classes in the script no records no pointers no sets however the IN a in a c d operator usage is possible no shortstring type no unconditional jump GOTO types compatibility checking ability to access any report s object You can create scripts in the FastReport designer which contains the scripts editor with syntax s highlighting Also there 1 an embedded debugger which possesses the following functions Step Breakpoint Run to cursor and Evaluate 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 279 9 1 6 1 Taste of script Taste of script Top Tools for working with the script are located in the Code tab of the FastReport editor When sw
287. o be depicted with non standard attributes To set a command edit Command property of object in object inspector 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 357 DMPCommand1 ThrxDMPComme 5 j Properties Events Align Command 27240 In the property you can set a command in one of the three forms decimal for example 27 40 or hexadecimal 1B28 9 1 10 Dialogue forms Dialogue forms Top In addition to usual report design pages you can use dialogue forms in a report For dialogue form creation the same designer as for report pages is used The button in the designer toolbar is used for creating a new dialogue form it adds a new dialogue design page to a report When switching to the page with the dialogue form the designer workspace changes thus becoming a form where control objects can be placed 33 FastReport 41 fr3 File Edit Report View Help crm 01 3 T Tahoma BLU RAYS BBB Code Data DialogPage1 Pagel A 100 200 300 ig Report Data DialogPage Buttoni A Label Button E 8 Pagel Memo NEN el fs gt Buttoni TFrxButFonCantral w Properties Events TA Cancel False Caption Default _ False Description Enable
288. o generate statistics about events as tables and diagrams which classify the events in terms of duration and height 5 11 1 Setup After selecting anew CBEMA element the guided setup starts 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 124 CBEMA Settings General Module Switcher Caption 50160 Description Administrator Enabled EN50160 DISDIP Duratian 3 Voltage X 0 02 0 0 02 0 5 0 5 10 10 1000000 1000000 0 5 10 0 5 11 0 002 12 0 001 13 H4 4 HUE e et root Owner Group Others Phases wL1 L3 1 2 a 4 B Ais log Voltage lag Duration show faults that invisible vor outlines Print Template Appoint caption description and rights as already described in the previous chapters View Here you can choose parameters for the CBEMA statistics You can enable or disable the L1 L2 and or L3 phase You can enable or disable the log voltage and or duration axis DISDIP Select a DISDIP statistics and enable DISDIP With this setting a DISDIP matrix will be displayed in the graph Curve Points Here you can add and edit or delete curve points 5 11 2 The CBEMA Statistics The CBEMA graph plots the depth of voltage sags on the vertical axis against the duration of voltage sags on the horizontal axis 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 125 EN50160 lt all m
289. o invoke the additional window similar to the System text object editor When clicking the OK button the call of the aggregate function is inserted into the object s text 9 1 4 Formatting highlight Formatting highlight 9 1 4 1 Values formatting Values formatting Top A peculiarity of the aggregate functions returned numerical values is that they are not 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 270 formatted It should be evident when referring to the first example with the SUM function 1176 25 07 94 4 178 85 1269 16 12 94 1 400 00 51450 This happens because as a rule the data fields return a formatted value which is simply displayed by the Text object with no changes applied To apply formatting to the SUM function result let us use the value formatting tools of FastReport Select the object with the sum and call its context menu The format editor is called either by using the Formatting menu command or with the DisplayFormat property editor in the object inspector Display Format Category Text Formatting Number Date Time Boolean Decimal separator aM Here you can see the list of formatting categories on the right and the list of the available category formats on the left We ll select the Number category and the 1 234 50 format At that the format string corresponding to the selected format and the decimal separa
290. oat Demo Reports Flicker Pst Plt Star Heports E vent List PA Load Image Edit Chart Cancel 5 8 1 1 Editing the Chart In order to arrange the power modules on the topological screen click Edit Chart 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 112 ud ExpressFlowChart Editor File Edit View Unions Help Create OO Object r power H H H HH m cancel E In this screen the power modules can be placed by using the mouse Also elements can be added by clicking create on left top The properties can be changed according to the user s needs Move the cursor to the element and click on the right mouse button in order to be able to select the properties The following picture shows the changed icons and an additional object 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 113 wig ExpressFlowChart Editor File Edit View Unions Help E H mum OK Cance Click OK to save the changes or Cancel 5 8 2 Starting a topological view As all other view elements the topological view is also available in the visualization list By double clicking on the topological view the following window appears 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 114 aD PMT 3 i File Visualisations Tools Help Visualisations
291. object and it overlaps the bottom one mE If the Shift option is enabled the bottom object will be shifted anyway 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 249 oo KI This allows one to create rather complicated report output by using the logic of the object s design properties especially if an object overlaps several other objects at the same time Thus in the following example both of the upper objects contain stretchable texts and the bottom one has the enabled shifting when blocking option The bottom object will always be displayed closely to the object which contains more text irrespective of text size in the upper objects LO hI In this example if the Shift option is enabled for this object the bottom object will shift twice since it 1 located underneath two objects and thus an unnecessary gap is formed 9 1 2 22 Report with two data levels master detail Report with two data levels master detail So far our example reports have used only one data band First level data or Masterdata to control report output This enabled output of data from one DB table FastReport allows one to design report layouts having up to six data levels on one design page It is possible to have more data levels by using the subreport object This feature will be covered later Generally most reports are limited to 1 3 data levels with large numbers of data lev
292. object in the Report tree window its properties will appear in the objects inspector After that we would switch to the inspector s Events page tab and create the handlers Why didn t we use the main procedure for creation of the List list the OnStartReport event That is because the created object should be cleared after a report is finished This is logical to create objects in the OnStartReport event and clear them via the OnStopReport In other cases when memory does not need to be emptied one can use the main procedure for initialization of variables Everything concerning creation and clearing of the List object seems to be quite obvious Now let us examine the work of the script In the beginning of the page the counter of the current group the 1 variable is reset to 0 and increments after printing each group in the GroupFooterl OnBeforePrint event The calculated sum s value is added to the list in this event The GroupHeaderl OnBeforePrint event does not trigger during the first pass the Engine FinalPass verification During the second pass when the List list is filled with values the value which corresponds to the current group 1 retrieved in this event and it is output to the 8 object s text which displays the sum total in the eroup title In a finished report it appears as follows 1023 01 07 88 4 674 00 1076 16 12 94 17 781 00 1123 24 08 93 13 945 00 1169
293. odules gt 50160 CBEMA lt all modules gt Supporttrakt EN50160 Events all modules gt 50160 Diagram Supporttrakt Start Page e olo oj o 0 cM qe a ERE UNES LR DES CURE UN NUR REA e e e e oJ o opo oJ oj o oj oJ oj of o oj oJ o of of of of of o oJ Of oJ o e i f 0 a 1 the measuredevents 2 the DISDIP matrix 3 the phases 5 12 VEO Report The VEOE report is a special report that has been invented for the nationwide PG measurement in Austria Every member forwards the data concerning the listed measurement points according to the table and for a certain measurement period on to the VEOE This one generates the PG report for all over Austria 5 12 1 Generating a VEO Report After creating a new element of the type VEOE report the following window appears 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 126 VEO Report edit Allgemein Modul Switcher Bezeichnung WEDE Demo Beschreibung Testreport Rechte Typ Besitzer Administrator wv Niederspannung root Mittelspannung Lesen SchreibeAusf hren gt Besitzer Gruppe Andere Caption name the generated report Descri
294. ogical View e 113 9 Event a a aE eaaa E aoa aa 114 aana a ear ere Lt 114 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Contents 11 Details ot the Event LIS oiis DE 115 106 NAVIGATION E 116 RMS Da eT 117 Column IERO 119 10 RE 120 121 The DISDIP 122 e 123 123 THE CBEMA Stati sthioS 124 12 VEO REDON e DUDEN 125 Generatiig VEO 125 Opening a 126 Generating a Report For Several Measurement Stations 1 1111111 127 Parameters of the VEO Report ccssscsssssssssssssesssssessseessseeseeesaeeesseseuaeseuaeseuaeeeaesesaeseseeseseesesaeseeaeseeaeseeaesnseesess 129 13 Statistics of Frequency Disturbances 131 ctn Ec ce atrae luda deae rede t a v cu e te Pu rt cora cR 131 ecd uA LU CIL EM LE diia EI A 132 14 208900606 M 133 134 PACING ANT ENV M 137 Part VI Generating Reports 138 1 Generati
295. oints Flagging enabled Raw Data Auto refresh Time based Show channel limits Time based rounded Default graph width 4 h Time s Rights Oner Administrator Group Dewetror Head Witte Execute Owner Group Others Print Template The values in detail Caption title as it appears later in the visualization list must be filled in Description additional information to this view Data Points to define some general properties Raw Data The data will be shown in their original time intervals Time based The time interval can be recalculated e g in order to show 15 minutes data 900 seconds and the raw data source was 1 minute data The edit box is to define the interval in seconds Show chart legend to show the chart legend on the screen Flagging enabled according to IEC 61000 4 30 a standard for the function of power quality meters the data can be flagged If this box is checked flagged data will not be evaluated 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 57 Auto refresh automatic actualisation on the screen Rights You can define access levels to this view Owner the user who generated the view Group the group which has special rights Others everybody else Read the right to read only in this view Write the right to change the view The owner s the group s and the others rights can be defined by highlighting the checkboxes on the right side
296. ompany Addr Addrz city State Country Phone FAX Tax Rate Contact Last Invoice Date Internal Customers Press Enter to edit item Original name t ustMo Company Addr 1 Addrz City Skate Country Phone TaxRate contact LastinvoiceDate The MasterFields property editor is used for creation of master detail connections between two tables To connect two tables with the master detail relation a user should specify a general table in the Master property and call the MasterFields property editor for the subordinate table If the table has secondary indexes which are necessary to be used set the IndexName property beforehand Master Detail Link Detail Fields ShipToContact ShipTaAddr1 Linked Fields Custho Custhlo Master Fields 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 370 Here you can visually bind the master and the detail fields of data sets When sets connection is of Master Detail type then when moving within the master set the contents of the detail set is filtered in a way that it contains only records belonging to the current record of the master set To connect the sets fields select a field from the list on the left detail set then a field from the list on the right master set and click on the Add button Thus the fields bond would be transferred to the bottom list To clear the bottom list
297. ompression level at the expense of partial graphic information loss BMP Windows Device Independent Bitmap is used for storage of bitmap images assigned for usage in Windows A standard file format for computers under Windows control GIF Graphics Interchange Format independent from hardware support the GIF format was developed for bitmap images transferring through networks It allows compression of files containing many homogeneous fillings logos inscriptions schemes rather well TIFF TIF Target Image File Format hardwarily stand alone format Today it is one of the most widespread and reliable in polygraphy and facsimile information transferring Export principle is enveloping On exporting to one of above named graphic formats the dialogue box for image parameters setting appears 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 414 Export Settings Page range AJ Current page Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas example 1 3 5 12 Separate Files Image settings Monochrome L Crop pages JPEG quality Resolution dpi Export parameters Separate files if option is enabled every report page is exported to separate file File name is given according to the selected one with addition of underlining and page number Monochrome monochrome picture creating Crop pages after exporting blank area cropping will be performed a
298. on 3 Copy Grid P Le lt Export 22 12 2008 14 38 38 29 12 2008 14 38 38 GF auto refresh Print Show Reload Export Import Print List Graph File alfa a x Visualisations all all Analyse HE Root C3 Demo Reports HE Standards Cj Berichte Leittechnik Drag a column header here to group by that column MODULECAPTION UW Weiz 110k Uv Weiz UM1 20k UW Weiz ELIN 1 Uv Weiz 110k UW Weiz 20k UW Weiz 110k UW Weiz 20k UW Weiz ELIN 1 UW Weiz ELIN 1 Uw Zwaring 110k Uw Leibnitz UW Zwaring UNS 110k UW Zwaring Ult 110k UW M rez 20 Ganztal2 G14 UW M rzzuschlag UW rez Ut 20 Ganztall 614 UW M rzzuschlag Ui hrez 2 20k v Steinriegel 614 UW M rzzuschlag UW Zwaring UM 110k 603 UW Zwaring UW Pirka Ult 20k G02 UW INSTNAME 508 UW Wieizt 508 UW Weizt 609 Uw Weiz 608 UW Weiz1 608 UW Weiz1 608 UW Weiz1 608 UW Weiz1 609 UW Weiz 609 UW Weiz Uw Zwaring 506 UW Leibnitz 603 UW Zwaring UW Zwaring MEASUREMENTI TRIGGERIt TRIGGERTIME 1 POSTTIME PRETIME MASTERIN MASTERTR STORAGET TRIGGERTEXT 34359738401 1 29 12 2008 11 21 52 3500 1500 4 34359738401 7 29 12 2008 11 21 52 3500 1500 38654705703 29 12 2008 11 21 12 3500 1500 34359738401 26 12 2008 09 49 51 4500 1500 34359738401 26 12 2008 09 49 51 4500 1500 34359738401 26 12 2008 09 49 51 4600 1500 34359738401
299. on the instrument please see the DEWESoft and PWR DB Plugin manuals 5 7 1 Setup of Transient List To define the list add a visualization of type transients and follow the next steps 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 97 General Module Swacher Caption Transieni Descriptors Flights Visible Legend Columns Owner Administrator CONFIRM USEACC USEACCID Group rool i CONFIRMTIME GMT Read Write 7 INSTHAME Dyurer MASTERGUID G MASTERINS INSID MASTERTRIGGERINDEX Others MEASUREMENTID M DULECAPTIONH POSTTIME PRETIME STORAGE TYPE TRIGGERDESC X TRIGGERIMDEX TRIGGERTEXT X TRIGGERTIME Cross Trigger v Fast Trigger Slow Trigger Hi Legend at bottom Rectangular FFT Height Event Trigger List Template Graph Template OF Cancel Caption title of the setup as used in the visualizations List Description additional description to the set up Rights to define access levels to this view Owner the user who generated the view Group the group which has special rights here Others everybody else Read the right to read only in this view Write the right to change the view The owner s the group s and the others rights can be defined by highlighting the checkboxes on the right side View View confirmed trigger confirmed triggers will be shown as we
300. onal description to the setup Rights to define access levels to this view Owner the user who generated the view Group The group which has special rights here Others everybody else Read the right to read only in this view Write the right to edit the view The owner s the group s and the others rights can be defined by highlighting the checkboxes on the right side SETUP List the list of all view elements to be used in this setup add items with of the table navigator Our example has two elements One is called EN50160Diagram a diagram view and the other one is named EN50160 Spectra a FFT view After clicking the Print Template button the report generator comes up as in the example 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Generating Reports 144 before The main difference is that not only diagrams and variables are available for the visualization but also all other view elements included in the setup list The following picture shows such a multi report view Fh uou Res MS Ca A S et sues i m e RP PASS e eee POOP t Cude hi Pid eid 1 13 1 3272 10 1 109 5 Vds LX Funct Dh fedi z Eh Start Tine E pi an Repargseceeshees Tale Mire E iic EN 50160 Overview i E rare v me B SE
301. one of a diagram That s why it is necessary that the user is well informed about the setup of a diagram as described in the previous chapter 5 4 1 Setup of an FFT Spectrum After selecting a new FFT view element the guided setup starts This is already described in the previous chapter Please see XY plot 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 71 5 4 1 1 Step 1 General Settings E FFT Setup Step 1 General Settings General Module Switcher Caption Test FFT Description m Flagging enabled Show chart legend D ata view Harmonics Calculation Absolute Timestamp 3D Time Rows 2 C2 Interval C Relative to limits Activate 3D View Interval Cale must be Fights Relative to nominal voltage Harmonics Owner Administrator Relative to operating voltage Inter harmonics Group D ewetran P g g Limits Wite Execute et SEE Owner iri Group Others Limit 2 T Activate 3D view 3D FFT Data View Absolute If this box is checked absolute values will be shown Relative H1 The shown data always refer to the fundamental and are listed in 1 100 Relative to limits The limit values are shown as 100 line the measuring values indicate the distance from 100 Harmonics Calculation Timestamp the harmonics of the defined time are shown Interval the av
302. onics DEFAU LOGICALCAPTION UNITS DESCRIP Al 50160 50160 Diagram 50160 DISDIP D 50160 Events E a a T 5 x I N 50160 FFT 28 12 2008 12 00 28 12 2008 18 00 29 12 2008 00 00 29 12 2008 06 00 n D m gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt STORAGET DATETIME OF CURVAL DATETIME OF DISPLAYFORMAT MED STDDEY MOD 2 0 00 20 76224 108 53 20 979 03 2 8 880 00 1 09 0 30 0 56 EN n 2 8 980 00 1 10 0 31 0 54 EN 1 5 12 2 8 980 00 1 11 0 33 0 51 2 0 00 0 03 0 01 0 02 io 2 0 00 0 03 0 02 0 02 1 Measurements 1 2 0 00 0 03 0 02 0 02 C iE 2 4 440 00 0 17 0 03 0 21 gt 2 0 00 50 00 0 02 50 03 2 gt PMT v 4 0 80 619 Administrator When a set of data has been added the usual window for the values appears listing the channel setup 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 51 5 2 3 opens the window for the general settings of the diagram please look for further information in chapter Guided Setup Step 1 General Settings Using the keys shift or ctrl a multiple selection is possible All values for all data are incorporated in the channel setup except the channel color This is set as default value JEE DEWETRON Process Monitoring Ge
303. only World Open the report designer After that click the Text button in the Objects designer panel Move the 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 216 mouse cursor to the desired place the page and click again The object has been inserted rm cau The text editor window will be displayed right away if it does not appear this can be set in the designer settings then doubleclick the object Enter the Hello World text and then click the IE button R Memo Text E Hella The report is created To preview it either select the FilelPreview menu item or click the corresponding button in the toolbar The preview window containing a report page with the Hello World text will appear This report can be printed out saved to a file fp3 or exported to one of the supported export formats 9 1 2 3 The Text object The Text object The Text object has many features Now we already know that it allows you to display text a frame and fill color The text can be displayed using any font of any size and style All the parameters can be set visually with the help of the toolbars No style F Arial gt if 4 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 217 Here are some examples of text design WE Test Test Test 0 Now let s look at other features of this basic object As an example
304. or example from an array or a file TfrxDBDataSet component is intended for working with data sources compatible with TDataSet such as BDE ADO IBX and a great majority of other libraries The TfrxIBODataSet component is intended for working with IB Objects The TfrxUserDataSet component works with other data sources arrays files etc It is very easy to use the TfrxDBDataSet component To connect it with the data source you should set the DataSet property which connects directly to a table or a query or the DataSource property which connects to a TDataSource component Both ways of connection are equivalent though the first one allows managing without the I DataSource component To make the component and the data connected to it available to the report data sources used in the report must be clearly specified To do that select the ReportlData menu item in the FastReport designer and then select the required sources in the opened window 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 224 Select Report Datasets Bio Country Cross Customers Items Orders Parts Sales 9 1 2 9 Customer List report Customer List report Top Our second report will be much more complicated than the first one it will contain DB table data a list of clients of a firm To perform this let us use the demonstration database DBDEMOS which 1 included in the Delphi distributio
305. or grid graph Print Harmonic graph Print Time graph prints the adequate graph according to your choice Save average graph Save Graph Save harmonics graph Save time graph saves the adequate graph according to your choice d Show Marks graph shows the measured data of all measuring points directly in the 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 90 scrolls the data field into the past for half of the screen width and reloads the data scrollForward scrolls the data field into the future for half of the screen width and reloads the data Reload reopens pop up window to select the time and reloads data Edit Chart Axis edits the axis of the harmonic diagram right diagram lt 3 Auto refresh will 0 reres activates deactivates the automatic refreshing Edit Time Chart axis Edit Time Chart Axis changes the axes of the time graph 5 5 1 2 2 Grouped View When the grouped view is activated you can additionally let the average graph be displayed This graph shows the average values over the whole period and equals the FFT view with the according width settings of the sampling points The X the diagram shows the quantile an inverted triangle shows the maximum The displayed values depend on the specified values taken as reference for the comparison The caption additionally shows whether the spectrum is within all limits or not 2010 DEWETRO
306. orders placed by the given client when previewed Using a calculator we can check to make sure that everything works as expected 1023 01 07 88 4 6 4 00 1076 16 12 94 12 9100 1123 24 08 93 153 845 00 1169 06 07 94 p3 47195 1176 26 07 94 4 170 05 1269 15 12 94 1 400 00 51450 0 So how do the aggregate functions work Before outputting a report FastReport scans the Text objects contents in order to find the aggregate functions The functions found will be associated to the corresponding data bands in our example the SUM function is associated with the MasterDatal band During outputting of a report when the data band is displayed the value of the aggregate functions linked to it is counted up In our case the Group ItemsTotal field s values are accumulated After outputting a group footer the one where the accumulated value of the aggregate function is displayed the function value is reset and the cycle 1 repeated for the next groups The purpose of the optional Flags parameter the aggregate functions In some reports some of data bands or all of them may be hidden however we may need to result value which considers all data bands visible or not In our example set the Visible property of the data band to false after that it will stop displaying To count a total on the hidden data band we add the optional parameter to the function call SUM lt Group ItemsTotal MasterDatal 1 I
307. oss of Name and Year in our case right click to display a context menu and select the Display Format rot Display Format Clear Contents 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 321 Then select the required format and close format editor You will get the following result Ben 3900 00 2 100 00 1800 00 7 80000 Catherine 8 100 00 3 200 00 f 9300 Den sso 88 10000 81209900 9 1 7 3 Using functions Using functions Top In our previewed example we see the sum total of each employee s salary during four years in the Total line One can use the following functions SUM sum of values MIN minimal value MAX maximal value AVG average value COUNT number of values Let s use the MIN function in our example Open the cross object editor in area 6 the Salary field item click the down arrow Salary Mane Sum Average Count Malek a els Select the MIN function in the menu Now one can modify a text in the cell of totals from Total to Minimum A finished report will look as follows 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 322 9 3300 240 9 1 7 4 Sorting values Sorting values Top Lines and columns values are arranged in ascending order if values have numerical type they are sorted by value and if they have line type they are sorte
308. ou can add a visualization to the LogBook ug Eintrag bearbeiten Error code 1 Caption Sollware Update Starttime 01 09 2007 10 26 09 Endtme 01 10 2007 10 26 09 Instrument z User Administrator 01 10 2007 10 26 09 4 Oktober 4 2007 Description 5 6 Comment DM amp 7 8 91011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 20 31 10 26 09 Now Clear Error Code define different error codes for example 1 Software updates 2 changes in setup Starttime the start time of the error Endtime the end time of the error Description additional information After confirming by clicking OK the entry is added to the list 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 138 ug Eintrag bearbeiten Eror code 1 Caption Update Starttime 01 09 2007 10 26 09 Endt me 01 10 2007 10 26 09 Instrument PNA 10S upporttrakt User Administrator Description Dewesoft Update Comment Installed actual DEWE Soft Version 6 4 2 Cancel Instrument select the instrument User select the user who made the entry into the service book Description additional information Comment comment to the entry Logbook nx Logbook Start Page Drag a column header here to group by that column
309. owing example To do this create the OnCalcWidth event s handler Pascal script procedure CrossiOnCalcWidth ColumnIndex Integer ColumnValues Variant var Width Extended begin if VarToStr ColumnValues 0 1999 and VarToStr ColumnValues 1 11 then Width 100 end C Script void CrosslOnCalcWidth int Columnindex variant ColumnValues Extended amp Width if VarToStr ColumnValues 0 1999 amp amp VarToStr ColumnValues 1 11 Width 100 And the result would appear as follows 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 334 In our example to hide column it 15 enough to return the Width 0 Note that the sums are not recalculated at the same time since the matrix is already full of values at this time 9 1 7 10 Filling a table manually Filling a table manually Top There are two versions of the cross table the DB cross table and the Cross table All this time v been working with the first object attached to the data from the DB table and fills itself automatically as as the report runs Let us examine the second object Cross table This object is not attached to the data from a DB Therefore you have to fill the cross table with manually This object possesses a similar editor but you will have to select the number of dimensions 1 table s titles and in its cells instead of DB fields 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 33
310. pe 88800 O SI 30 000 5160 7 UW Miterdof SSEILLI Left _ cquaUWMiterbfSSEP Lips Left O si 100 ______ dream Uw Mitterdorf SSE Q L2per MVAr 88000 Ue Miterdorf SSE S_L2per O 51 10 Let O 51100 A Let 15559 51 100 1 clSkyBlue UW Mitterdor SSE L2pe 880000 51 30 E 51 100 Mitterdorf rm 000 5 Left Q Right oO 51 100 Uw Mitterdorf SSE L3per 1 90 000 Left Right O 51 100 ka 4 59999550995095059055065 Now go to the sub graph window Channel Graph Assignme nt Channel Graph Assignment Drag column header here to group by that column eee La eee ee Stat End Visible Minauta Min Maxauto Log Visibl Minauh Min Maxauto Lac __ _ 8 y Aa HH 4 KK EM BR uv Ce Add sub graphs by using the in the navigation bar The fields to use are mainly on the left side where you define the range of the screen used for the sub graphs In our example 3 graphs are defined from 096 to 30 35 to 65 and 70 to 100 whereas 0 is on the top 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 105 The next step is
311. pening the setup of the selected measurement 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 197 Demo Reports 5 5 Standards 05 Harmonics Events EJ 5016051 50160 C3 EN50160Delta 4 C3 training 7 50160 CBEMA 7 50160 DISDIP 7 50160 Events 7 50160 FFT B Event List Reporti Spectra E TEST FFT Transient list Transient List EN50 160 Diagram Supporttrakt EN50160 Diagram Supporttrakt Unbalance 96 Flicker Pit Frequency Hz 26 09 2007 06 00 26 09 2007 12 00 26 09 2007 18 00 27 09 2007 00 00 27 09 2007 06 00 v 3 0 36 409 Administrator 7 Save Filter T3 Load Filter Load Data Import Measurement Export Measurement saving the filter loading a filter loading data of former measurements importing saved measurement data exporting saved measurement data 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Other 198 PMT 3 x File Visualisations Tools Help i x Show Setup Load Filter Save Filter port Measurement Measurements Delete Measurement J Ej Measurements 4294967389 PNA710Supporttrakt PNA710Supporttrakt No device 27 09 2007 15 56 57 01 10 2007 11 30 00 4294967389 PNA710Supporttrakt Supporttrakt 27 09 2007 15 56 57 01 10 2007 11 30 00 4294967386 PNA710Supporttrakt Supporttrakt 25 09 2007 13 28 40 27 09 2007 10 50
312. per A 0 000 Left Right O 51 100 MAX lt rm TIC cl4qua enc c Io nm our example the voltages now each one graph and the diagram will look as follows Zoom functions work the same way as they do in usual diagrams 1 500 1 000 500 0 500 1 000 1 500 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 The setup is stored under the name of the disturbance trigger text If a disturbance with the same name is opened this setup will be used For all other setups the settings must be done once and will then be assigned to the trigger text as well The setup is stored in the 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 106 transient list setup 5 7 4 column values color color of the diagram channel name of the measured value instrumentname of the instrument unit unit of the measured value date time date and time of cursor 1 val value of cursor 1 date time date and time of cursor 2 2 val 2 value of cursor 2 marker dif difference of values of cursor 1 and 2 marker difference of time of cursor 1 and date diff 2 internal variable subgraserisub graph series ID instrumentname of instrument Ins InsID internal variable is active indicates whether the measured value has been activated display format of the numeric display format axis used axis s
313. port View Help C Ep L style 10 B Z U RAY SY s mi tM Code am sassasssasanaasassasassaassasassasasasasasaassasassasasaaaa 0301720321043 523 B 171 8 B 1 41D 4 412 9 131 n Report C Data 3 T d B Fagel E 29 MasterD atat ReportTitie SEE E X _ OUR CUSTOMERS ao E A Memob E MCustomers Comgany Customers Company 2 Memo _ Phone Customers Phone E Properties Events 7 CLE Align baMone 45 True mi AllowHT MLTagsL False Autowidth False BrushStvle bsSolid 5 0 _ Clipped True Color B cane e Cursor crOeFault E DataField Company DataSet Customers Description DisplayFormat ExpressionDelir T FlowTo us Font TFont Frame Thr Frannie m d 1 Align Determines the alignment of the object relative to band or Centimeters 0 40 0 30 i 6 30 0 50 Memos Customers Company In the picture denoted with numbers 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 202 report
314. pper Limit Cancel Active If the checkbox is activated you receive an automatic calculation of values Note that each calculation takes time and can reduce the performance of your computer Reference absolute relative the borders are listed in units absolute or as percentage relative Lower Limit minimal value for comparison zero if only compared to a max value such as e g flicker unbalance etc Upper Limit upper limit for comparison Reference nominal value e g 230 V for voltage in Europe Quantile 1 to 5 the percentage values Up to five values can be defined If this is e g 95 it would mean that the values are within the limits in 95 of the time Finalizing the setup Clicking OK you will get a channel 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 66 RMS Setup Step 3 ES Sub graph data Capion stat End 2 Lett axis Right apis Visible Log O Visible Log Min Auto 0 000 Min amp uto 0 000 Auto 0 000 Auta Val 0 000 AXIS SHORTDESC RMSTYPE FIXEDTODEVIC LOGICALCAPTION MODULECAPTION 5 ao O Po UimsL23 O 123 13 o Ao BH Delete Channel Edit Channel Add channel Add math Cancel E Add as many channels as you want or continue by clicking ok The sub graph will appear in the window RMS Setup Step 2 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh
315. pressions with the help of the Text object One of the most important features of this universal object 1 it s ability to display not only a static text but expressions as well Expressions can be located in the object together with text Let us examine a simple example of how it can be performed Put the following line into the object Hello World Today is DATE Thus when running the report we can get something like follows Hello World Today is 01 01 2004 What lead to such result During FastReport report building if an expression enclosed in square brackets 1s encountered the engine calculates it s value and inserts the value into 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 220 the text in place of the expression The Text object can contain any number of expressions together with a usual text Both single variables and expressions can be enclosed in brackets for example 1 2 3 4 Any constants variables functions and DB fields can be used in expressions We will learn more about these features later in the chapter FastReport automatically recognizes expressions enclosed in square brackets in the text But what should be done if our object contains square brackets and we do not want them to be considered as expressions For example if we need to display such text as following a 1 10 FastReport considers 1 as an expression and displays the following al 10 that is not what we
316. property The picture will be loaded from given filename when you run a report 9 1 2 14 Report with pictures Report with pictures Top The Picture object like many objects in FastReport can display data from a DB The connection of this object to a desired DB field is done by setting the DataSet and DataField properties in the object inspector In contrast to the Text object this is the only way to connect an object to data Let us demonstrate this with a report which will have images of fishes and their names To do this we will again need the DBDEMOS demo database which is included in Delphi distribution kit We ll create a blank project in Delphi and then put the T Table component on the form and set its properties DatabaseName DBDEMOS TableName Biolife db For working with the table from FastReport add TfrxDBDataSet component and set its properties DataSet Tablel UserName Bio Finally add a component on the form Open the designer and click the 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 234 New report button so that FastReport will create a basic layout Now we allow the frxDBDataset and it s connected table to be used in the report From the Menu select ReportlData select Bio dataset and click Now we ll add objects to the report form Place a Text object with the text Fish in the ReportTitle ban
317. pt script s work Ctrl F2 preview expressions evaluation Evaluate Ctrl F7 toggle breakpoint F5 5 Watches window 6 bookmarks and breakpoints are displayed in this field in addition the lines possessing the executable code are highlighted there Below there 1s the list of the keys which can be used in the script editor 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 281 Ctrl X Shift Delete Ctrl Shift lt number gt Ctrl lt number gt Ctrl F Ctrl R F F Ctrl F2 Ctrl F7 F F7 or F8 Ctrl Space Ctrl Shift Delete Ctrl Shift Backspace 9 1 6 2 Structure of a script Shows list with methods and properties of object Structure of a script Top Script s structure depends on the language you use however there are some common elements They are the script s title body and the main procedure which will be executed when the report runs Below there are examples of the scripts for all four supported languages PascalScript s structure language PascalScript optional program MyProgram 22 the uses chapter should be located before any other chapter uses unitl pas unitz pas var the variables chapter can be placed anywhere 1 j Integer const constants chapter pi 3 142159 procedure pl procedures and functions var i Integer procedure p2 nested procedure 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 282
318. ption arbitrary description Low voltage Mean voltage indicates the voltage level for which the report should be generated 5 12 2 Opening a Report After choosing the report from the list on the left you are asked by the module switcher to enter the measurement instrument and the period of time Then the following table appears 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 127 5 12 3 PMT BAX 2 Allgemein Visualisierung v 01 02 2009 13 32 56 10 03 2009 13 32 56 Drucke Kopieren Speichern Report Datei Daten Navigation q Visualisierungen Demo Startseite Root Cj Demo Reports Standards ORT Zweck UN START ENDE Tests DEWE Graz 230 230 01 02 2009 13 32 56 10 03 2009 13 32 56 Schulung Ziehen Sie eine Spalte hierher um nach dieser Spalte zu gruppieren 556 Leittechnik Topo bersicht ved Test vertical 111111111 v 4 1 89 704 Administrator BRENT With the function copy top left you can copy this table to the clipboard and to MS Excel Frage hier eingeben ERE K RT Z SKGPOL VERWENDUNG UMIN UMAX H3MAX H3095 DEWE Graz 230V 01 02 2009 13 32 10 03 2009 13 32 254 234 31 1 14 SES d Ex o 401 gt Tabelle1 Tabelle2 Tabelle3 Bereit Generating a Report For Several Measurement Stations In order to evaluate several measurement points at the sa
319. r Enveloping all report objects enveloping is performed on page image There is full original accuracy It is used on export to graphic formats 9 1 14 5 1 Export to PDF Format Export to PDF Format 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 405 PDF Portable Document Format a platform stand alone format of electronic documents created by Adobe Systems The free Acrobat Reader package is used for viewing This format is rather flexible it allows inclusion of necessary fonts vector and bitmapped images it allows transferring and storage of documents intended for viewing and further printing Export method is a layered one On exporting to PDF format the dialogue box for output file parameter settings appears Export to PDF Page range all Q Current page Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Export settings Compressed Print optimized _ Embedded Fonts _ Background Open after export Export parameters Compressed output file compressing It reduces file size but increases export time Embedded fonts all fonts used in report will be contained in the PDF output file for correct file displaying on computers where these fonts may be absent Output file size increases considerably Background export of graphic image assigned to a page into PDF file It considerably increases output file size Print optimized outpu
320. r delimiting expressions which are included in the object s text In case of need square brackets can be replaced by a pair of any other opening closing sequences see the Displaying expression with the help of the Text object section Angular brackets are used inside expressions for marking out the FastReport variables or DB fields To be logical we should write Contact person lt frxDBDataSet1 Contact_Person gt instead of Contact person frxDBDataSetl Contact_Person Nevertheless both these notations are correct since FastReport allows absence of angular brackets in case when an expression contains only one variable or only one DB field However if an expression contains several members the brackets are obligatory Length cm lt frxDBDataSetl Length_in gt 2 54 9 1 2 11 Aliases In the previous report we used the data source with the frxDBDataSet and the following fields CustNo Company Phone and FAX Accordingly we had to insert something like frxDBDataSet1 CustNo into the report Does it seem to be quite clear Not really One may want to rename the data source and the field naming it Our clients and Number respectively However frxDBDataSetl is a name of the component which does not support spaces And CustNo is a name of the field it cannot be renamed directly without database restructuring There 1 however a way out The user can
321. r off maximum value for the quantil calculation indicates if the quantil calculation refers to absolute values or percentage values minimum value for the quantil calculation indicates that the statistics calculation is active first quantil in reference value for the quantil calculation numeric format which is used for this value minimum value maximum value average value median value standard deviation variation modal value LIMITOK 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh STORAGEINTERVAL INS_INSID DADA CDALLILANITII V AL LIC indicates that the first quantile value is inside the limits interval of the stored data instrument ID E fisat 55 5 2 6 Showing Statistics By clicking into a line in the legend a statistics window can be started Statistic U rms L12 V AVG 20 823 75 sg 12 137 30 amp 110 44 Min 20 547 70 21 055 02 20 830 58 Mad 21 029 65 Lim Quantil 95 00 Lower Limit 1 00 Upper Lirit 1 00 In Limit YES mmx 4 20 52 09 4 4 4 5 20826 73 O A 20 775 89
322. rder number E Addri asd Order date Addrz E city Expression lt Clustomers Cust No After the list of variables is created close the variables editor Now we can insert the variables into the report In contrast to inserting DB fields there are fewer variants here We can either insert a variable into the object text manually by typing the Client number text or drag a variable from the Data service window to the required place of the report In the second case it is required to switch to the Variables tab in this window Let s review what we have learned so far A report design is composed of design pages Pages may contain FR objects either placed on the page or within a band Bands are placeholders on the design page and depending upon their type control where the objects they contain appear on the output page s Text Objects contain the text we want to output at a given position they are multi lined and may contain static text datafields variables expressions or a combination of all Data type bands Master Detail Subdetail etc when connected to an TfrxDbDataset control the number of times these bands appear rows and together with the report engine determine the number of finished pages output by a design page Note even though these data bands may have types like master detail etc this 1s only a place relationship of the bands hierarchal position on the output pages s the
323. report we are going to get It must resemble the report from the previous example but at the same time it must be broken down by months as well The cross object must be set in the same manner We ll add the Month field into the column header by dragging it to the column header list See the illustration below Cross tab structure Subtotal 4 2 fe A Z i SS Se SS SS As aresult when previewing we would see the following report 1999 2001 2002 Grand Total 2 2 row 1 2 3 row 2 Aw mw 7200 3300 1300 wc 8700 maie 2 _ Catherine soos _ of uem Grand Total 1000510016000 1200 13700 5299 3800 3200 12299 000 5600 1600 1 1200 3700 3700 40899 Note that FastReport automatically added a column of the intermediate totals which are displayed after each year This option can be set in the cross object editor by selecting the Year column element and disable the Subtotal flag 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 324 In addition one can note that there is no intermediate total in the bottommost column element the same is true in cases when this element is the only one Actually in our example we do not need intermediate totals for each month Another feature of intermediate totals In our example it is desirable to display Year year total
324. rint to file The Pages group you can select which pages to print all current selected range Pages AJ Q Current page Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 The Copies group you can set how many copies to print If Collate flag 1s set and you choose to print several copies at first one report copy is printed then the next etc If flag 1s disabled several copies of the first page are printed then several copies of the second one etc 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 402 Copies 4r Number of copies Collate The Other group Print you can select which pages to print Variants All pages Even pages Odd pages Order print pages in direct or reverse order from last to first page Duplex handle duplex by default report settings are used or choose one of duplex options vertical horizontal simplex Other The Print mode group you can select one of the printing modes Prink mode gt B Default wt Frink on sheet Default wt E gt Default Default mode The printer prints on the sheet defined in a report One preview page is printed on one sheet Split big pages Split big pages This mode is useful if you need to print A3 report on A4 sheet One preview page is printed on several sheets If you choose this mode you have to choose the sheet size Print on sheet as well gt
325. rmissible value Upp or Hel 2785 17 ur oc 208 17 O7 oc cp TEENIE TEENIE F0 Mamam aT 18 5 ZW AI lm 225 237 ago 028 2004 In Lira 17 iy iat DEWETRON 3 150 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 151 4 Sumreport Edit Default Caption 1 Description Flagging Fights Owner Show good Parameters Administrator 7 Show each Harmonic Group root Owner Group DE WETRON Others AMS View 4 Root Standards EN50160Star EN50760 EN50160 Diagram FFT View Rant Dema Reports FFT LI 1 Cancel Caption the name of the sum report Description a description of the sumreport B Flagging the errors will not be shown all data will be shown also the invalid data B Show each Harmonic all harmonic values are shown 7 Configuration 7 1 General 7 1 1 Alarm Codes Select tools alarm codes in the menu bar 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration Configuration COMMON ARCHIVE IE SECURITY a Excel Export Dict Caption Caption 152 leaving the maintenance area moving from the submenu to the main menu moving one step back exporting the data to MS Excel copying the data to the clipboard 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 153
326. roup is transferred to the next output page 1006 06 11 94 1079 03 05 89 1106 23 09 92 1153 16 04 94 1253 26 11 94 134 MIP Divers Club 1007 01 05 88 1027 07 07 88 When looking at the printout of the report it is unclear which client list of orders the very top of the second page refers to FastReport allows repeating the group header output which in our case contains information about the client on the next page To perform this the Reprint on new page menu item or the ReprintOnNewPage property in the object inspector should be enabled in the Group header band This will then display the following output 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 261 1006 06 11 94 1079 05 05 89 1106 z3 19 92 1153 15 04 94 1253 26 11 94 1007 11 05 88 There is another way which allows one to avoid breaking of groups This 1s the Keep together group header property or KeepTogether context menu It should be enabled Then if the whole group does not find room on the output page it 1s transferred to a new page In our example it will appear as follows 1005 20 04 88 1059 24 02 89 1072 11 04 83 1080 05 05 89 1105 21 07 92 1180 05 08 94 1266 15 12 94 1280 25 12 94 1305 20 01 95 1006 05 11 94 1079 03 05 69 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 262 Thus much blank space may appear several pages but the group will be displayed as a whole on the page
327. rovider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to Microgott Jet 4 0 CILE DB Provider Micrasaft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microgott OLE DB Provider for Intermet Publishing Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft ULE DE Provider for Oracle UUOO0O0OQ dic TO 15 oft Li ILE Pro wider fr SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSD ataS hape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services gt gt Cancel Help 34 choose SQL native client if available or Microsoft OLE DB Provioder for SQL Server Then move on to the button Next Subsequently you enter the settings for your server connection 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 35 Data Link Properties E X Provider Connection Advanced Al Specify the following to connect to SUL Server data 1 Select ar enter a server name 932 168 10 3 2 Enter information to log on ta the server Use Windows NT Integrated security f Use a specific user name and password User name Password pese Blank password Allow saving password 3 Select the database on the server 4 M Attach database file database name 4 Usma the flenane Cancel Help Click onto the green check mark in order to save your changes and then click ok You are
328. rt Page 1 2 20 855 39 274 05 un 59 4 34 274 05 420 785 53 27850 Jj AN fu 20 507 03 278 50 802 1 277 20 WE poo 75 UF Bii a Mail 0 525 41 277 20 bj gt b 2 x A 1 gv i 0 59 0 34 THD Q 1149 97 0 00 HL A 2 o m m c Ti x gt 5 5 D 23 12 2008 24 12 2008 25 12 2008 26 12 2008 27 12 2008 28 12 2008 29 12 2008 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 53 5 2 5 The Legend The legend shows the diagram values and certain information of the user s settings The values have either already been selected in the setup see column values or the values can be selected now by clicking the button the value UE CAPTION 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 STORAGET DATETIME OF MARE UNIT 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 2 23 12 2008 20 46 28 CURVAL2 INSTRUMENTCAPTION 0 652 601 Uwi Webling 0 63 601 Uv Webling 0 59 601 Uw Webling 0 03 601 Uw Webling 0 03 601 Uy Webling 0 03 601 Uv Webling 0 22 601 Uv Webling DATETIME DISPLAY FORMAT 27 12 2008 16 30 24 8 880 00 27 12 2008 16 30 24 8 880 00 27 12 2008 16 30 24 8 880 00 27 12 2008 16 30 24 8 980 00 27 12 2008 16 30 24 8 880 00
329. rt designer just click on the horizontal or vertical ruler limiting report page from the left and the top Then holding the mouse button down drag the guideline to the required position on the page You will be able to place objects immediately along guidelines horizontally and vertically Text objects grid alignment can also be helpful in case of cells overlapping Keep an eye on enabling grid alignment in designer options In order to simplify alignment you can extend grid pitch Setting of grid pitch and alignment can be found in designer menu View Options 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 419 Designer ptions Show grid v Magn to Grid v Show editor after insert v Show band captions v Show drop down Fields list bands placement Gp bebween bands For text framing it 15 better to use text object embedded properties instead of single eraphic objects lines rectangles etc try not to use background objects under transparent text objects Keeping these simple rules in mind will help you to create a report which will look perfect after export to any format using table or table based marking for data presentation Below there are some examples of correct and undesirable object arrangement on report design creation Memo 2 Bad Good Objects are displaced horizontally It is necessary to use alignment according to 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh
330. s Standards Cj tests 01 Ej Flicker Pst Plt Delta Flicker Pst Plt Star AMS Graph P 0 D RMS Graph U f D RMS Graph U I fe Measurements Duration s 4 1 85 679 Administrator mE EID prints the report Printraph prints the graph Export To Excel Wi Export To Exce saves the file and exports it to MS Excel respectively Chart Axes for scaling the axes Points switching the data points on and off 5 14 Logbook The logbook enables the user to record various service operations of the software the disturbance recorders the server or the network and to share this information with other users Basically you can make documentations on updates revisions calibrations etc 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 134 5 14 1 Setup Please add the visualization Logbook fill in the fields caption and description and assign the adequate rights 4 LogBook Edit Default Caption Logbook Description Mote all system changes Rights wner Group Caption title as it appears in the visualization list later on must be filled in Description additional information to this view Administrator Dewetron Head write Owner Group Others Read Only if this is active you are not allowed to make changes Now open the visualiza
331. s Setups snmp Tempaddans Dokumente und Einstellungen Fixes Il ana 7 1 5 FFT Specification E EEJ Dewesoft hochladen Starke Dewesaft Upload The FFT specification is a table in which you insert the limit value for every harmonics The values are listed as percentage of the 1st harmonics Exporting the data into MS Excel is possible 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Configuration FFI SPECS ARCHIVE 7 SECURITY FFTBORID Norm caption EN 6100 2 4 Norm caption 61002400 class CLASS 1 Norm class CLASS 2 Norm type H1 H2 H4 H5 H H8 H3 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 H17 H18 H19 H20 H21 H22 H23 H24 7 1 6 Groups of Instruments Access General groups of instruments FFTBORID Norm caption EN 6100 2 4 U Norm class CLASS 3 Norm type H1 H2 H4 H5 H8 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 H1 H18 H18 H20 H21 H22 H23 H24 ce o o c o 160 FFTBORID Norm caption EN50160 Norm class no Norm type H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 HE H H8 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H18 H17 H18 H19 H20 H21 H22 H23 H24 H25 H26 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 161 INSTRUMENT GROUPS H s
332. s minimal and maximal cell width respectively Both these properties are accessible only via the object inspector The MinWidth value is 0 and the Max Width value is 200 by default This is quite enough in most cases You can set your values according to any special requirement you desire Thus in our example we can set the following MinWidth MaxWidth 50 This would signify that table cell width must be 50 pixels at any rate If a cell is smaller it is adjusted to the MinWidth value if it is bigger its width is fixed according to the Max Width value and the text in the cell is divided In our example it would appear as follows 10 11 12 Total for 1999 Bw 2 Came su 0 Grand Total 1000 s100 1200 13700 The third way is to change table width manually To do this set AutoSize property to False Now you are able to resize the cross tab using the mouse When moving the mouse cursor over cross elements you will see that cursor shape changes Here is an example of what we can do 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 326 Total sano som sono sm Remember that if you turn off the auto size the cross tab will not adjust the widths heights of the table elements You may get something like this when previewing our table 11 n Ben n n In this case
333. s shown 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Generating Reports 140 on the next page The dialogs conform to the standard of Windows and are therefore not explained in detail here icu B 2 tAd See ew n qe R 1E 149 ur tino d D Legend cnra EL DU j is F Ear ec TOC UNNI Properties Events Nese a E E HE enter L chor Bue cme J ge Dete Ca che ihe ate ples SL Lapsi 15 P d OY rere LO arsine E lis deer Lit Pagi ly is Chul nm kane 74 89 7p mpi sf Ts alee Gk JASTEUFFENT Ek DATETIFEZ Gh BORDE 0271 Ch STATISTIC Eh STATISTICE 1 Bh STATISTICET OBS FLAGZIKZ rd Bh BORDER on da 1 p Eh ase abk x Tn TH Poe be STATISTICS 20506530 HarkPucbure x ihe Ecke para p Fer mser 777 042 253 To insert a diagram click Ln again and move the image to the desired position on the report
334. sation 3 logical channels the global definition of measuring channel names 4 channel storage groups definition of the channel storage groups and storage intervals System Configuration DEWESoft oo X File Edit Data Displays System Help oe SE Pe p Keine 4 D Wandlerkarte Measure Analyse Setup Overview Scope Recorder Store Stop DATA FILE OPTIONS File details e Create amultifile Save multifile opt setup m Stop storing after DYNAMIC ACQUISITION RATE STATIC REDUCED RATE STORING OPTIONS 5000 lt always fast Hz ch Adjusted to AT Start storing automatically Analog Counter Math Power Plugins Ordnungsanalyse DB Plugin dg opc Home A Devices Alarm Events G Channel Storing System Info Enable test plan processing InstrumentlD 1 gt Instr PMTLOCAL Enable SNMP Service Language English Y v3 5 17 385 Storing Outbox path d outbox 71 Memory Outbox Slow Trig buffer size 1 Enable Plugin outbox sending Backup Time d 30 a gt 4 Activate Plugin Streaming Server localhost Test Streaming Connection SNMP Trap Target 1 SNMP Trap Target 2 Send SNMP Test Trap Field System Info shows general system configurations 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 6 Instrument ID the unique identification number of the
335. se you do not have to re define the settings But you can also simply transfer these files to other measurement instruments Import imports a pre defined alarm setup Only the module has to be chosen beforehand O 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 18 Close closes the window and saves all settings List of Channels All those channels are defined here that should be used in this event STO LOGCHACOD CON EVER STO ALAFIMIME TPM TLOCAL No device Ll L1 adds another measurement channel to the list deletes a measurement channel from the list Storageindex number of the measurement channel that is later on used in the analysis diagrams Logchacode name of the measurement channel in PMT Condition indicates if the triggering condition Ausl sebedingung has to be applied to this channel Event indicates whether an analysis of the event should be carried out An analysis of the event means that the time duration and the rate of the measured value during the disturbance are identified and stored in the event list This can later on be used for e g DISDIP and CBEMA analyses Storing indicates if the measuring channel should also be stored Alarmindex every alarm corresponds with an individual index 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 19 2 2 5 2 Starting Conditions Defines the starting condition of the alarm ATTENTION Only those values are checked that are marke
336. second with the the Spectra of the FFT view The required settings on the left side are 1st diagram DataSet EN50160Diagram DataField RMSGraph 2nd Diagram DataSet EN50160Spectra DataField FFTGraph After storing the element the report can be printed directly by starting the view element in the visualization list 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 145 6 3 6 3 1 General Functions In Reports Titles A title as the following shall be implemented EN50160 Diagrams laf 5 a EE uy gt End 07 06 2006 17 13 30 generated OF 06 200 17 14 13 to EE EE s Power Quality Division The values can be set as following e EN50160 ab Use the button on the left side and enter the title EN50160 in our example The size and other items can be changed by using the functions in the menu bar e Location Supporttrakt This requires two steps Location is a text element like EN50160 Supporitrakt is the name of the power module already defined in the DEWESoft Variables are available on the right side of the report generator and can be used with the drag amp drop function i e you chose the variable click the right mouse button and move the variable to the intended position 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Generating Reports 146 gt 50160 Diagrams Lo ozlion f Legend MODULE Start aqna ph
337. sonable in case the server crashes and the database has to be reconstructed again The data are stored on the measuring instrument for the time indicated in days and deleted after that time Having permanent installations you normally use 30 days Streaming Server the server name or IP address on which the APPServer is running The APPServer is the process that copies the data into the database Usually this is the database server itself case of a single instrument installation it says localhost The APPServer is in this case mostly substituted by PMT Test streaming connection button to test the connection Additionally to the function the performance is shown as well 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Hint SERVER 11 04 2008 11 48 42 version 3 0 45 437 Transferrate 13 030 4 kb s Responsetime 15 ms SNMP trap target 1 When you use the option SNMP please see beginning of this chapter the first SNMP montoring computer to which the traps messages are to be sent name or IP address is listed here SNMP trap target 2 When you use the option SNMP please see beginning of this chapter the second SNMP montoring computer to which the traps messages are to be sent name or IP address is listed here Send SNMP test trap a test can be sent and thus the SNMP function be checked Memory outbox If this field is activated the storing is generally prevented The operating mode of the pl
338. sualisation 4 z VEL 22 12 2008 11 13 49 29 12 2008 11 13 49 Le Legend in Chart T Reset Marker biens Export Graph chart axes n active Trigger 1 Points Reporting Back Forward Load F MUS Copy to Clipboard HON lt auto refresh T Active Trigger 2 AX Edit File Navigation 1 POLU Stern und I UW Webling IKEA 20 Visualisations 01 Stern und I UW Webling IKEA 20kV Root Demo Reports Standards Berichte 5 Leittechnik Data Start Page A P01 1 MIN U Stem und P01 2 Stem und 02 U Delta und P02 1 MIN U Delta und I P02 2 Delta und P03 3 und GH P04 L1 und Min Max 04 L2 und P04 L3U und I Min Max 24 12 2008 28 12 2008 29 12 2008 12 027 13 601 UW Webling 12 068 43 87 25 601 UW Webling 11 927 30 66 46 601 UW Webling 9 53 11 24 601 UW Webling 10 28 11 69 601 UW Webling 9 01 10 74 4 0 80 514 Administrator 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh The General Screen 38 If several diagrams are opened the caption line of the screen will be divided into several sections By clicking on the other names the pending diagram will be brought to the front POY FFT UT UM Webling IKEA 20kw PO FFT LI I Webling IKEA 20kV POL Stern und I UM Webling IKEA 208 Start Page The screen can be
339. t button Toggle object s selection Ctrl right button If you hold the left mouse button during moving a mouse a frame appears As soon as you release the mouse button all the objects captured in the frame would be selected This operation can also be performed by clicking on the blank space on the page and moving the mouse cursor to the required position Alt left button If the Text object is selected it edits its contents in place 9 1 1 3 Toolbars Toolbars 9 1 1 3 1 Designer mode bar Designer mode bar The bar is integrated with the object bar and has the following buttons Object selecting A standard mode of operation in which a cursor allows to select objects modify their sizes etc Clicking this icon allows dragging a report page Clicking on the left button doubles the zoom adds 100 while clicking the right one zooms out by 100 When holding the left mouse button while dragging the selected area would be zoomed 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 204 Text editor Clicking on the Text object allows editing its contents right on the report page If you hold the left mouse button when moving the cursor the Text object appears in the selected place and then its editor launches Format copying The button becomes enabled when the Text object is selected When clicking on the Text object with the left button it copies formatting which has the
340. t of graphic images in high resolution for further correct printing This option enabling is necessary only when the document contains graphics and its printing is necessary It considerably increases output file size Outline option is enabled when report outline is used It enables export of the outline to the PDF document Open after export resulting file 1s opened right after export via PDF files viewing program which must be installed in OS by default for example Adobe Acrobat Reader Export peculiarities RichText objects are exported as a graphic 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 406 9 1 14 5 2 Export to Open Document Export to Open Document Top OpenDocument Format ODF OASIS Open Document Format for Office Application was designed by OASIS and based on XML format used in OpenOffice FastReport supports export to table ods file and text odt file These files can be opened in OpenOffice Export method is a table one On exporting to ODF format the dialogue box for output file parameter settings appears Open Document Text Page range AI Q Current page Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Export settings Continuous WYSIWYG Page breaks Background Open after export Export parameters Continuous generate continuous document without page breaks and page headers footers Page breaks enables page bre
341. t will give us a report which would look as follows 51450 95643 261575 0 When the Flag parameter value 2 the accumulated value will not be reset right after it is displayed The result will become a running total on each successive output 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 267 Let s modify the call of function as shown below SUM lt Group ItemsTotal gt MasterDatal 3 The 3 value is a bit combination of 1 and 2 which means that we need to take into consideration the invisible bands without resetting the total As a result we have 51450 8 137094 4 39960 2 9 1 3 7 and report totals Page and report totals Top Quite often one needs to display summary total values of a page or a whole report We can use the aggregate functions in this situation as well We ll show this by making some changes to our example GroupHeader GroupHeader1 Group Graup OrderNo Group SaleDate Group Total GroupFooter GroupFooter SUM lt Group Items Total gt MasterDatal L ReportSummary ReportSummary1 Total SUM lt Group tems Total gt MasterData1 L PageFooter PageFooter this page SUM zGroup ItemsTotal MasterDatal As you can see we added the Report Summary band and a Text object with the aggregate sum to the Report Summary and the Page Footer bands T
342. tQueryBuilder is used It is available as an independent product for your applications It 1s included in FastReport Professional and Enterprise versions The query constru used for visual query building in SQL language Constructor 1 shown in the illustration below 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 391 4 Fast Query Builder Designer 2 Model Result SQL biolife L country Lg crasstest G Customer T currency quoting Lg customer Cam WideString T customer query Addri wWwideString m orders o 1026 employee Addrz widestring 7 I temn City WideString State wWideString 2 MSysaccessObjects B i SaleDate DateTime _ Ll MSysAccessXML Phone WideString 3 MSysacES FAX WideString MEMA LIMER 24 MSysIMEXColumns 7 TaxRate Float ShipToContact wide IF Contact wWidestrng ShipToAddr Widestr MSysIMEXSpecs 2 ShipToAddr2 WideStr 53 MSysObjects ShipTocity widestrin ShipToState Widestri Lal MSysQueries ShipTozip WideString _ MSysRelationships ShipTaCountry Wide E E E nexkibem T nextord IE orders T parks Addr 1 Phone FAX Collunn Misible Company Where Sort Function OrderMa SaleDate 1 toolbar Ascending Group La vendors 2 designer work area 3
343. tage of the nominal voltage by default 90 Stoplowpercentage Is used for fault record settings and lists the lower value of the window trigger at which the disturbance recording should stop as percentage of the nominal voltage by default 92 Starthighpercentage Is used for fault record settings and lists the upper value of the window trigger at which the fault record should start as percentage of the nominal voltage by default 110 Stophighpercentage Is used for fault record settings and lists the upper value of the window trigger at which the fault record should stop as percentage of the nominal voltage by default 108 Numofusers this is the number of affected users in case of a disturbance is later on used for the evaluation of the fault record Notdeliveredenegy this is the amount of energy not delivered in case of a disturbance is later on used for the evaluation of the fault record Nominalvoltage the nominal voltage of the module as defined in the power module Slopetrigger 1 used for fault record settings and lists the value of the slope trigger at which the fault record should start as percentage of the nominal voltage Slopetriggertime Is used for fault record settings and lists the time interval of the slope trigger in which the disturbance should be recorded in milliseconds 2 2 3 Channel Storing This part defines which data and and how these data should be stored in the database Only those d
344. tal control over the process of report s forming To control a report as much as possible every report object has several events to which a handler i e a procedure from the script may be assigned For example in the handler connected to the data band one can perform records filtering which means that the band will be hidden or displayed according to any specified conditions Let us demonstrate the process of creation of a report and of events which are generated during it with the example of a simple report which contains one page one Master data 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 288 band and two Text objects on the band Customers Company Customers 001 As stated previously the main script s procedure is called in the very beginning of a report After that the essential process of report construction starts In the beginning of the report the OnStartReport event of the Report object is called Before the page is being formed the OnBeforePrint page event is called This event is called once for each design page of the report s template it should not be confused with the output pages of a report In our case the event is called once as the report s design consists of one design page Then output of data bands begins in the following order 1 the band s OnBeforePrint event is called 2 the OnBeforePrint events of all the objects belonging to the band are called
345. tents Part Introduction 1 Part Il Installation of the Software 1 1 Installation routine ecc 2 2 Linking of the database and the DEWESoft on the data analyser DB Plugin 3 5 Sy Stemi COMMU ALO E 5 Tm 8 CHANG iv ss crenaaaianeumaramsaaeratesumennenceneies 9 Channel Siorage cece eet 10 Devices 11 Channel Storing c 12 iurc PE 12 concen TERCER UE nsa 14 Alarm EVENTS e 15 Alarm BEC i erii t 16 LISP aei m THER 18 ON 19 SIopping ec trt a DON SO Ecco edt ues keen Gate 21 Examples Frequency TMgO 22 Example One Power Module Several 23 3 DEWESoft Launcher on the Data Analyser nennen nennen nnn nnn nnn 23 4 PMT DEWESoft Control on the data analyser 11
346. ter 2 2 a monetary format accepted in the Windows OS depending on the regional settings in the control panel for the date time format dd mm yyyy date of the 23 12 2003 type dd mmm yyyy date of the 23 Nov 2003 type dd mmmm yyyy date of the 23 November 2003 type hh mm time of the 23 12 type hh mm ss time of the 23 12 00 type dd mmmm yyyy hh mm time and date of the 23 November 2003 23 12 type It is acceptable to use a comma or dash instead of period in the line for the numerical format This symbol will be used as a separator between the integer and the fractional parts of the value Usage of other separators is not acceptable Formatting of the 6 type boolean the formatting line is presented as two values separated by comma The first value corresponds to False the second one corresponds to True In order to avoid the necessity to memorize all these tags and their meanings there is a convenient resource for formatting insertion in the Text object editor When clicking the button the format editor which we already examined is called After selecting a format it 1s inserted to the text Thus if the cursor is placed before or after the closing square bracket the format will be inserted correctly 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 273 9 1 4 3 Conditional highlighting Conditional highlighting Top This feature of the Text object allows o
347. ter Import Measurement Export Measurement Copy Measurements Delete Measurement 27 Measurements Drag column header here to group that column 4294967389 PNA710Supporttrakt 27 09 2007 15 56 57 01 10 2007 11 20 00 4688 183296 4294967386 PNA710Supporttrakt 25 09 2007 13 28 40 27 09 2007 10 50 00 4688 183296 B Rei p 4294967386 PNA710Supporttrakt PNA710Supporttrakt No device 25 09 2007 13 28 40 27 09 2007 10 50 00 4294967296 e Demo Fleporte 4294967385 PNA710Supporttrakt PNA710Supporttrakt No device 03 09 2007 14 24 13 25 09 2007 13 20 00 4294967296 g 4294967385 PNA710Supporttrakt Supporttrakt 03 09 2007 14 24 13 25 09 2007 13 20 00 4688 183296 Harmonics Events E O 05 ENS50160Star C3 50160 EN50160Delta 50160 training Werner Alarm 50160 50160 DISDIP 1 50160 Events 50160 FFT Event List Report Spectra TEST FFT Transient list Transient List v 30 356 408 Administrator 1 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Other 196 8 3 2 1 The Navigation Bar The navigation bar looks as follows u amp e T Save Filter Save Copy Load Show Edit Import Export Delete Table Measurements Data Setup entry Measurement Measurement Measurement Save Table saving data by exporting them to MS Excel Show setup o
348. the Software 10 With you can delete a channel In the DEWESoft program directory you find the text file logchannels txt which includes exactly these channel definitions Here you can additionally indicate the name of the measuring channel used DEWESoft Recurrent descriptions as they are e g used in power module devices can automatically be assigned please also see chapter channel storing 2 2 1 4 Channel Storage Groups y DEWESoft File Edit Data Displays System Help Keine 4 D Wandlerk arte 39 1 P Measure Analyse Setup Overview Scope Recorder Store stop z DATA FILE OPTIONS File details pe Create a multifile Save opt in setup dodi Stop storing after DYNAMIC ACQUISITION RATE STATIC REDUCED RATE STORING OPTIONS 5000 uo always fast Hz ch Adjusted to ES Start storing automatically Analog Counter Math Power Plugins Ordnungsanalyse DB Plugin dg opc 3 Channel Storing Alarm Events o Home Devices System settings Time Sync Logical channels Channel storage groups V Storage at rounded time stamps CAPTION INTERVAL DEFAULT 600 Channel storage groups generally define those measured values that should be saved at same time intervals The affiliation of the measured values is defined in the menu channel storin
349. the list of available tables 4 selected table fields parameters area Toolbar open SQL file lal save query into the file query plan is also saved into the file 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 392 22 designer working area clearing v 6 button Exiting designer with saving Cancel button Exiting designer without saving Constructor working area and the list of available tables support Drag amp Drop technology 1 for table into working area drag it there with the mouse or double click on table title the available list of ta To include any field from the table in the query mark it ES customer c Float Company Widestring Addri WideString Addr WideString City WwideString State wWideString zip wideSkring Country WideSkring Phone rwidesString FAX rWwidestring TaxRate Float Contact WideSEring Marked fields appear in the fields parameter table area 4 Collumn Visible Where Sort Function Group Company Phone FAX Ascendina OrderMo Descending SaleDate Visibility defines whether field is included in output Where field selecting condition For example gt 5 Sort defines sorting according to field Function defines function applicable to field Group grouping according to field By dragging fields between tables in the work area 2 Join lines will appear On join
350. the nested report use a child band Company Customers Company Child hildi That s right This method is also used when it 1 necessary to display several Subreports one under another use a child band for each Subreport and chain them together Childl s child property is set to child2 and so on PrintOnParent option PrintOnParent option The Subreport object has the PrintOnParent property which can be useful in some cases This property is False by default Usually a subreport is output as a set of bands on the basic report page In this case the parent band which contains a subreport object do not depend on the subreport bands 1 e can t stretch If the PrintOnParent property is True you can set it from the object inspector or in the context menu subreport s objects are printed physically on the band which contains the subreport object You can make this band stretched and put on it stretched objects 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 278 9 1 6 Script Script Script is a program written in a higher level language which is a part of a report As a report runs the script runs as well A script is able to perform data handling which cannot be performed via regular means of the FastReport core for example to hide useless data according to any predefined condition The script is also used for controlling properties of dialogue forms which are the compone
351. the time is updated with which the programme works Field sync method defines the time protocol which is to be used Time UDP NTP Network Time Protocol is used based on the UDP packages Time TCP NTP Network Time Protocol is used based on the TCP packages SNTP the SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol is used ATTENTION When using firewalls or routers you should make sure that the IP port 123 between the measuring instrument and the time server is open UDP and TCP respectively according to the used protocol 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 9 2 2 1 3 Logical Channels File Edit Data Displays System Help Keine 4 D Wandlerkarte F A lt lt Measure Analyse Setup Overview Scope Recorder Store Stop DATA FILE OPTIONS File details 2 Create multifile Save multifile opt setup Stop storing after DYNAMIC ACQUISITION RATE STATIC REDUCED RATE STORING OPTIONS 5000 Auto always fast Hz ch Adjusted to Start storing automatically Analog Counter Math Power Plugins Ordnungsanalyse DB Plugin dg opc P Home A Devices Channel Storing L3 Alarm Events System settings Time Sync Logical channels Channel storage groups LOGCHACODE CAPTION UNITS COLOR 010103800000 0 NEN clBlue 010103800100 clBlue 010103820000 Qper clBlue 010103840100 Q_H1 cl
352. tion 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh ERIS Execute Cancel 135 General Visualisation 2 Export Add Edit Entry entry Data a Visualisations Logbook Start Page Root Demo Reports HE Standards 05 Berichte 5 Leittechnik _ Delete Entry Load Data Drag a column header here to group by that column ERRORCODE Caption DESCRIPTION INSTRUMENT IBS POM System UW Breitenfeld 29 12 2008 10 00 00 29 12 2008 10 30 00 Inbetriebnahme 605 UW Breitenfeld Alarme eingestellt und Datenbank speichem aktiviert Administrator PMT 4 0 80 619 Administrator The following possibilities are at your disposal Export After entering a name you can export the data into a document that can be read by MS Excel 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 136 Save As Save ir Resources H ecent Documents Deskto Documents Pr Computer 1 Network File name Flaces Save Hype Encoding e Add Entry adding an entry 75 Edit 7 entry editing an entry _ Delete Entry deleting an entry loading data Logbook fan Files fansi Cancel 2 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 137 5 14 2 Adding an Entry a e Add By clicking on the symbol y
353. tive Automatic C3 Manual Type 3 Manual B C63 Manual Type Cancel Active If you activated this checkbox you will get an automatic calculation of values Note that each calculation takes time and can reduce the performance of your computer Min lower limit to be shown if empty auto is used Max upper limit to be shown if empty auto is used Type how to calculate the statistics Automatic all values will be used inside MIN and MAX Manual Type A values are cut at MIN and MAX but other values will be calculated Manual Type B values are cut at MIN and MAX but other values will be calculated and used as one side bar Manual Type C values are cut at MIN and MAX other values will not be used Page borders only indicate them if you want to have quantile values such as 95 etc Use this function in order to calculate quantile values These are required e g for evaluations according to EN50160 where a 95 value is needed and compared with a nominal value to be sure that the data are within or beyond the limits 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 65 Series Eigenschaften General Statistics Borders Border calculation active Quantil 1 Quantil 2 Quanitil 3 T Quantil 4 2 5 C Limits from Module Reference 3 Absolute C3 Relative from module Uret Reference Lower Limit U
354. to Refresh Print Template Cancel Caption title of the setup as used in the visualization list Description additional description to the setup Only pending alarms only alarms that are currently active are shown Only unconfirmed alarms only alarms that have not been confirmed by a user will be shown Auto refresh continuous updating of the list Rights to define access levels to this view Owner the user who generated the view Group the group that has special rights Others everybody else Read the right to read only in this view Write the right to change the view The owner s the group s and the others rights can be defined by highlighting the 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 93 checkboxes on the right side Module Switcher The module switcher is a function to select the power module view Alarms Default Module switcher Module Switcher Active Setup is valid for the modules below Caption Description uw Bruck SEL Deutsch sy UW Leibnitz Mitkerdorf OU Pirka LN Webling sa LW Weiz waring Active If this checkbox is highlighted you are asked for which power module you would like to run the evaluation If it is not highlighted the diagram channels will already be selected in the setup together with the source power module Add Group to add a power module or group Remove Group to delete a power module or a group Print Template to g
355. to generate statistics about events as tables and diagrams which classify the events in terms of duration and height 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 121 5 10 1 add a DISDIP statistics add a visualization and use the DISDIP Statistics plugin ID 1002 DISDIP List Settings General Module Switcher Caption EN50160 DISDIP Description Administrator root Owner iv L1 wf LZ 3 Group i Others B Module Swatcher Table settings z Rest voltage Durations s H4 4 wx wx Print Template Cancel Caption title of the setup as used in the visualization list Description additional description to the setup Rights to define access levels to this view Owner the user who generated the view Group the group which has special rights here Others everybody else Read the right to read only in this view Write the right to change the view The owner s the group s and the others rights can be defined by highlighting the checkboxes on the right side 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 122 Table Settings the settings for the DISDIP table Rest Voltage the evaluation of voltage classes for example between 75 and 90 As many classes as needed can be added here Durations s the evaluation of duration classes for example dips with a duration longer than 1 second and shorter than 10 seco
356. tor character will be displayed The format string is an argument of the Delphi Format function which FastReport uses to accomplish formatting of numbers You can modify a format string as well as a separator If the divider is not included then the current regional setup will be used After clicking the IE button and report previewing you will see that the sum total in the report is now formatted correctly 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 271 1176 26 07 94 4 17805 1269 16 12 94 1 400 00 51450 Bt 9 1 4 2 Inline formatting Inline formatting Top In the example formatting was applied to the object and any expression located in the object Everything worked correctly because there was only one expression in each object However if we have more than one expression and they require different formatting we can use inline formatting Using the example resize the footer it s object and the objects text as shown below Total SUM Group ItemsTotal MasterDatal Number COUNT MasterDatal The total and number of orders will display in the object When previewing both of the values are presented in monetary format which we had previously set which 1 incorrect 1269 16 12 94 1 400 00 Total 51 450 80 Mumber 6 00 To display each value correctly they should be formatted individually To accomplish this we use format tags They are added before the closing square bracket of the
357. tretches objects with the enabled option to the bottom band edge Due to the fact that object frames stretches together with the object the report s appearance changes O 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 244 amund lagoon eet and andy aoo Clown Triggerish i Also known af the big spotted iriggedish Inhabits outer rm areas and igadg upon cuustaceans and by Them with poerul teeth They ane woradous eater and diver mportsecing the clown t ggaerksh dawour beds of pean oyster nof eatthis fish According to an 17878 account the pesgo nous primardy upon the nemious fue of the stomach accazioning wiolent of organ and shorty ateneards all fa mugdez or f body The becomes rocked math spasma the tongue thickened the eye fied the breathing laberious and fie patient expires i a pargxyzm of suffering Mod edible Range kinda Fache and E ast Amica Somes aoo Red Called zeaperch in Australis Inhabit the areas 9 1 2 19 Printing labels Printing labels Top In contrast to table reports data in reports such as label are allocated one under another Let us ex such report which displays data about fishes see the previous example The report is presented in the foi the following structure Number Bio Specie Cate gory Bio Category E E Name Bio Comman
358. truction By using the engine s properties and methods one can manage the process of band s s arrangement on a page First some theory The picture below displays the reports page and properties names which return different dimensions 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 301 FreeSpace PageHeight PaperHeight PaperWidth The page has the PaperWidth and PaperHeight physical dimensions These dimensions correspond to page s properties of the same name that are visible in the objects inspector when selecting a page So size of an A4 format page would be 210x297mm The PageWidth and PageHeight parameters define the dimensions of a printable region which is usually less than physical dimensions of a page The size of printable region is defined by the page s fields which depend on such report page properties as LeftMargin TopMargin RightMargin BottomMargin The printable region s size in pixels is returned by the Engine Page Width and Engine PageHeight properties Finally the FreeSpace parameter defines the height of free space on a page If there is a Page Footer band on the page its height is taken into account when calculating FreeSpace This parameter is returned in pixels by the Engine FreeSpace function Note that after displaying the next band free space reduces on a page and this is what is considered during calculating Fr
359. ugin nevertheless works Enable plugin outbox sending activates the sending of the data If this function is deactivated the data are only stored locally and can later on be manually imported int he PMT Activate plugin activates the plugin If this option is deactivated the function is completely switched off 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software 8 2 2 1 2 Time Synchronisation lt DEWESoft ee ft B File Edit Data Displays System Help Keine 4 D Wandlerkarte e 35 ft Measure Analyse Setup Overview Scope Recorder Store Stop DATA FILE OPTIONS File details Create multifile Save multifile opt setup m Stop storing after DYNAMIC ACQUISITION RATE STATIC REDUCED RATE STORING OPTIONS 5000 Auto v always fast Hz ch Start storing automatically Analog Counter Math Power Plugins Ordnungsanalyse DB Plugin dg opc P Home A Devices Channel Storing Alarm Events System settings Time Sync Logical channels Channel storage groups Sync Method Time Server Time UDP Sync Interval 0 Syne System Time Time TCP SNTP Time server defines the time server Server name or IP address Sync interval updating interval of the system time in seconds Sync system time If this field is activated the system time Betriebssystemzeit is also updated Otherwise only
360. use the Clear button The bound fields must be of an equal type and be the key ones 9 1 11 1 3 TfrxADOQuery TfrxADOQuery Top The component is used for performing SQL queries to DB The component has the following properties Connection name name of the TfrxADODatabase component Allows to set user s field aliases Property DatabaseName FieldAliases Filter Filtered Master Params SQL UserName IgnoreDupParams Defines whether it is necessary to use the filter Master dataset User name alias of the dataset If true the name of the inquiry parameters will not be edited in the parameter editor The list of query parameters Expression for records filtering The Active DatabaseName FieldAliases Filter Filtered and Master properties are similar to the properties of the TfrxADOTable component described above The SQL property has its own editor for filling the SQL query 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 371 select from customer The Params property also has its editor It becomes available as soon as a query text contains parameters Parameters Editor Data Value Integer 2000 parameter be of two types either one assigned from the master source or one 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 372 having a concrete value either an absolute symbol or a link to the variable o
361. used 10 Font size Allows to select font size from the drop down list Size can also be entered manually B Bold Enables disables font bolding Enables disables italics u Underline Enables disables font underlining Fn Displays Font settings dialog Selects font color from the drop down list Highlighting Shows the dialogue with highlighting attributes for the selected Text object Text rotation Allows to select text rotation B Left alignment Enables text left alignment 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 9 1 1 3 4 Frame toolbar Frame 206 toolbar Topline Rnabiewaiabies op frame ing Bonom tne Enables bonom fame ne LE E E a 1 9 1 1 3 5 Align toolbar Right line Enables disables right frame line All lines Enables all frame lines No lines Disables all frame lines Enables disables shadow Background color Selects background color from the drop down list Selects line color from the drop down list Selects line style from the drop down list Line width Selects line width from the drop down list Align toolbar 2 l i Icon Top 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 207 ijt 1 9 1 1 4 Designer options Designer options Top Set the designer options via the ViewlOptions menu command 2010 DEWETRON
362. v 9 1500 Spannungsband 0 0 609 UW Weiz 264 712 434 7 095 0 40000 v 9 1500 Spannungsband 0 0 603 UW Zwaring 1 968 216 121 544 8765 0 200000 3 1500 Spannungsband 110 5 603 UW Zwaring 1 951 445 121 685 289 Ji 200000 5 3 1500 Spannungsband 110 6 603 UM Zwaring 1 990 461 121 624 617 0 200000 3 1500 Spannungsband 110 6 Measurements RMS Graph P Q 603 UW Zwaring 13 526 413 121 248 992 0 200000 3 1500 Spannungsband 110 2 603 UW Zwaring 10 428 359 121 191 367 0 200000 9 3 1500 Spannungsband 110 2 E RMS Graph U f 603 UW Zwaring 4 486 954 121 140 734 0 200000 v 3 1500 Spannungsband 110 1 E RMS Graph 603 UW Zwaring 2 740 039 121 516 477 0 200000 v 3 1500 Spannungsband 110 5 E RMS Graph Ustar Udelta 603 UW Zwaring 978 702 121 336 438 0 200000 v 3 1500 Spannungsband 1103 Ej St rungsliste 603 UW Zwaring 977 585 121 306 984 0 200000 v 3 1500 Spannungsband 110 3 G11 Uv Bruckt 0 069 94 291 508 0 200000 11 1500 Spannungsband 85 7 G11 UWY Bruckt 0 463 04 415 859 0 200000 11 1500 Spannungsband 85 8 G11 UWY Bruck1 0 068 94 187 672 0 200000 11 1500 Spannungsband 85 6 G11 UW Bruck1 0 463 94 432 406 0 200000 wv 11 1500 Spannungsband 85 8 603 Uv Zwaring 819 816 121 189 219 0 200000 wv 3 1500 Spannungsband 110 2 603 Uv Zwaring 219 337 121 017 586 0 200000 3 1500 Spannungsband 110 606 UW Leibnitz 0 070 80 350281 0 200000 wv 6 1500 Spa
363. w 1269 16 12 94 1023 01 07 88 1178 26 07 94 1076 16 12 94 1123 24 08 93 1169 06 07 94 1232 0 0 000000000 173 16 07 94 1178 02 08 94 As you see the Group header band is output only when the field to which it is associated changes its value Otherwise the data band connected to the group 15 displayed If compare this report to the master detail report which we constructed earlier it should be obvious that order numbers are not sorted in ascending order This is easily corrected by changing the SQL query s order by clause text select from customer orders where orders CustNo customer CustNo order by customer CustNo orders OrderNo Similarly reports with nested groups can be constructed The number of nested groups is unlimited in such reports Reports using groups have some advantages over reports of the master detail type the whole report needs only one dataset query the number of the data grouping levels is unlimited the additional data sorting feature more optimal usage of the DB resources the query returns only one dataset which can be output without having to filter the data The only disadvantage is the need to write queries in SQL language However knowledge of SQL basics is obligatory for a programmer working with databases 9 1 3 2 Other group features Other group features 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 260 Let s look at how the g
364. want of course One of the ways to avoid such a situation is to disable the expression Just disable the AllowExpressions property Allow Expressions in the context menu therefore all the expressions in the text will be ignored In our example FastReport would then display exactly what we need a 1 10 Sometimes text 1s required to contain both an expression and a text square brackets for example a 1 myVar Disabling of an expression allows us to display square brackets in the required place but it also disables handling of expression In this case FastReport allows you to use another set of symbols to designate the expression The ExpressionDelimiters property which is equal to by default is responsible for it In this case the user can use angular brackets for the expressions instead of square ones a 1 myVar The lt gt value must be set in the ExpressionDelimiters property As you can see the comma divides opening and closing symbols There is one limitation however the opening and closing symbols cannot be similar so will not work One can set several symbols for example lt gt Thus our example will look as follows a 1 lt myVar gt 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 221 9 1 2 6 Bands FastReport Bands in FastReport Top Bands are used for logically placing the objects it contains at a location on the output page
365. ware configuration Users 2 Usergroups Alarm codes User groups alarm code relation Module Groups ll Instrument State a Import measurement data zm Table Viewer Download Updates Logical Channels FFT Spezifikationsgrenzen Archiv Data Restore measurement data from archive 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the Software ud PMT Software Update General Upload Load PMT at startup Enable Dewesoft Control hart with Dewessott Lontral Dewesott Director dewesoftdirectory Enable App Server Functionality Only one instance of PMT allowed at a time Use Open GL for 3D Graphics After restarting PMT the DEWESoft control function is active 2 4 2 Operation Select DEWESoft control and the following picture appears on the screen 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 27 PMT 3 x i File Visualisations Tools Help cont Bacca lt Full Control d Measurement Setup Current Setup None 10 000 000 Harmonics gt am O Symmetry Flicker Period Values No data to display gt v 3 0 36 403 Administrator 1 2 The following functions are now available e START e LOAD e FULL CONTROL 2 4 2 1 Start Start a measurement by clicking the following button Select between the different views 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Installation of the So
366. with explicative inscription which is used for uniting several controls 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 359 TfrxPanelControl The control represents a bar which is designed for uniting several controls TfrxBitBtnControl The control represents a button with picture TfrxSpeedButtonControl The control represents a button with picture TfrxMaskEditControl The control represents a text box for entering information set in a template TfrxCheckListBoxControl The control represents list of lines with flags TfrxBevelControl The control 1 used for the dialogue form design s TfrxImageControl The control represents a picture in BMP ICO WME or EMF format As you can see all the controls are similar to those used in Delphi In the FastReport component help you can obtain help about the properties events and methods of each control m 9 1 10 2 Hello World report Hello World report Top In this example we will create a report displaying a greeting window before outputting the report by using a dialogue form Create a new project in Delphi and then put the IfrxReport and TfrxDialogControls components on the form Call FastReport designer by double clicking on the component and add a dialogue form into the report Put the TfrxLabelControl and TfrxButtonControl objects on the form Set objects properties TfrxLabelControl
367. would be created if there is its value would be changed In the GroupHeaderl OnBeforePrint handler a variable s value with the number of the current group 1s computed 9 1 6 12 OnAfterData event OnAfterData event 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 296 This event is generated after the report s object is filled with the data to which it 1s connected Use this event for analyzing either a DB field value or an expression contained in the object The fact is that this value is placed to the Value service variable the value of which is available in this event only So having two Text objects with the Tablel Field1 and lt Table2 Field1 gt 10 contents one could analyze the value of these expressions referring to the Value variable PascalScript if Value gt 3000 then Memol Color clRed C Script if Value gt 3000 Memol Color clRed instead of writing something like this PascalScript if lt Tablel Field1l gt gt 3000 then Memol Color clRed C Script if Tablel Fieldl1 gt 3000 Memol Color clRed The use of Value instead of an expression provides you with a possibility to write one multipurpose handler of the OnAfterData event and to connect it to several objects One more thing is to be noted If there are several expressions in an object for example expr1 expr2 a value of the last expression is transferred to the
368. xamine the last chart completion from script To perform this leave empty X Values and Y Values fields in chart editor In report script write the following PascalScript begin Chartl SeriesData 0 XSource Jan Feb Mar Apr 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 349 Chartl 5erresDdrtalD l YS5ource 31523 231330 s5 end C Script Chartl SeriesData 0 XSource Chartl SeriesData 0 YSource Jan Feb Mar Apr 3123095 SeriesData 0 in this case allows us to set parameters for the first series in the chart If chart has several series you can address them via SeriesData data_number 9 1 8 5 Printing of a chart built Delphi Printing of a chart built in Delphi Top If you have already built a chart in Delphi code and want to print it in the report you need a Picture object Place it in the required place of report design page and write the following TfrxReport OnBeforePrint event handler in Delphi code procedure TForml frxReport1lBeforePrint Sender TfrxReportComponent begin if Sender Name Picturel then T rxPictureView Sender Picture Assign Chartl TeeCreateMetafile False Rect 0 0 Round Sender Width Round Sender Height end where Picturel Picture object name Chart your Delphi chart Note When you have external Delphi code assigned to the event handlers of the TfrxReport component you must run from the compiled exe Not by previewing from within t
369. xt of an object Tags are disabled by default to enable them either select the Allow HTML tags item in the object context menu or enable the AllowHTMLTags property in the object inspector Here is the list of supported tags lt b gt bold text lt 1 gt text 1n italic lt u gt underlined text 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 219 lt sub gt subscript lt sup gt superscript lt font color gt font color lt nowrap gt text which does not get broken up when usiong WordWrap but gets transported wholly Notice that not too many tags are supported but it 1s rather enough for the majority of applications It is impossible to modify font size and name otherwise the text rendering unit in FastReport would become very complex The following examples demonstrate how these tags can be used text lt b gt bold text lt b gt i text lt gt b i bold in italic b i mc sup 2 sup A sub 1 sub B lt sup gt 2 lt sup gt this is a usual text font color red gt and this is a red one lt font gt this is a usual text font color2 8030 gt this is an orange one lt font gt text bold text text in italic bold and in italic this is usual text and this is red ane this 16 a usual text and this 15 an orange one L E 9 1 2 5 Displaying expressions with the help of the Text object Displaying ex
370. zed as a matrix Time is inserted on the X axis harmonics and frequency respectively on the Y axis and the amplitude of the corresponding harmonic FFT Z x y on the Z axis The data can be grouped in various ways On the time axis you can as known from the RMS diagram either demonstrate all data raw data or data interpolated in a definite time basis Additionally you can choose whether you would like to do the grouping by hourly synchronizing the data That means at a time basis of 600 s data points would be generated at 00 00 00 10 00 20 etc o clock The data are averaged when being grouped Assuming that you have a time basis of 60 you would receive data averaged every minute The Y or harmonics axis can be subdivided by three ways 1 Full Spectrum All lines are shown up to the maximum possible frequency end 2 Grouped The lines are grouped into harmonics and interharmonics whereas you can indicate the number of lines used for calculation by the group width The separate lines are averaged by RMS Furthermore you also have the possibility to integrate half values of lines into the calculation A width of 2 means that you take two lines to the left and two lines to the right side of the harmonic line that is 5 altogether for the RMS calculation This is also practicable for the interharmonics In this case you have to indicate the range of lines of the interharmonics you would like to select 3 Frequency Bands Fi
371. zoom in out 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 81 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 82 Visualization of Measured Data g L IE i p c 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 83 Full FFT Spectrum 5 5 Full FFT Spectrum Settings 5 5 1 Settings 5 5 1 1 5 5 1 1 1 Settings Full FFT Spectrum Please choose Full FFT Spectrum of the following icons in order to establish a Full FFT Spectrum chart 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh Visualization of Measured Data 84 After clicking OK you to the setup dialogue Full Spectrum FFT Editor Default Module switcher Caption Test Full FFT Description Administrator Raw Data Time based ae Time based rounded Head Write Execute s Group O O C Autorefresh Others L E C3 All frequency lines End 2000 Hz Grouped harmonics Start Limit speciicatiors Limit Average Quantil 2 C3 Maximum O Quantile In contrast to the usual FFT diagram the Full FFT Spectrum Diagram is only able to 2010 DEWETRON Gmbh 85 show frequency bars in every harmonic and interharmonic wave but also to give access to all calculated frequency bars of DEWESoft This would be a 5 Hz bar when having a fundamental frequency of 50 Hz The data can be visuali

PMT User Manual - Dewetron America

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents